Aficio 5106 5206sm

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 517

A172/A199

SERVICE MANUAL
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES PN: RCSM5206
®

SERVICE MANUAL ®

A172/A199

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES


A172/A199
SERVICE MANUAL

PN: RCFM5206
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information regarding
service techniques, procedures, processes and
spare parts of office equipment distributed by
Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be
either service trained or certified by successfully
completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program.

Unt rained and uncer tified users utilizing


information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.

Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE COMPANY
GESTETNER RICOH SAVIN
A199 2606 Aficio 5106 SDC206
A172 2606E Aficio 5206 SDC206E

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY

REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS


* 9/96 Original Printing
1 1/97 Reprint\Interface C Parts Catalog
added
Table of Contents
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1. MACHINE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

2.2 FUNCTIONS: BASIC MODEL VS EDIT MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

2.3 NEWLY-ADDED OPERATING FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

3. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

4. DRIVE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
1. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM THE DFC-ALPHA (A109) . . . . . . 2-1

2. PROCESS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5


2.1 LATENT IMAGE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.1.1 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR CALIBRATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.1.2 GRADATION PATTERN DETECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.2.1 VCNT CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.2.2 FORCED TONER CONSUMPTION MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.2.3 FORCED TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

3. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9


3.1 DRUM CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

3.2 DRUM CHARGE CORONA WIRE/GRID CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

3.3 DRIVE MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3.4 DRUM LUBRICATION MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

4. IMAGE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13


4.1 IPU SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

4.2 ACS (AUTO COLOR SELECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

4.3 RGB FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

4.3.1 Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

4.3.2 Auto Image Density Control (Full Color) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

SM i A172/A199
4.4 COLOR CORRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

4.4.1 Image Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

4.4.2 Background Density Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

4.4.3 Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

4.4.4 Auto Image Density Control (B/W, Twin Color, Single Color). . . . . . . . . . 2-22

4.5 ACC (AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

4.6 YMCBk FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

5. DEVELOPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
5.1 DEVELOPMENT SLEEVE CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

6. TONER TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26


6.1 TONER AGITATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

6.2 TONER END DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

7. TRANSFER BELT UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28


7.1 TRANSFER BELT BIAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

7.2 TRANSFER BELT LUBRICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

8. TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30


8.1 TRANSFER BELT/ROLLER HEATER CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

8.2 TRANSFER ROLLER BIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

8.3 TRANSFER ROLLER LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

8.4 PAPER DISCHARGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

9. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34


9.1 ROLLER CLEANING MECHANISM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

9.2 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

10. OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36


10.1 OPERATION PANEL CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

10.2 OPERATION CONTROL BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

10.3 OP-PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

1.2 MACHINE LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

A172/A199 ii SM
2. COPIER (A172/A199). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

2.1.1 Copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

2.1.2 Optional Holder (A702-18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

2.2 COPIER SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

2.3 COPIER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

2.4 PAPER SIZE CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

2.5 OPTIONAL HOLDER (A702-18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

2.6 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

2.7 UPPER AND LOWER TRAY HEATERS (OPTIONS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

3. DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33


3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

4. SORTER (A322) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37


4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

5. FILM PROJECTOR (A718) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44


5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

6. CONTROLLER INTERFACE TYPE-C (A583-05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52


6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

SERVICE TABLES
1. SERVICE PROGRAM MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


1.1.1 Service Program Access Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.1.2 To Exit SP Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.1.3 To Return to the Index Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

1.1.4 Change the Menu Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

1.1.5 To Make a Copy While in SP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

1.1.6 To Input Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

1.1.7 To Clear the Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

SM iii A172/A199
1.2.1 [1] SP ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

1.2.2 [2] SP Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

1.2.3 [3] SP Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

1.2.4 [4] SP Special Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

1.2.5 [5] Jam/SC Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

1.2.6 [6] Operation Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

1.2.7 [7] Counter Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

1.2.8 [8] Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

1.2.9 [10] Special Mode Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

1.2.10 Input Check Mode Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

1.2.11 Output Check Mode Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

2. ADMINISTRATOR TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67


2.1 ADMINISTRATOR TOOLS ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

3. TEST POINTS/DIP SWITCHES/LEDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68


3.1 MAIN CONTROL BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

3.2 IPU BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

3.2.1 DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

3.2.2 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69


4.1 PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


1. COLOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.1.1 Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

1.1.2 To recall the settings that were in use before the ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

1.1.3 To change the value of the γ correction data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

2. LASER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7


2.1 WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

3. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8


3.1 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND WIRE CLEANER PAD
REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

3.2 DRUM LUBRICANT BAR REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

3.3 WIRE CLEANER MOTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

3.4 INSTALLING A NEW DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

A172/A199 iv SM
4. DEVELOPMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
4.1 DEVELOPER COLLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

4.2 DEVELOPER INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

5. TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20


5.1 BELT LUBRICANT BAR REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

5.2 BELT LUBRICANT BAR SOLENOID REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

6. TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22


6.1 ROLLER LUBRICANT BAR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

7. FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24


7.1 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

7.2 FUSING PRESSURE (NIP BAND WIDTH) CONFIRMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

8. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
8.1 OPTICS COOLING FAN FILTER REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

8.2 OPERATION PANEL CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

8.3 POINT ACCURACY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

9. A172/A199 Fiery XJ System Printer γ Adjustment


Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
9.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

9.2 To change the value of the γ correction data.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

9.2.1 For Letter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

9.2.2 For Photo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

TROUBLESHOOTING
1. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.1 SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

1.2 SCANNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

1.3 PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

1.4 DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

1.5 AROUND THE DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

1.6 TRANSFER BELT / ROLLER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

1.7 PAPER FEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

1.8 FUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

1.9 COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

1.10 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

SM v A172/A199
1.11 OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

1.12 ACC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

2. BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

3. OPERATION PANEL SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODES . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30


3.1 OPERATION PANEL SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

3.2 STARTING THE OPERATIONAL DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

3.3 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

3.4 Details about Operation Panel Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

3.4.1 Main RAM read/write test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

3.4.2 System ROM check sum test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

3.4.3 Video RAM read/write test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

3.4.4 VGA test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

3.4.5 LCD pattern test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

3.4.6 Touch panel test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

3.4.7 LED/Conventional key test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

3.4.8 (8) CMOS RAM test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

4. PROBLEMS DETECTED AT TESTS AND SUSPECTED


UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

DUAL JOB FEEDER DF62 (A610)


1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

2. COMPONENT LAYOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3


2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

4. ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

5. SEPARATION AND FEED MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

6. FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

8. TRANSPORT MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12


8.1 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

8.2 THIN/THICK ORIGINAL MODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

9. ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

A172/A199 vi SM
10. TRANSPORT BELT LEVELING MECHANISM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

11. LIFT MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

12. SPECIAL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18


12.1 PRESET MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

12.2 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED (AUTO REVERSE) MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

12.3 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

13. TIMING CHARTS WITH ORIGINAL MISFEED DETECTION . . . 7-23


13.1 A4 SIDEWAYS: ONE-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

13.2 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

13.3 A4 SIDEWAYS: TWO-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

14. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26


14.1 DIP SWITCHES AND SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

14.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

14.3 LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

14.4 FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

15. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28


15.1 UPPER COVER REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

15.2 TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

15.3 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

15.4 FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

15.5 ORIGINAL SET/FEED, REGISTRATION-1/-2, AND ORIGINAL


WIDTH-1/-2/-3 SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

15.6 FEED-OUT UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

15.7 FEED-OUT MOTOR REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

15.8 INVERTER SOLENOID REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

15.9 FEED-OUT SENSOR REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

15.10 INVERTER ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

15.11 DF POSITION/APS START SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

15.12 BELT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40

15.13 FEED-IN UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

15.14 FEED-IN MOTOR REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

15.15 FRICTION BELT MOTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

15.16 FEED-IN CLUTCH REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

15.17 STOPPER SOLENOID REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

15.18 VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

SM vii A172/A199
Rev. 1/15/97
15.18.1 One-sided Thin Original Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

15.18.2 Two-sided Original Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48

15.19 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

15.20 PREVENTING THE REAR SIDE OF ORIGINALS FROM BECOMING


DIRTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

SORTER CS250 (A322)


1. SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM THE BASE COPIER’S


SORTER (A511) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

FILM PROJECTOR UNIT SPU 3 (A718)


1. SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

2. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM THE BASE COPIER’S


FILM PROJECTOR (A718) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

CONTROLLER INTERFACE TYPE C (A583)


1. SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

2. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM THE BASE COPIER’S


FILM PROJECTOR (A718) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

3. PARTS CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

A172/A199 viii SM
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
2. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers
off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from
electrified or mechanically driven components.
4. If the hot roller temperature is low when the main switch is turned on, the
copier starts process control self check automatically. Keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components to avoid any injury.
5. If the start key is pressed before the copier completes the warm-up period
(Start key starts blinking red and green alternatively), keep hands away
from the mechanical and the electrical components as the copier starts
making copies as soon as the warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot
while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those
components with your bare hands.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS


1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your
eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove
with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical
attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS


1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course
on those models.
2. The RAM board on the main control board has a lithium battery which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery only with an identical
one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAM board. Do
not recharge or burn this battery. Used batteries must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.

 1996 By Ricoh Company Ltd. All rights reserved

SM i A172/A199
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate the toner bottle or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductor according
to local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do
not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or
not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair
of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be
repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser
subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The
laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore
directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service
depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.

 DANGER
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.

 WARNING FOR LASER UNIT


DANGER: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the
procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser beams can
seriously damage your eyes.

CAUTION MARKING:

A172/A199 ii SM
INTRODUCTION
The A172/A199 copier (product name: LILY) is based on the A109 copier
(DFC-ALPHA), the base copier.
This documentation gathers the A172/A199 differing points from the base
copier that service personnel will need to maintain this copier. Therefore, this
documentation should be treated as an insert to the base copier’s service
manual, although it has a separate binder. It should always be utilized along
with the base copier’s service manual.

NOTE: Please refer to page 1-9 for machine code/model number


information.

SM iii A172/A199
TAB POSITION 8 TAB POSITION 7 TAB POSITION 6 TAB POSITION 5 TAB POSITION 4 TAB POSITION 3 TAB POSITION 2 TAB POSITION 1
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
SORTER A322

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
FILM PROJECTER UNIT A718

INSTALLATION
CONTROLLER INTERFACE A583

SERVICE TABLES

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

TROUBLESHOOTING

DUAL JOB FEEDER A610

SORTER A322
OVERALL
MACHINE INFORMATION
1. MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Overall Machine
Information
4
2
1
3

- Copier - - Full System -


Item Machine Code Note No.
Copier • A172 is the edit version with a full color
operation panel.
• A199 is the non-edit version with a black &
A172 white operation panel.
1
A199 • An English language ROM board is installed
in -*17/29/10/22/15 machines.
• No language ROM board is installed in
-27/26 machines.
Dual Job Feeder • Common with A175/A176/A177/A191/A192
A610 2
copiers.
Sorter (15-bin) • A sorter adapter (A527) is required for
A322 3
installation.
Film Projector Unit A718 • A holder (A702-18) is required for installation. 4
Holder • The holder can be installed independently as
A702-18 5
an original table.
Language ROM A654 • The following languages are available:
board (Not for US English (A4), German, French, Italian, —
(for operation panel) version) Spanish, (Universal).

*Note: -17 is for US version units.


Refer to page 1-9 for Machine Code / Model
Number information

SM 1-1 A172/A199
2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Configuration: Console
Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Resolution: 400 dpi
Gradations: 256 gradations
Original Type: Sheet/book, object
Original Size: Maximum: A3 (lengthwise), 11" x 17" (lengthwise)
Original Alignment: Rear-left corner
Copy Paper Weight: • Paper Tray: 64 - 104.7 g/m2 or 17 - 28 lb
• Bypass Feed Tray: 64 - 157 g/m2 or 17 - 42 lb
NOTE: With paper heavier than 104.7 g/m2 or
28 lb, use the bypass feed tray and
select Thick Paper mode.
Available Copy Paper Size:
Tray Paper Direction A4/A3 version LT/DLT version
A3, A4, 81/2" x 13" (F4), 11" x 17" (DLT), 11" x 15",
81/4" x 13" 10" x 14", 81/2" x 14" (LG),
Lengthwise 8" x 13" (F),
1st /2nd
81/2" x 11" (LT),
Tray
8" x 101/2", 8" x 10"
A4, A5 11" x 81/2" (LT),
Sideways
81/2" x 51/2" (HLT)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, 11" x 17" (DLT), 11" x 15", 10" x 14",
Lengthwise 81/2" x 14" (LG), 81/2" x 13" (F4), 81/4" x 13", 8" x 13" (F),
3rd Tray 81/2" x 11" (LT), 8" x 101/2", 8" x 10", 51/2" x 81/2" (HLT)
Sideways A4, B5, A5, 11" x 81/2" (LT), 81/2" x 51/2" (HLT)
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 11" x 17" (DLT), 10" x 14",
81/2" x 11" (LT),
Lengthwise
8" x 13" (F),
Bypass 51/2 x 81/2" (HLT)
Feed
Tray A4, B5, A5, B6, 81/2" x 11" 81/2" x 11" (LT),
Sideways
51/2" x 81/2" (HLT)
Non-standard Horizontal direction: 148 - 432 mm or 5.8" - 17.0"
paper size Vertical direction: 100 - 297 mm or 3.9" - 11.7"

A172/A199 1-2 SM
Warm-up Time: About 8 minutes (at 20°C or 68°F)
First Copy Time: • Full Color (4 scans): 15.5 seconds

Overall Machine
(A4 or 81/2" x 11" sideways) • Single Color:

Information
Black, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan: 8.8 seconds
Red, Green, Blue, Orange, Light Green:
11.5 seconds.
NOTE: 1) When selecting OHP/Thick Paper
modes, copying speed is reduced.
2) After changing some modes, the first
copy time will take longer than usual.
Copying Speed: • Full Color (4 scans):
(Standard modes) A4 or 81/2" x 11" sideways: 6 copies/minute
A3 or 11" x 17": 3 copies/minute
• Single Color (Black, Yellow, Magenta, Cyan):
A4 or 81/2" x 11" sideways: 31 copies/minute
A3 or 11" x 17": 15 copies/minute
• Single Color
(Red, Green, Blue, Orange, Light Green):
A4 or 81/2" x 11" sideways: 10 copies/minute
A3 or 11" x 17": 5 copies/minute
NOTE: When selecting OHP/Thick Paper
modes, copying speed is reduced.
Non-reproduction Area: • Leading edge: 5 ± 2 mm or 0.2" ± 0.08"
• Side: 2 ± 2 mm or 0.08" ± 0.08", Total less than
4 mm or 0.16"
• Trailing edge: 2 ± 2 mm or 0.08" ± 0.08"

Copy Number Input: Number keys, 1 to 99


Automatic Reset: 1-minute standard setting; can also be set to 10
to 900 seconds in 1-second steps, or to no auto
reset.
Paper Feed: Paper Tray x 3
(500 sheets of paper each)
Bypass Feed Tray
(50 sheets of paper with paper lighter than
104.7 g/m2 or 28 lb)

SM 1-3 A172/A199
Rev. 1/97
Copy Tray Capacity: 100 sheets of paper
Toner Replenishment: Bottle type (340g/bottle)
Toner Type: Type "F" - all colors
Developer Type: Type "F" - all colors
Reproduction Ratio: • A4/A3 version: 25%, 50%, 65%, 71%, 75%,
82%, 93%, 100%, (Full Size),
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%,
400% + User ratio x 2
• LT/DLT version: 25%, 50%, 65%, 74%, 77%,
85%, 93%, 100%, (Full Size),
121%, 129%, 155%, 200%,
400%, + User ratio x 2
Zoom: From 25% to 400% in 1% steps
Power Source: 115 V 60 Hz, more than 12 A (for NA)
220 ~ 240 V 50/60 Hz, more than 7 A (for EU
and AA)
Power Consumption: • Maximum: less than 1.5 kW
(Copier only) • Warm-up: 1.40 kW
• Stand-by: 0.93 k W
• Copy Cycle: 1.20 kW
Noise Emission Sound pressure level (The measurements are
made in accordance with ISO 7779 at the
operator position.)

Copier only
Stand-by Less than 42 dB (A)
Copying Less than 56 dB (A)

Sound power level (The measurements are


made in accordance with ISO 7779.)

Copier only
Stand-by Less than 59 dB (A)
Copying Less than 69 dB (A)

Dimensions (W x D x H): • Copier Only:


692 x 713 x 1026 mm or 27.3" x 28.1" x 40.4"
• Full System*:
1499 x 713 x 1099 mm or 59.1" x 28.1" x 43.2"
(*= Copier + Dual Job Feeder + Sorter + Holder)

A172/A199 1-4 SM
Weight: • Copier Only: 200 kg or 440.8 lb
Optional Equipment • Dual Job Feeder

Overall Machine
Sorter

Information
• Sorter Adapter
• Projector Unit
• Holder for Projector Unit
• Key Counter (procure locally)
• Interface Kit for Controller (Type C)

SM 1-5 A172/A199
Rev. 1/16/97
2.2 FUNCTIONS: BASIC MODEL VS EDIT MODEL
This machine comes in two versions. Refer to the following table for features
available on your machine.
Functions (A172) (A199)
Edit type Basic type
Copy Image Density Adjustment (Auto/Manual)  
Auto Color Selection  
Full Color  
Back  
Single Color  
Twin Color  
Original Image Type Selection  
Paper Selection (Auto/Manual)  
Preset R/E  
Reducing/ Zoom  
Enlarging Size Magnification  
Directional Size Magnification  
Poster Mode  
Centering/Cornering  
Shift/Book Margin Adjustment  
Erase  
Single Copies  
Color
Color Conversion  
Creation Color Erase  
Color Background  
Outline  
Positive/Negative  
Image Shadow  
Creation Mirror  
Slanted  
Image Repeat  
Image Overlay  — ⇐
User Color Memory  
Color Single Color Adjustment  
Adjustment/ Color Balance Adjustment  
Memory
Color Balance Sample  
Image Adjustment  
Area Editing  —
Interrupt Copying  
Recall  
Auto Reduce/Enlarge  
Bypass Feed Copying  
Duplex Copying  
Default Setting  
User Tools  
Display Color Full color Black & white

Note: A109 is the base unit, Ricoh Corp.


model name - NC5006
A172/A199 1-6 SM
Rev. 04/99
2.3 NEWLY-ADDED OPERATING FEATURES
•: Available æ: Not Available

Overall Machine
No. Features (A172/A199) (A109)

Information
1 Auto Image Density Full Color & Black Copy Single Color & Black Copy
2 Auto Color Calibration • æ
3 Duplex Copying • æ
4 Twin Color • æ
5 Single Color 80 (+1) colors 8 colors
6 User Color 48 colors 3 colors
7 Color Back ground 84 (+1) colors 13 colors
8 Paint 84 (+1) colors 13 colors
9 Color Line • (Edit type only) æ
10 Frame Line • (Edit type only) æ
11 Image Overlay • (Edit type only) æ
12 Area Editing See the next page

1. Auto Image Density mode can be selected when in Full Color mode.
2. Auto Color Calibration can be performed by the user.
3. Using the by-pass feed tray, rear side copying is available.
4. Twin Color mode copies black parts in black and other parts in the
selected color.
5. Single Color
(8 colors x 4 density levels) + (12 user colors x 4 density levels) + 1 scan
color = 81 colors
* scan color = Edit type only
6. User Color
12 colors x 4 density levels = 48 possible colors
The total percentages of the mixed colors must be 255% or less.
7. Color Background
(9 colors x 4 density levels) + (12 user colors x 4 density levels) + 1 scan
color = 85 colors
* scan color = Edit type only
8. Paint (Edit type only)
(9 colors x 4 density levels) + (12 user colors x 4 density levels) + 1 scan
color = 85 colors
* Scan color = Edit type only
9. Color Line (Edit type only)
In the Area Editing mode, designated lines can be colored.
Available colors: 85 colors = 81 Single colors + (Bk x 4 density levels)

SM 1-7 A172/A199
10. Frame Line
In the Area Editing mode, the outlines of the designated areas can be
colored.
11. Image Overlay
This function makes a copy merging images of two originals.
12. Area Editing mode
(A172) (A109)
Area Shape Rectangle, Polygon,Right Angle Rectangle, Polygon, Right Angle
Polygon, Closed Loop, Line Polygon, Closed Loop
Number of Areas Maximum: 500 points Creative Editing: 6 Areas
However, 1 area or line must be of 1 area must be of 10 or fewer
30 or fewer points. points Color Editing: 6 Groups
Maximum 500 points
Method of Editor Pen and Cursor Cursor only
Designating
Areas
Canceling Areas Not only single points but already Only single points before closing
closed areas can be cleared. the area can be cleared.
Maximum 15 Groups Creative Editing: 3 Areas
Number of Up to 3 job patterns can be applied. Color Editing: 6 Groups
Groups/Areas Changing the color of one job When in Color Editing mode, up to
pattern will not affect the original 3 job patterns can be applied,
settings of the job pattern. Changing the color of one job
pattern will not affect the original
settings of the job pattern.
Storing the Area Always available. Not available in Creative Editing
Editing job mode.
settings in Available in Color Editing mode.
Program Mode
Canceling Available. However, canceling a Not available.
Groups group will remove it from the total
number of groups.

A172/A199 1-8 SM
Rev. 1/97

Overall Machine
MEMO

Information
Ricoh Corporation:

Copier Model Name: Original Product Name: Machine Code:


NC5006 = DFC-ALPHA = A109
(Model 0)
Aficio Color 5106 = Lily 1 = A199
Aficio Color 5206 = Lily 2 = A172

Accessories:
Model name: Type: Machine Code:
DF62 = Dual Job Feeder = A610
CS250 = 15 Bin Sorter = A322
SPU 2 = Film Projector Unit = A718
Adapter "J" = Sorter Adapter = A527
Holder "C" = Film Proj. Unit Holder = A702-18
Interface Type "C" = Interface Kit for = A583
Controller

MEMO:

SM 1-9 A172/A199
3. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

27* 28* 29 30* 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

26*

1
25*
24
2
23*
3
22 4
5
21* 6
7
20* 8
9*
10
19 11*
12

18*
13

17

16* 15 14*

Units different from A109


Bold Italic : Additional units
Bold * : Modified units

A172/A199 1-10 SM
Overall Machine
Information
1. Pre-cleaning Corona Unit 20. Pressure Roller*
2. By-pass Feed Table 21. Hot Roller*
3. Transfer Belt 22. Development Ozone Filter
4. ID Sensor 23. Black/Cyan Development Unit*
5. Belt Lubricant Bar 24. Drum Potential Sensor
6. Belt Cleaning Blade 25. OPC Drum*
7. Registration Rollers 26. 2nd Scanner*
8. Roller Lubricant Bar 27. 1st Scanner*
9. Transfer Roller Blade* 28. Drum Mirror*
10. Relay Roller 29. Toner Shield Glass
11. Transfer Roller* 30. Charge Corona Unit*
12. Toner Catch Pan 31. Quenching Lamp
13. Toner Collection Bottle 32. Drum Cleaning Blade
14. Paper Discharge Plate* 33. Drum Lubricant Bar
15. Transport Belt 34. Cleaning Brush
16. Magenta/Yellow Development 35. Lens
Unit*
36. f-theta Lenses
17. 3rd Paper Tray
37. CCD Board
18. 2nd Paper Tray*
38. Polygon Mirror
19. 1st Paper Tray

Deleted units from A109


• Lubricant brush

SM 1-11 A172/A199
4. DRIVE LAYOUT

1 2 3
4*
27

26

25 5*
24 6

23 7

22 8
21

20
9
19
18
17 10

11

12

13*

16

14
15

Units different from A109


Bold Italic : Additional units
Bold * : Modified units

A172/A199 1-12 SM
Rev. 1/97

Overall Machine
Information
1. Transfer Belt Position Clutch 15. Paper Feed Motor
2. Scanner Motor 16. 3rd Paper Feed Drive Pulley
3. Scanner Drive Pulley 17. Toner Collection Tank Drive Gear
4. Drum Timing Belt* 18. 2nd Paper Feed Drive Pulley
5. Drum Motor* 19. 1st Paper Feed Drive Pulley
6. Bk-Sleeve Motor 20. Transfer Roller Position Clutch
7. Color-Development Drive Motor 21. Registration Clutch
8. Bk-Development Drive Gear 22. Relay Roller Drive Gear
9. Bk-Development Drive Motor 23. By-pass Feed Drive Gear
10. Color-Development Drive Gear 24. Transfer Belt Drive Pulley
11. Transport Unit Drive Gear 25. Transfer Belt Motor
12. Fusing Unit Drive Gear 26. Lubricant Brush Clutch
13. Transport Motor* 27. Cleaning Motor
14. Tray Lift Motors

SM 1-13 A172/A199
5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Refer to the electrical component layout on the large sheet diagrams in the
pocket at the end of this documentation for symbols and index numbers.

Symbol Name Function Index No.


Printed Circuit Boards
PCB1 DC power supply Provides dc power. 20
PCB2 Lamp regulator Provides dc power for the exposure lamp. 1
AC drive Provides ac power for the hot roller and
PCB3 11
pressure roller fusing lamps.
High voltage supply - Supplies high voltage to the charge corona
PCB4 12
C/G and grid plate.
High voltage supply - Supplies high voltage to the Y/M/C/Bk
B sleeve rollers as development bias or to the
PCB5 26
OPC drum for drum potential sensor
calibration.
High voltage supply - Supplies high voltage to the belt bias roller,
PCB6 13
T1/PCC/BR pre-cleaning corona, and cleaning bias roller.
High voltage supply - Supplies high voltage to the transfer roller.
PCB7 17
T2
High voltage supply - Supplies high voltage to the paper discharge
PCB8 22
D plate.
Main control Controls all copier functions both directly or
PCB9 15
through other control boards.
Interface 1 Interfaces the input/output of electrical
PCB10 21
components with the main control board.
Interface 2 Interfaces the input/output of electrical
PCB11 18
components with the main control board.
Transfer belt motor Controls the speed and direction of the
PCB12 14
drive transfer belt motor.
Paper feed interface Interfaces the input/output of electrical
PCB13 components in the paper supply unit with the 19
main control board.
PCB14 Noise filter Removes electrical noise. 23
PCB15 ID sensor Detects the density of the ID sensor pattern. 127
Operation panel Controls the touch panel display and
PCB16 25
monitors the key matrix.
PCB17 Polygon motor drive Controls the polygon motor speed. 8
CCD Converts the light reflected from the original
PCB18 into analog electrical signals for the three 9
basic colors (R/G/B).
Scanner control Processes R/G/B video signals from the
PCB19 7
CCD board to be sent to the IPU board.
Scanner drive Interfaces the input/output electrical
PCB20 components in the optics cavity with the 3
scanner control board.
PCB21 Image Discriminate Used for anticounterfeiting. 6
Display Editor Interfaces the operation panel board with the
PCB22 interface IPU board (A172 copier only). 10

A172/A199 1-14 SM
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Operation Panel Controls the operation panel.
PCB23 24
Control

Overall Machine
IPU Processes R/G/B video signals from the

Information
PCB24 scanner control board and sends Y/M/C/Bk 2
video signals to the LD unit.
IPU interface Changes the clock frequency of R/G/B video
PCB25 signals and also sends the synchronizing 4
signal for the polygon motor.
LD drive Generates the laser beam for printing the
PCB26 5
latent image on the drum.
Laser synchronizing Detects the laser beam to control the start
PCB27 66
detector timing of main scan writing.
Paper width detecting Detects paper width in the by-pass feed
PCB28 128
table.
PCB29 Wire cleaner drive Controls ths corona wire cleaner operation. 16

Motors
Bk - Development Drives the Bk dual mixing roller.
M1 46
drive
M2 C - Sleeve Turns the C sleeve roller in both directions. 31
M3 M - Sleeve Turns the M sleeve roller in both directions. 35
M4 Y - Sleeve Turns the Y sleeve roller in both directions. 34
M5 Drum Turns the drum. 28
M6 Bk - Sleeve Turns the Bk - sleeve roller in both directions. 30
Transport Drives the transport unit, fusing unit, transfer
M7 45
roller, and transfer belt cleaning unit.
Color - Development Drives the Y/M/C dual mixing rollers
M8 27
drive simultaneously.
Cleaning Drives the drum cleaning brush, the lubricant
M9 brush, and the transfer belt release 32
mechanism.
M10 Scanner Drives the 1st and 2nd scanners. 29
Transfer belt Turns the transfer belt drive roller in both
M11 33
directions.
Paper feed Drives the paper feed sections and the cam
M12 39
gear for the toner collection bottle.
M13 Polygon Turns the polygon mirror. 47
Bk - Toner supply Drives the Bk toner transport and agitation
M14 43
mechanism.
C - Toner supply Drives the C toner transport and agitation
M15 42
mechanism.
M - Toner supply Drives the M toner transport and agitation
M16 41
mechanism.
Y - Toner supply Drives the Y toner transport and agitation
M17 mechanism. 40

M18 1st tray lift Lifts the 1st tray bottom plate. 36
M19 2nd tray lift Lifts the 2nd tray bottom plate. 37
3rd tray lift Lifts the 3rd tray bottom plate.
M20 38

SM 1-15 A172/A199
Symbol Name Function Index No.
M21 Wire cleaner Drives the wire/grid cleaner 44

Fan Motors
FM1 Fusing exhaust Removes heat from around the fusing unit. 49
Charge inlet Provides air flow around the drum charge
FM2 48
section.
Inner cooling Provides air flow around the toner tank and
FM3 57
development units.
FM4 IPU cooling Provides air flow around the IPU board. 52
Polygon motor Provides air flow around the polygon motor.
FM5 53
cooling
Transport Sucks in air to attract copy paper to the
FM6/7 55/54
transport belts.
Development exhaust Removes air and heat from around the drum
FM8/9 58/59
and development units.
Optics exhaust Exhausts air from under the lens housing
FM10 51
cover.
FM11 LD cooling Provides air flow to the LD unit. 50
FM12/13 Optics cooling Blows air into the optics cavity. 60/61
DC power supply Provides air flow to transformers and
FM14 cooling radiation plates on the dc power supply 56
board.

Sensors
By-pass feed table Detects whether the by-pass feed table is
S1 73
open or closed.
Oil end Detects whether the silicone oil tank is
S2 91
nearly empty or not.
S3 Exit Detects misfeeds. 100
Transfer belt position Detects whether the transfer belt is in
S4 67
contact with the drum or not.
Humidity Detects humidity and temperature to
S5 88
calculate the absolute humidity.
S6 Drum potential Detects the drum surface potential. 125
M - Toner density Detects the toner density in the M
S7 97
development unit.
Y - Toner density Detects the toner density in the Y
S8 96
development unit.
Bk - Toner density Detects the toner density in the Bk
S9 101
development unit.
C - Toner density Detects the toner density in the C
S10 98
development unit.
S11 Transport Detects misfeeds. 95
Registration Detects the leading edge or trailing edge of
S12 the copy paper to control the rotation of the 74
paper feed and registration rollers.
Registration guide set Detects whether the registration guide plate
S13 is set or not. 70

A172/A199 1-16 SM
Symbol Name Function Index No.
S14 Bk - Toner End Detects the toner end condition of Bk toner. 94
S15 C - Toner End Detects the toner end condition of C toner. 93

Overall Machine
Information
S16 M - Toner End Detects the toner end condition of M toner. 92
S17 Y - Toner End Detects the toner end condition of Y toner. 90
Transfer roller Detects whether the transfer roller is in
S18 72
position contact with the transfer belt or not.
By-pass paper end Detects whether there is paper on the
S19 71
by-pass feed table or not.
By-pass length Detects whether paper on the by-pass feed
S20 table is longer than A4 (Letter) sideways or 69
not.
Toner overflow Detects whether the toner collection bottle is
S21 86
full or not.
1st lift Detects the height of the paper stack in the
S22 76
1st paper tray to stop the 1st tray lift motor.
2nd lift Detects the height of the paper stack in the
S23 77
2nd paper tray to stop the 2nd tray lift motor.
3rd lift Detects the height of the paper stack in the
S24 80
3rd paper tray to stop the 3rd tray lift motor.
1st paper end Detects whether there is paper in the 1st
S25 89
paper tray or not.
2nd paper end Detects whether there is paper in the 2nd
S26 87
paper tray or not.
3rd paper end Detects whether there is paper in the 3rd
S27 84
paper tray or not.
1st paper feed Controls the 1st paper feed clutch off/on
S28 82
timing and the 1st pick-up solenoid off timing.
2nd paper feed Controls the 2nd paper feed clutch off/on
S29 timing and the 2nd pick-up solenoid off 85
timing.
3rd paper feed Controls the 3rd paper feed clutch off/on
S30 83
timing and the 3rd pick-up solenoid off timing.
S31 Original length - 1 Detects original length. 65
S32 Original length - 2 Detects original length. 63
S33 Original width Detects original width. 106
Scanner unit lift Detects whether the scanner unit is lifted or
S34 64
not.
Platen cover position Informs the CPU whether the platen cover is
S35 up or down (related to APS/ARE function). 62

Scanner HP Informs the CPU whether the 1st and 2nd


S36 scanners are at the home position or not. 107

Switches
Front door safety Cuts the ac power line through RA1 and
102/103/
SW1/2/3/4 detects whether the front door is open or not.
104/105

SM 1-17 A172/A199
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Vertical transport set Cuts the ac power line through RA1 and
SW5/6 detects whether the vertical transport guide 78/79
is open or not.
Main Provides power to the copier.
When it is at the standby position, the
SW7 electrical power is supplied only to the 99
heaters (drum, optics anti-condensation,
tray, transfer belt/roller).
2nd paper size Detects the paper size for the 2nd paper tray
SW8 75
and whether the tray is set or not.
3rd tray set Detects whether the 3rd paper tray is set or
SW9 81
not.
1st paper size Detects the paper size for the 1st paper tray
SW10 68
and whether the tray is set or not.

Magnetic Clutches
Transfer belt position Controls the touch and release operation of
MC2 the transfer belt by using drive from the 108
cleaning motor.
By-pass feed Starts paper feed from the by-pass feed
MC3 111
table.
MC4 Registration Drives the registration rollers. 110
Transfer roller Controls the touch and release operation of
MC5 position the transfer roller unit by using drive from the 109
transport motor.
MC6 1st feed Starts paper feed from the 1st paper tray. 113
MC7 2nd feed Starts paper feed from the 2nd paper tray. 114
MC8 3rd feed Starts paper feed from the 3rd paper tray. 115

Solenoids
Cleaning entrance Controls the touch and release operation of
SOL1 seal the cleaning entrance seal on the transfer 122
belt cleaning unit.
Lubricant bar Controls the touch and release operation of
SOL2 124
the lubricant bar.
Cleaning blade Controls the touch and release operation of
SOL3 123
the belt cleaning blade.
By-pass pick-up Controls the up/down movement of the
SOL4 112
pick-up roller in the by-pass feed station.
1st pick-up Controls the up/down movement of the
SOL5 121
pick-up roller in the 1st feed station.
2nd pick-up Controls the up/down movement of the
SOL6 pick-up roller in the 2nd feed station. 119

3rd pick-up Controls the up/down movement of the


SOL7 pick-up roller in the 3rd feed station. 117

1st separation roller Controls the up/down movement of the


SOL8 separation roller in the 1st feed station. 120

A172/A199 1-18 SM
Symbol Name Function Index No.
2nd separation roller Controls the up/down movement of the
SOL9 118
separation roller in the 2nd feed station.

Overall Machine
3rd separation roller Controls the up/down movement of the

Information
SOL10 116
separation roller in the 3rd feed station.

Lamps
L1 Fusing Provides heat to the hot roller. 144
L2 Pressure Provides heat to the pressure roller. 143
Exposure Applies high intensity light to the original for
L3 129
exposure.
Quenching Neutralizes any charge remaining on the
L4 126
drum surface after cleaning.

Heaters
Lower tray (option) Turns on when the main switch is off to keep
H1 138
paper dry in the 3rd paper tray.
Upper tray (option) Turns on when the main switch is off to keep
H2 134
paper dry in the 1st and 2nd paper trays.
Transfer belt/roller Turns on when the transfer roller
thermoswitch detects 20C° or less to keep
H3/H4 136/137
the resistance of the transfer roller at a
constant level.
Optics Turns on when the main switch is off to
H5 148
anti-condensation prevent moisture from forming on the optics.
Drum Turns on when the main switch is off to
H6 prevent moisture from forming around the 131
drum.

Thermistors
TH1 Fusing Monitors the temperature of the hot roller. 133
Pressure roller Monitors the temperature of the pressure
TH2 142
roller.

Thermofuses
Fusing Opens the fusing lamp circuit if the fusing
TF1 132
unit overheats.
Pressure roller Opens the pressure roller lamp circuit if the
TF2 fusing unit overheats. 141

Thermoswitches
Optics Opens the exposure lamp circuit if the 1st
TS1 scanner overheats. 130

Transfer belt/roller Detects the temperature around the transfer


roller in order to keep the resistance of the
TS2 135
transfer roller at a constant level.

SM 1-19 A172/A199
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Counters
Black total Keeps track of the total number of scans for
CO1 black development in both black and color 145
copy modes.
Full color total Keeps track of the total number of scans for
CO2 Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan development in 146
both single and full color copy modes.

Others
Circuit breaker Provides back-up high current protection for
CB1 139
the electrical components.
NF1 Noise filter Removes electrical noise. 140
CC1 Choke coil Removes high frequency current. 147

A172/A199 1-20 SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
1. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM THE
DFC-ALPHA (A109)

No. Item Contents Details


Process Control
Toner End The toner end detection software A toner end sensor has been
1 Detection has been eliminated. added for each color. See 6.2 in
section 2 for details.

Descriptions
Detailed
Latent Image The process control for latent See 2.1 in section 2 for details.
2
Control image control has been modified.
Toner Density VCNT Correction has been See 2.2 in section 2 for details.
3
Control modified.

Around The Drum


OPC Drum The OPC drum layer material To reduce ozone and NOX
1 (Charge Transfer Layer: CTL) reaction with the drum (to
has changed. prolong the lifetime of the drum).
Drum Charge The system has been changed See 3.1 in section 2 for details.
2 Wire from a double-wire to a
single-wire scorotron.
Drum Charge Drum charge wire/grid cleaning See 3.2 in section 2 for details.
3 Wire/Grid has been newly added.
Cleaning
Drum Cleaning Drum lubrication has been newly See 3.4 in section 2 for details.
added.
4 The cleaning brush has been To apply the lubricant evenly on
changed from a looped-bristle the drum. See 3.4 in section 2 for
type to a straight-bristle type. details.

Optics
Exposure Lamp The number of exposure lamp’s To decrease white bands on
1 lighting points has increased copies caused by the exposure
from 7 to 9. lamp’s lighting points.
Infra-red Filter The thickness of the infra-red To achieve better copy quality for
filter has increased from 0.8 mm originals containing infra-red
2 to 1.0 mm. radiance.
(prevents black areas from
becoming reddish)
2nd/3rd Mirrors A heavier stabilizer has been To decrease scanner banding to
3 installed on the 2nd/3rd mirrors. achieve better results for auto
letter/photo separation.
Exposure Glass A more high-conductivity glass is To decrease the possibility of the
4 used. exposure glass becoming dirty
with dust particles.
Reflectors Reflectivity has increased To decrease the temperature
5 because of surface around the optics cavity due to
improvements. less power to the exposure lamp.

SM 2-1 A172/A199
No. Item Contents Details
Optics Cooling The filter material has changed. The air flow has improved to
Fan Filter It is easier to replace the filter. reduce temperature rises in the
6
optics cavity. For replacement,
see section 5 for details.

Image Processing
RGB Filter The RGB filter coefficient for To improve gradation and
1 each copy mode (letter/photo) reproduction quality.
has been changed.
Color Correction New matrixes and masking See 4.4 in section 2 for details.
2 coefficients have been added to
match the new copy modes.
Image The image separation IC has To reduce photo/letter image
3 Separation IC been changed. separation errors in auto detect
mode.

Laser Exposure
Drum Mirror A heavier stabilizer has been To reduce the occurrence of
1
installed on the Drum mirrors. banding on copies.

Development
Development The sleeve rollers have been To eliminate the 1.25 mm
Sleeve Roller changed to a sand-blast type. horizontal lines in halftone image
1
areas caused by the grooves on
the sleeve roller.

Toner Tank
Toner Tank A toner end sensor has been See 6.2 in section 2 for details.
added for each color.
The green lever has been See 6.2 in section 2 for details.
eliminated.
1
A toner tank detection See 6.2 in section 2 for details.
mechanism has been added.
When the tank is pulled out, it is
disconnected electrically from
the main body.

Transfer Belt
Transfer Belt The number of threshold levels See 7.1 in section 2 for details.
Bias that decide transfer belt bias
1 depending on environmental
conditions has changed from 2 to
4.
Transfer Belt The belt lubricant mechanism To prevent partial blanking of
Cleaning has changed to apply lubricant lines (due to incomplete toner
directly to the transfer belt. transfer) from appearing on
2 copies.
See 7.2 in section 2 for details.

A172/A199 2-2 SM
No. Item Contents Details
Transfer Roller
Transfer The transfer roller heater has See 8.1 in section 2 for details.
Belt/Roller been newly added to keep the
1 Heater temperature around the transfer
roller unit at 20°C.
Transfer Roller The material of the transfer roller To improve transfer efficiency.
2
has been changed.
Transfer Roller The number of threshold levels See 8.2 in section 2 for details.
Bias that decide transfer roller bias

Descriptions
depending on environmental

Detailed
conditions has been changed
3 from 2 to 4.
Transfer roller bias settings for See 8.2 in section 2 for details.
duplex copying have been newly
added.
Paper The installed angle of the paper To prevent toner scatter from
Discharge Plate discharge plate has changed. appearing around solid areas in
4
duplex mode. See 8.4 in section
2 for details.
Paper The output of the paper See 8.4 in section 2 for details.
5 Discharge discharge plate changes
Plate Output depending on the copy paper.
Transfer Roller The roller lubricant mechanism See 8.3 in section 2 for details.
6
Cleaning has been newly added.

Fusing Unit
Hot Roller The material of the hot roller has To make it suitable for duplex
1
been changed. copying.
Pressure Roller The material of the pressure To make it suitable for duplex
2
roller has been changed. copying.
Pressure Roller The pressure roller cleaning See 9.1 in section 2 for details.
3 Cleaning mechanism has been newly
added.
4 Ozone Filter Has been eliminated

Paper Feed
2nd Paper The 2nd paper feed station has To meet customers’ requests.
1 Feed Station been changed to the universal
tray type.

Operation Panel
LCD (Liquid The LCD has been changed to a For easier operation and editing.
Crystal Display) 640 x 480 dot type.
1
A172: Full Color Display
A199: B/W Display

SM 2-3 A172/A199
No. Item Contents Details
Operation The operation panel control
Panel Control board has been newly added.
2 —
The main control board no longer
controls the operation panel.
Operation The operation panel self For easier servicing of the
Panel Self diagnostics mode has been machine.
3
Diagnostic newly added.
Mode

Others
Drum Drive The drum drive mechanism has Banding on copies are reduced.
1 been changed from a series of See 3.3 in section 2 for details.
gears to a timing belt system.
Copier Rear The thickness of the rear frame Banding on copies are reduced.
2 Frame has changed from 1.6 mm to 2.0
mm
Fusing exhaust This filter has been eliminated. Because the ozone amount has
3 ozone filter been decreased due to the new
charge corona unit.

Options
1 DJF (A610) See the DJF section for details. —
15-Bin Sorter See the Sorter section for details.
2 (A322) —

Holder The color of the exterior covers


3 —
(A702-18) has been changed.
Film Projector See the Film Projector Unit
4 —
Unit (A718) section for details.

A172/A199 2-4 SM
2. PROCESS CONTROL
2.1 LATENT IMAGE CONTROL
2.1.1 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR CALIBRATION

[A]
[C]

Descriptions
Detailed
RA#1 and RA #2 are contained in RL1
RA #2 on the High Voltage Supply Board – B.

–300 V
–600 V

RA #1 [B]
Main Board

Sensor Output

V600 (V2 )

V300 (V1 )

–300 –600 Actual Voltage

The drum potential sensor [A] output is calibrated during the process control
self check.
The High Voltage Supply Board - B [B] has two relay contacts. Usually RA
#1 grounds the drum. However, during the self check, the main CPU turns
RA #2 on and RA #1 off and applies the test voltage to the drum shaft [C]. In
this condition, the drum is isolated from the ground (floating).
By measuring the output of the drum potential sensor when –300 V (V300) or
–600 V (V600) are applied to the drum, the sensor output is calibrated
automatically. (The machine can now determine the actual drum potential
from the potential sensor output.) Using -300 and -600 V results in a more
accurate calibration of the sensor, since the voltage applied to the supply
board is much closer to the actual value, which is –450 V for VB
(Development bias) during the process control self check.

SM 2-5 A172/A199
2.1.2 GRADATION PATTERN DETECTION

LD Power Level
40 mm

1st 40 mm

2nd

3rd

13th

14th

A latent image of a 14-grade gradation pattern is created for each color (Bk,
C, M, Y) by changing the LD input current.
By creating 14 grades, the machine can achieve a more precise
development gamma factor, resulting in a more reliable pointer control.

A172/A199 2-6 SM
2.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL
2.2.1 VCNT CORRECTION

Pattern Density (mg/cm 2 )


VT

[A]
[C]
[B]

Descriptions
2.5

Detailed
Copies
Drum Potential

Toner Density
Gain Value = –1

Average ≥ 3.8

Gain Value = ±0

Average ≤ 2.3

Gain value = +1

Even if the toner concentration is constant, the toner density sensor output
gradually increases after new developer is installed because of developer
characteristics. Because of this, the machine believes that the amount of
toner in the developer has reduced. This causes the machine to increase the
toner concentration because the machine controls the toner concentration so
that VT stays constant.
To compensate for this, the VCNT gain is corrected by using the
development gamma curve made from the 14-grade pattern during process
control self check.
The present gamma curve [A] and the previous gamma curve [B] are
compared, and the average [C] is calculated. As shown in the diagram, the
gain is decreased by 1 when the average gradient is 3.8 or more. The
maximum compensation value is –16.
Because of this new VCNT correction system, the VCNT correction previously
performed every 200 copies is no longer necessary. Also, due to the use of
the average value, over-reduction of the gain is avoided.

SM 2-7 A172/A199
2.2.2 FORCED TONER CONSUMPTION MECHANISM
For customers that mainly make copies other than full color copies, the
toners other than the selected colors are not used. For these toners, the
amount of toner inside the development unit will gradually increase every 50
copies, since toner agitation is performed at this interval, and some toner is
added at this time (see section 6.1). If this condition continues, toner
scattering and toner density control failure may occur.
To compensate for this, along with the transport screw gear modification, the
machine checks the output of each TD sensor during the process control self
check. If the machine detects VREF-VT ≥ 0.3 V, it determines that there is too
much toner inside the development unit and makes a pattern across the
whole width of the drum to forcibly consume some toner.

2.2.3 FORCED TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM


When the machine makes consecutive copies that have a large portion of
solid image areas, toner supply and agitation from the toner tank cannot
keep up with the toner consumption speed, causing lighter copies, toner
scatter, and related SC codes to appear.
To compensate for this, the output of each TD sensor is checked every
copy. When the machine detects VT-VREF ≥ 0.5 V five times consecutively, it
determines that the amount of toner in the development unit is low. At this
moment, the copy job is interrupted, and toner is fed into the development
unit forcibly. After forced supply, the machine resumes the copy job.

A172/A199 2-8 SM
3. DRUM UNIT
3.1 DRUM CHARGE
This copier uses a single corona wire scorotron system to charge the drum.
The corona wire applies a negative charge to the drum surface. The striped
stainless steel grid plate makes the corona charge uniform and controls the
negative charge on the drum surface to -650 V (standard) by applying a
negative grid bias voltage.

Descriptions
Detailed
The high voltage supply board –C/G gives a constant corona current (–450
µA) to the corona wire, and controls the grid voltage (based on the results of
process control) to maintain proper image density. Grid voltage is controlled
to match changing factors such as a dirty grid plate, dirty charge corona
casing, and OPC chargeability.
The use of the single wire scorotron system has the following advantages.
• The amount of corrosive gas (O3, NOX) is reduced due to the decrease
in total current.
• The life time of the drum is increased due to the decrease in the amount
of corosive gas.
• Uneven charge problems are alleviated due to the increase of the
amount of current per meter of the corona wire.

SM 2-9 A172/A199
3.2 DRUM CHARGE CORONA WIRE/GRID CLEANING

[E]

[B]

[A]

[F]
[C]
[D]
[G]

The flow of air around the charge corona unit may deposit toner particles
and paper dust on the corona wire or corona grid plate. These particles may
interfere with charging and cause uneven charge on the drum.
The wire cleaner [A], which consists of the wire cleaner pads [B] and the grid
plate sponge [C], automatically cleans the wire and the inside of the grid
plate to prevent such problems from appearing.
The wire cleaner is driven by a dc motor. Normally the cleaner is located at
the front end (this is home position). Whenever the main switch is turned on
while the hot roller temperature is below 80°C (before process control), the
wire cleaner motor [D] turns on to bring the wire cleaner to the rear end of
the corona unit and back to the home position. The corona wire and the
inside of the grid plate are cleaned at the same time. This procedure can be
manually performed with an SP mode as well (<2> SP Test, page 4).
When the cleaner moves from the home position to the rear position (the
white arrow in the illustration), only the grid plate is cleaned since the grid
plate sponge is always in contact. When coming back, the rib [E] on the
cleaner is forced by the opening in the corona casing, and the wire cleaner
pads contact the corona wire.
There are no home position or return position sensors. The wire cleaner
drive board at the back of the machine monitors the current applied to the
motor. When the wire cleaner reaches the end, it is stopped and the motor is
locked. At this time, the current of the motor slightly increases and the drive
board detects that it is time to rotate the motor in reverse.
Also, a grounding plate [F] is installed on the back side of the drum stay [G]
to reduce the electrical noise generated from the cleaner motor.

A172/A199 2-10 SM
3.3 DRIVE MECHANISM

[A]

[B]

Descriptions
Detailed
The drum is driven by the drum motor [A] through a timing belt [B].
By the use of a timing belt system, banding on copies are reduced due to the
lower mechanical load.

SM 2-11 A172/A199
3.4 DRUM LUBRICATION MECHANISM
[B]

[A] [B]

[A]

While the drum rotates, the cleaning brush [A] distributes lubricant from the
drum lubricant bar [B] to the surface of the drum.
This mechanism improves the copy quality, especially for letter areas in full
color mode, since it helps the toner transfer to the transfer belt. It also
improves the efficiency of drum cleaning.
To apply the lubricant to the surface of the drum evenly, a straight-bristle
type is used for the drum cleaning brush.

A172/A199 2-12 SM
SM
Display Editor I/F Board Color Controller

• Scanner γ • Image • Bk, C, M, Y LD


Scanner • Magnification I/F Filter Video
IPU I/F • Picture RGB • Color Creation Unit
Control I/F • Printer Controller
Board Element Filter Correction
Board Gradation
Correction
4. IMAGE PROCESSING

ACS

2-13
IDU
Area
4.1 IPU SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM

Auto L/P

Image Separation CPU

Memory

Main Control Board

A172/A199
Detailed
Descriptions
4.2 ACS (AUTO COLOR SELECTION)

Signal
Level MAX
MIN

R G B
*MIN: Also known as "RGB Common Data"

In Auto Color Selection mode, the Black Copy mode or Full Color mode is
automatically selected to match the original image. During the 1st scanning
cycle, the latent image is developed with amount of black toner according to
the corrected R/G/B video signals. If the original does not have any color
area, the 2nd scanning is aborted, and the developed image is transferred
from the transfer belt to copy paper. Then the black and white copy comes
out. If the original has a color area, copying resumes in the full color copy
mode (4 scans).
To recognize if the original has a color area or not, the R/G/B video signals
are compared. If the maximum difference among R/G/B signal levels
(MAX-MIN in the above diagram.) is within a certain range, the original is
considered to be black and white.
This range can be changed by the user.

Black: The range is wider


Color: The range is narrower

Also, the user can select either B/W Priority or Color Priority, to reproduce
the B/W areas or Color areas well, when the ACS mode is selected.

*Factory Setting = Color Priority

A172/A199 2-14 SM
When Color Priority is selected

<ACS: Color Priority>

Bk Conversion Data

255 : Letter areas


: Photo areas
8
7
6

Descriptions
5
UCR ratio: 100%

Detailed
4
3
UCR 2
setting 1
9

0 255
RGB Common Data

a) Letter areas
The UCR ratio is set to 100% to reproduce the letter areas well. Black toner
is always used if RGB Common Data is greater than zero.
b) Photo areas
In photo areas, black toner is not used until RGB Common Data reaches a
certain value, which depends on the UCR adjustment setting (see below).
This can be one of 9 settings as shown in the above illustration.
Also, the UCR ratio changes with image density. The steeper the gradient in
the above graph, the faster the UCR ratio increases with image density (as
RGB Common Data increases).
The UCR range for the photo areas can be changed over 9 levels by the
user (Image Adjustment: UCR Adjustment) to get the best color reproduction.

SM 2-15 A172/A199
When B/W Priority is selected
<ACS: B/W Priority>

Bk Conversion Data

255 : Letter areas


: Photo areas

UCR ratio: 100%

0 255
RGB Common Data

a) Letter areas
The UCR (Under Color Removal) ratio is set to 100% to reproduce the letter
areas well.
b) Photo area
The UCR ratio is set to a higher value than for the Color Priority default
setting (level 5), so that low image density areas of B/W originals can be
reproduced well.

A172/A199 2-16 SM
4.3 RGB FILTER

RGB Input

RGB Filter
Filtering

ADS (Full Color)

RGB Output

Descriptions
(to Color Correction)

Detailed
4.3.1 Filtering
To improve the image reproduction, the appropriate filter coefficients are
applied to the R/B/G video signals, depending on the selected image modes
(letter/photo) or the result of Auto Letter/Photo separation.

4.3.2 Auto Image Density Control (Full Color)


This mode prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies.
The Auto Image Density Level can be changed using the User Tools. (There
are 5 levels.)

When Full Color mode and Auto Image Density mode are selected, video
signals corresponding to the background are detected and their output level
is set to zero. The threshold for detecting the background can be changed
over 5 levels using the User Tools.

RGB
Output Data

RGB Input Data


Threshold

SM 2-17 A172/A199
4.4 COLOR CORRECTION

(from RGB Filter)

RGB Input

Color
Correction
Positive/Negative

Background Density Control


YMCBk
ACC CPU

Contrast
YMCBk
Scan
Memory
Color
ADS
(B/W, Twin Color, Single Color)

Color Conversion

Y M C B k Output

A172/A199 2-18 SM
4.4.1 Image Modes
RGB video signals are converted to YMCBk video signals using a color
conversion table.

Descriptions
a) Printed Photo/Glossy Photo mode

Detailed
A suitable color conversion table for Printed Photo or Glossy Photo mode is
applied to improve the reproduction of such originals.
b) Copied Photo/Map mode
A suitable color conversion table for Copied Photo or Map mode is applied to
improve the reproduction of such originals.
c) Auto Letter/Photo mode
At the factory setting, Printed Photo mode is applied for the photo areas
detected by the Auto Letter/Photo mode.
The user can change this setting so that either of the following modes will be
applied for photo areas.
• Printed Photo mode
• Glossy Photo mode
• Copied Photo mode

SM 2-19 A172/A199
4.4.2 Background Density Control

RGB
Output Data

Darker
Setting

Lighter
Setting

RGB Input Data

There a 9 levels of background density controls.

a) Lighter setting
Small effect on the high image density areas, but the low image density
areas are reproduced lighter or erased.
b) Darker setting
Small effect on the high image density areas, but the low image density
areas are reproduced darker.
When combining the Full Color mode and Auto Image Density mode, the
background density may be reproduced lighter or erased. To reproduce the
color background well, it is necessary not to use Auto Image Density mode
but to adjust the background density control to a darker setting.

A172/A199 2-20 SM
4.4.3 Contrast

RGB
Output Data

Weaker

Descriptions
Detailed
Stronger

RGB Input Data

Contrast between light and dark areas of the image can be adjusted. There
are over 9 levels.

a) Strong setting
The density of the dark image areas is increased and the density of the light
image areas is decreased.
b) Weaker setting
The density of the dark image areas is decreased and the density of the light
image areas is increased.

SM 2-21 A172/A199
4.4.4 Auto Image Density Control (B/W, Twin Color, Single Color)
This mode prevents the background of an original from appearing on copies.
The Auto Image Density Level can be changed using the User Tools. (There
are 5 levels.)

When B/W, Single Color, or Twin Color and Auto Image Density mode are
selected, this function combines the Background Density Control and
Contrast as shown in the following table.
Background
ADS Level Contrast
Density Control
↑ +2 –1 0
Dark +1 –1 +1
Standard 0 –1 +2
Light –1 –2 +2
↓ –2 –2 +3

A172/A199 2-22 SM
4.5 ACC (AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION)

Test Pattern
Bk
C
Photo mode
M
Y

Bk
C
Letter mode
M

Descriptions
Y

Detailed
(4 scan)

Target γ

Actual γ

Image Density

L M H

Auto Color Calibration can be performed using the User Tools.


A test pattern, including the patterns for Letter mode and Photo mode, will be
printed first. The user then scans the test pattern. The resulting printer
gamma curve depends on the results of scanning the test pattern.
There are adjustment tables for L, M, H, and ID MAX values stored in the
machine. The machine applies these to approximate the actual curve to the
target curve as closely as possible.
If needed, the printer gamma curve can be adjusted further manually in the
SP mode. (See section 5, Color Balance Adjustment)
Also, a printer gamma setting can be stored in memory (temporarily or
permanently) and curve can be recalled. When the ACC is performed, the
current printer gamma setting will be automatically stored in the temporary
memory, which can be recalled after the ACC is performed. (See Section 4,
Service Tables, SP Table.)

SM 2-23 A172/A199
4.6 YMCBk FILTER
In addition to the RGB filter, the most suitable software filter is applied to
YMCBk video signals to improve the image reproduction.
• High Contrast filter (emphasizing edges)
• Smoothing filter
Soft Sharp
(Smoothing) (Emphasizing Edges)
Standard

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Letter
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Applied mode
Filter Table Photo
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
mode

The filter can be selected by the user by adjusting the Sharp/Soft level
(Image Adjustment).

A172/A199 2-24 SM
5. DEVELOPMENT
5.1 DEVELOPMENT SLEEVE CLEANING

Descriptions
Detailed
To achieve a faster CPM for black and white originals when copying 1 to 1 or
using Auto Color Select (ACS) mode, the development sleeve cleaning
mode previously performed for every original is now performed periodically.
For A4 or smaller size originals, a maximum of 40 black and white copies
can be made without the machine stopping to perform development sleeve
cleaning (20 copies for originals larger than A4 size). If a color original is
detected in between when using ACS mode, the cleaning mode is executed,
and the original counter will be reset. This setting can be changed with SP
mode.

SM 2-25 A172/A199
6. TONER TANK
6.1 TONER AGITATION

One Cycle
Clockwise

Stop

Counter
Clockwise
[B] 1.0S 0.3 0.5S 0.3

Cycle 1 2 3 4 5

Clockwise
Stop
Counter
Clockwise

[A]
Toner End Detection is done here

Under the following conditions, the toner agitator [A] inside each toner tank
rotates to agitate the toner inside the toner tank.
• Whenever the main switch is turned on while the hot roller temperature is
below 110°C.
• After a multi-copy job is completed and more than 50 copies have been
made since the last toner agitation.
• When the optional ARDF is used, the machine stops the copy cycle after
150 copies have been made since the last toner agitation.
• When the toner tank is pushed in during a near toner end or toner end
condition.

As shown above, one cycle of this agitation consists of rotating in both


directions, and is performed for five consecutive cycles.
In order to prevent unnecessary toner from entering the development unit
during agitation, the transport screw gear [B] has some play before rotation
is transmitted to the transport screw.

A172/A199 2-26 SM
6.2 TONER END DETECTION

[A]

Descriptions
Detailed
Four toner end sensors [A] (which are piezoelectric) are installed on the
toner tank to monitor the near end condition for each color toner. Toner end
detection is performed during toner agitation, and the detection sequence is
as follows.
1. Near Toner End Condition
The machine starts sampling the output of the toner end sensor every
0.1 second during the last three cycles of the toner agitation process
(see the previous page). If a no toner condition is detected for 90% of the
samples, the machine enters the near toner end condition.
2. Toner End Condition
When a near toner end condition is detected, a total of 30 copies can be
made using the toner for which the near end condition was detected.
After this, the machine enters the toner end condition and copying using
that toner is disabled.
3. Toner End Recovery
When the front door is opened and the toner tank rails are pulled out and
in, the machine starts to perform the toner end recovery procedure. The
sequence and the recovery condition is the same as for the near toner
end condition detection.

If the toner end condition is not cleared, copying using that particular color
toner is disabled. This prevents the customer from clearing the near end or
toner end condition by simply opening and closing the front cover or turning
the main switch off and on.
The green lever which was previously installed to prevent toner from flowing
into the development unit has been eliminated, due to the change in the
toner end detection mechanism.

SM 2-27 A172/A199
7. TRANSFER BELT UNIT
7.1 TRANSFER BELT BIAS

Transfer Belt Bias (Face Side: Normal Humidity)

Copy Mode
1C 2C 3C 4C
1st 1410 1410 1410 1410
Dev. 2nd 1490 1490 1490
Cycle
3rd 1575 1575
4th 1660

Transfer Belt Bias Depending on Humidity Range (1C Mode: Face Side)

Bias

2075

1740

1410

Low1 Low2 Low3 Normal High

0 5.5 8.5 11.3 21.5


Humidity (g/m3 )

This machine changes the transfer belt bias voltage for every mode and
every copy cycle.
For 1C copy mode, which is more influenced by environmental conditions,
the transfer belt bias output is divided into five ranges by four threshold
values (as mentioned in the table above) and is determined by the output of
the humidity sensor. Only three different bias settings are present as the
factory setting for each environment.
The transfer belt bias voltage data can be monitored in the SP Adjustment
Mode P-5 and 6. These data should not be changed. For more details, see
the SP Mode Section.

A172/A199 2-28 SM
7.2 TRANSFER BELT LUBRICATION

[C]

Descriptions
[C]

Detailed
[E]

[A]
[E]
[A] ON OFF
[B] [D]

A172/A199
A109
Amount

0 50 100 150
Copy Count

The transfer belt lubricant bar [A] on the transfer belt cleaning unit [B] applies
lubricant directly to the transfer belt [C] after every copy.
The on/off movement of the transfer belt lubricant bar solenoid [D] which is
synchronized with the belt cleaning mechanism, pushes the lubricant bar
against the support roller [E] in the transfer belt unit.
Compared with the previous model, the amount of lubricant applied to the
transfer belt will stay at a constant level for every copy cycle. Because of
this, copy quality problems such as partial blanking of lines (due to
incomplete toner transfer) can be reduced.

SM 2-29 A172/A199
8. TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
8.1 TRANSFER BELT/ROLLER HEATER CONTROL

[A]
[B]

[C]

HEATER THERMOSWITCH

The resistance of the transfer roller [A] changes with the environment. It is
especially at low temperatures.
The transfer roller thermoswitch [B] detects the temperature around the
transfer roller. To keep the resistance of the transfer roller at a constant
level, when the detected temperature is 20°C or less, the transfer belt/roller
heaters [C] turn on until the temperature rises above 20°C.
The heaters are not turned on/off by the main switch. The heaters operate
whenever the copier power cord is plugged in.

A172/A199 2-30 SM
Rev. 8/98
8.2 TRANSFER ROLLER BIAS
<Transfer Roller Bias Coefficient by Humidity Range (1C Mode: Face Side; Normal Paper)>

Descriptions
Detailed
Transfer Roller Bias (Normal Humidity)

Paper Mode
Normal Thick OHP: OHP: Normal: Thick:
Paper Paper Sideways Lengthwise Back Back
1st 1300 1200 2150 2150 1300 1450
2nd 1600 1450 2200 2200 1800 1750
Dev. 3rd 1900 1750 2500 2500 2100 2050
Cycle 4th
(Photo)
1600 1450 2200 2200 1800 1750
4th 1600 1450 2200 2200 1800 1750
(Letter)

The transfer roller bias is determined by the output of the humidity sensor. It
is divided into five humidity ranges by four thresholds, to compensate for
changes in the humidity of surrounding areas to maintain constant copy
quality.
The threshold is divided more towards the low humidity side, resulting in
more sensitivity at the low humidity end. This enables more accurate shift of
the transfer bias with small changes in the environment.
Also, the transfer roller bias is changed for each copy mode and the kind of
copy paper currently used.

NOTE: All values shown on this page are in volts D.C.. values shown
using SP mode <1> SP adjustments, pg 7, are in a data format.

SM 2-31 A172/A199
8.3 TRANSFER ROLLER LUBRICATION

[A] [E]

[D]

[B] [A]

[C]

[D]

The transfer roller lubricant bar [A] above the cleaning blade [B] continuously
applies lubricant directly to the transfer roller [C].
Four spring plates [D] under the transfer roller guide [E] press the lubricant
bar against the transfer roller.
By applying lubricant, the cleaning efficiency of the transfer roller cleaning
blade is increased, which prevents the back side of copies from becoming
dirty with toner and paper dust.

A172/A199 2-32 SM
8.4 PAPER DISCHARGE
[A]

Descriptions
Detailed
[B]

[C]

[B]

Discharge Plate Output

Normal Paper Thick Paper Duplex: Face Duplex: Back


4000 V 3500 V 4000 V 4000 V

The high voltage supply board -D [A] applies ac voltage to the discharge
plate [B]. The discharge plate removes any charge remaining on the paper
[C] to separate the paper from the transfer belt.
To perform an accurate discharge, the output of the discharge plate differs
with the copy mode or paper being used. For OHP mode, discharge is not
performed because the OHP sheet separates from the transfer belt as a
result of its stiffness.

SM 2-33 A172/A199
9. FUSING UNIT
9.1 ROLLER CLEANING MECHANISM

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

[E]

The cleaning roller [A], which is always in contact with the hot roller [B],
collects the toner and paper dust adhering to the surface of the hot roller.
The collected matter is scraped off by a stainless steel blade [C].
The pressure roller cleaning roller [D], which is always in contact with the
pressure roller [E], collects the toner and paper dust adhering to the surface
of the pressure roller. The pressure roller cleaning roller is driven by physical
contact with the pressure roller.
The pressure roller cleaning roller prevents poor copy quality in duplex mode
(face side) and dirt on the back side of copies in normal mode. It also
prevents horizontal lines from appearing on the back side when making OHP
sheets.

A172/A199 2-34 SM
9.2 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Each rollers are controlled at the temperature shown in the table below.
During Copying
Stand-by Manual Duplex
Normal OHP/Thick Paper
(Back Side)
1C 2C, 3C, 4C 1C 2C, 3C, 4C 1C 2C, 3C, 4C
Hot Normal:160 Normal:170
Roller 180 160 170 170 170 Thick Thick
Temp. Paper: 170 Paper: 170

Descriptions
Detailed
Pressure
Roller 120 Hot Roller Temp. - 20 120 120
Temp.

SM 2-35 A172/A199
10. OPERATION PANEL
This operation panel has an LCD (640 x 480 dots). Most of the keys for
functions are displayed on the LCD (Touch panel).
There are two versions of the LCD.
• Basic Model (A199): Black/White LCD
• Edit Model (A172): Full Color LCD + Editor Function
*The scanned image will be displayed on the LCD
in full color (256 colors in total).

10.1 OPERATION PANEL CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

Image Scanning Section Image Processing Unit Image Printing Section

Operation Panel

LCD Touch Panel

VGA Controller

Main Control Board Operation Control Board

Keyboard Controller
Mechanisms/Sensors

Image Data
OP-PORT1 OP-PORT2
C o m m a n d • Control

A172/A199 2-36 SM
10.2 OPERATION CONTROL BOARD

R G B

8 bit 8 bit 8 bit

Descriptions
3 bit + 3 bit + 2 bit = 8 bit

Detailed
Resolution Enlargement Ratio
Full Size 25 dpi 100%
Enlarge 1 50 dpi 200%
Enlarge 2 67 dpi 264%
Enlarge 3 100 dpi 400%
Enlarge 4 132 dpi 528%

The Operation Control Board monitors the commands input by the user, and
sends them to the Main Control Board. Also, the Operation Control Board
controls the operation panel itself (Display Switching, and Display Control).
The data is sent as serial data through the optical fiber between the
Operation Control Board and Main Control Board.
When in area editing mode, the Operation Control Board receives the area
image data (RGB data: 8 bit) from the IPU and displays it in 256 colors on
the large LCD.
As the Operation Control Board has a CPU, an Operation Panel
Self-diagnostic Mode is available. (See Section 6, 3. Operation Panel
Self-diagnostic Mode.)

SM 2-37 A172/A199
10.3 OP-PORT

Operation
Control
Board OP-PORT 2 OP-PORT 1 LCD
+5 V
+12 V
BUZZER
–12 V
LED DATA
SPEAKER
LED MATRIX LED MATRIX

DRIVER
DECODER

SW MATRIX SW MATRIX
KEY DATA
+5 V
MACHINE ID
DIODE MATRIX DC/DC
CONVERTER VR
CONTRAST

VFF

+12 V

CFL HV
INVERTER

+12 V

ADRFF REF VOLTAGE


GENERATION CIRCUIT

SWITCH
X BIAS
CONTROL 1 TOUCH
Y BIAS PANEL
ANALOG
SWITCH SW Y ANALOG
CONTROL 2 X ANALOG

INT2
COMPARATOR

X DATA
AMPLIFIER: X

Y DATA
AMPLIFIER: Y

LCD I/F

The OP-PORT 1 & 2 control the following:


1. Switches and LED Buzzer
2. Touch detection and Touch Point detection
3. Power Supply to the LCD
4. Contrast Adjustment
5. CFL (Cold Fluorescent Lamp) Power Supply inverter function

A172/A199 2-38 SM
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89°F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 90% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 2,000 lux (Do not expose to direct
sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Minimum space 20 m3.
Room air should turn over at least
30 m3/hr/person
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.15 mg/m3 (4 x 10-6, 4 x 10-6, Oz/yd3)
6. If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the

Installation
machine
a) where it will be subjected to sudden temperature changes,
b) where it will be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner,
c) where it will be directly exposed to heat from a heater.

7. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gasses.


8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet)
above sea level.
9. Place the copier on a strong and level base.
10. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.

1.2 MACHINE LEVEL


1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
NOTE: The machine legs may be screwed up or down in order to level
the machine. Set a carpenter’s level on the exposure glass when
you do this.

SM 3-1 A172/A199
1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown:

Copier only

Full system

NOTE: A space of at least 10 cm (3.9") at the rear of the machine is


necessary for smooth air flow into the machine.

A172/A199 3-2 SM
1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
1. Input voltage level: 115 V/60 Hz: More than 12 A
220 ∼ 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 7 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10%
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.
NOTE: a) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
b) Avoid multi-wiring.
c) Outlet should be properly grounded.

Installation

SM 3-3 A172/A199
2. COPIER (A172/A199)
2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quality and condition of the accessories in the box against the
following list:

2.1.1 Copier
1. Operating Instructions (except -27 machines) .......................... 1
2. NECR (-17, -27, and -29 machines only) ................................. 1
3. Editor Pen ................................................................................. 1
4. Copy Tray.................................................................................. 1
5. Operating Instructions Holder .................................................. 1
6. Total Counter Resetting Tool .................................................... 1
7. Leveling Shoe ........................................................................... 4
8. Instructions Procedure Sheet.................................................... 1
9. Philips Truss Head Screws M4 x 8 .......................................... 2
10. Caution Decal - 4 Languages (-22, -26, -27 only)..................... 1

2.1.2 Optional Holder (A702-18)


1. Base Bracket ............................................................................ 1
2. Holder Cover ............................................................................ 1
3. Front Cover ............................................................................... 1
4. Lower Cover.............................................................................. 1
5. Philips Pan Head Screws M4 X 6 ............................................. 8
6. Philips Truss Head Screws M4 X 8 .......................................... 3

A172/A199 3-4 SM
2.2 COPIER SEPARATION

[A]

Installation
[C]

[B]
[C]

The machine can be separated into two units (the main frame and the paper
supply unit). Separation of the machine will help the transportation to the
customer’s site.
1. Open the front door and remove the front securing brackets [A] (4 screws
each).
2. Remove both upper and lower rear covers (4 screws each).
3. Remove the rear securing brackets [B] (4 screws each).
4. Disconnect the connectors running between both units, and free them
from the harness clamps.
5. Lift up the machine by using the handles.
NOTE: a) When lifting the machine, lift straight up.
b) Positioning pins [C] are located at the rear. When attaching, make
sure to clear the harnesses out of the way.

SM 3-5 A172/A199
2.3 COPIER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: Since the installation procedure is not packed with the copier as an
accessory, always bring this manual with you.

[B]

[A]

NOTE: a) Before performing the following installation procedure, be sure to


plug in the copier power cord due to the change of material of the
transfer roller. However, don’t switch on yet.
For detailed information about the new roller, see the Detailed
Description section.
b) Insert the leveling shoes [A] under the leveling feet [B], and level
the machine if necessary. (The leveling feet can be screwed up or
down.)
c) Keep the factory setting data sheet under the operation panel for
future use. We recommend making a copy to be kept at your office
also.
d) Before removing the drum protective sheet, always remove all the
development units out of the copier.

A172/A199 3-6 SM
[A]
[A]

Installation
[B]

1. Remove the tape strips.


2. Open the front doors then remove the tape strips [A] around the toner
tank and the tapes [B] securing the registration guide plates (knobs B1
and B3).

SM 3-7 A172/A199
[B]

[C] [E]
[A]

[D]

3. Remove the right inner cover [A] (3 screws) and the bracket [B] securing
the toner tank to the front side plate (1 screw).
4. Remove the bracket [C] securing the transfer roller unit (1 screw).
5. Install the operating instruction holder [D] (2 truss screws [M4 x 8]).
6. Push and slide out the toner tank [E]. Then remove the toner tank (2
screws).

A172/A199 3-8 SM
[C]

[D]

[B]
[A]

Installation
[F]

[E]

7. Lower the toner collection duct [A] (1 hook [B]).


8. Remove the yellow toner supply receptacle [C] (1 screw).
9. Disconnect the four connectors [D] and free them from the three harness
clamps.
10. Remove the transfer belt stay [E] (5 screws).
11. Pull out and remove the transfer belt cleaning unit [F].
NOTE: To prevent the lubricant bar from being scratched, pull the handle
of the transfer belt unit slightly to the right while you pull the
transfer belt cleaning unit out.

SM 3-9 A172/A199
[C]

[B]
[A]

[I]
[H]

[H]

[D]

[G]

[E]
[F]

12. Carefully pull and remove the transfer belt unit [A]. (While holding the
handle [B], release the lever [C])
NOTE: There are stands at the rear side of the transfer belt unit. After
pulling out the unit out of the machine, stand the transfer belt unit
as shown.
Do not touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
13. Remove the charge corona unit [D] (1 screw, 1 connector), PCC [E] (1
screw) and ID sensor board [F] (1 screw).
14. Remove the knob [G] and the two screws [H] and pull out all the
development units slightly (2 ∼ 3 cm) then remove the drum stay [I].

A172/A199 3-10 SM
[B]
[D]

[C]

Installation
[A]

[E]
[G]

[F]

15. Remove the magenta/yellow development unit [A] (1 release lever [B])
and remove the black/cyan development unit [C] (1 release lever [D]).
16. Disconnect the drum’s toner collection pipe [E] as shown.
17. Remove the knob screw [F] (counterclockwise) and pull out the
quenching lamp.
18. Remove the drum unit [G] (2 screws).

SM 3-11 A172/A199
[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]

19. Turn the drum unit over.


NOTE: Let the unit rest on it’s casing.
20. Remove the drum protective sheet [A].
21. Loosen then move the knob [B]. (Move the knob from [C] to [D].)
• [C] position = No pressure applied
• [D] position = Pressure being applied
22. Tighten the knob [B] at the lower position [D].
23. While pressing up the latch [E] to apply the cleaning blade pressure,
rotate the drum counterclockwise 3 times to ensure that setting powder is
evenly applied, as shown.
NOTE: Hold only the edge of the drum to rotate it (within 1 cm from the
end).

A172/A199 3-12 SM
[C]
[A]

[C]

[E]

[D]

[F]

Installation
[G]

[B]

24. Reinstall the following units or parts in the machine as follows.


1) Slide in the drum unit and secure it to the shaft with the knob screw.
2) Set the drum stay [A] in position and secure the drum unit (2 screws).
3) Remove the drum stay [A] and reinstall the quenching lamp, toner
collection tube and development units.
NOTE: When reinstalling the magenta/yellow development unit [B],
make sure that the bottom plate fits the rails as shown.
4) Set the drum stay by securing the 2 screws [C] then the knob [D].
5) Reinstall the charge corona unit [E] (1 screw, 1 connector), PCC [F] (1
screw), and the ID sensor board [G] (1 screw).

SM 3-13 A172/A199
Rev. 6/13/97
[A]
[B]

NOTE: In order to release the tension of the transfer belt during


transportation, the Transfer Belt Release Wedges are installed
on the front and rear belt tension roller bearing holders. Please
do not forget to remove the wedges at installation of the machine.

To remove the wedge, push the wedge toward the bearing holder
and slide it inside slightly.
25. Confirm the belt bias roller [A] is in the release position (innermost
position) as shown. If not, turn the shaft [B] with a flat head screwdriver
until the belt bias roller comes to the release position.
NOTE: If the belt bias roller is not in the release position, it will touch the
drum and damage it.
26. Re-install the following units or parts in the following order.
1) Transfer belt unit.
2) Transfer belt cleaning unit
NOTE: To prevent the lubricant bar from being scratched, pull the
handle of the transfer belt unit slightly to the right while you
re-install the transfer belt cleaning unit.
3) Transfer belt stay (5 screws)
4) Four connectors (6P white, 3P red, 3P white, 3P blue)
NOTE: The 2P white connector is not used.
5) Toner collection duct (1 hook)

A172/A199 3-14 SM
+ CAUTION
1. As the fusing unit may be hot, be careful when handling it.
2. Take care not to spill silicone oil on the floor. If silicone oil spills on
the floor, immediately clean it with a silicone oil remover. Silicone
oil is very slippery and can cause someone to slip and fall.

Installation
[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

27. While releasing the lever [A], pull out the fusing unit [B].
28. Open the exit unit [C] (2 "D4" release levers).
29. Loosen the 2 black screws [D] until they moves freely so that the fusing
pressure is being applied.
NOTE: Do not turn the pressure adjustment screws which are located
just beside the screws [D].

SM 3-15 A172/A199
[B] [C]

[A]

[K] [I]

[E]
[G]
[D]
[F]

[H]

[J]

[L]

30. Remove the fusing handle cover [A] (2 screws) and the fusing top cover
[B] (1 screw).
31. Prime the oil supply pad with silicone oil [C].
32. Remove the oil cap [D] and fill the tank with silicone oil to its max level [E].
33. Manually operate the oil pump lever [F] and confirm the proper operation
of the silicon oil supply system [G].
34. Reset the covers, the exit unit, oil cap and the fusing unit.
35. For -26 and -27 machines, perform the following language ROM
installation procedures. For -22 machines, perform if replacement to a
language other than English is needed.
1) Detach the operation panel [H] (2 screws). (Do not remove any
connectors.) Gently place it face down on the platen cover.
2) Remove the securing bracket [I] (2 screws).
3) Install the requested language rom board [J] using the securing
bracket and the accessory screw [K] as shown.
4) Reinstall the operation panel, making sure that the panel is properly
hooked in [L].

A172/A199 3-16 SM
36. Locate the switch actuator [A] inside
the right door and actuate the front
safety switch.

[A]

37. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main switch.
38. Enter SP mode as follows.
1) Press the clear modes key.
2) Wait for 2 or 3 seconds while the display returns to the initial screen.
3) Enter "107" with the number keys.

Installation
4) Hold down the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds.

39. Touch the SP Test Mode key [B].


NOTE: Make sure to use the editor pen when touching the touch panel
display.

[B]

40. Touch the Next key [C] to open page 4.


NOTE: Wait until the development unit drive stops, then start step 41.

[C]

SM 3-17 A172/A199
[F] [C]

[A]

[B]

[B]

41. Remove the black toner supply receptacle [A] (1 screw).


NOTE: Refer to the toner tank lid for the color of the development unit.
42. Remove the developer supply funnel [B] from the bracket [C] and clean
the inner surface.
43. Set the developer supply funnel on the black development section as
shown.
44. Touch the key [D], to enter the output mode.
45. Enter "68" with the number keys, then touch the key [D] again to select
test mode #68 "black development drive motor ON".
46. Touch the Start key [E].
47. Shake a pack of black developer [F] 20 times then pour it in.
48. 1 minute after pouring the developer, touch the stop key [G].
NOTE: Do not touch the stop key within 1 minute, otherwise, the
developer will not be distributed evenly in the development unit.

[G]

[D] [E]
49. Remove the developer supply funnel, then install the toner supply
receptacle.

A172/A199 3-18 SM
50. Install the cyan, magenta and yellow developer in the same manner as
black developer installation (step #40 to #49).
NOTE: To select the "color development drive motor ON" mode, enter
"69" for color instead of 68 for black (refer to step #45).
51. Return the developer supply funnel to the original position.
52. Touch the Previous key [A] to open page 3.

Installation
[A]
53. Perform developer initial setting as follows.
1) Confirm that the main charge corona, PCC, ID sensor boards are set
correctly (1 screw each).
2) Confirm that the toner tank is not installed.
NOTE: If the toner tank is installed, toner is supplied during developer
initial setting and the machine cannot figure out the proper toner
concentration of the new developer.
3) Touch the All Start key [B] to start the developer initial setting. After the
adjustment is completed, the machine stops automatically.
54. Touch the Index key [C].

[C]

[B]

SM 3-19 A172/A199
55. Touch the SP Data Output key [A].

[A]

56. Check whether VT has the same values as VREF for all colors (Bk, Y, M,
C). If not, touch the Index key [B] then return to the test mode page 3 to
perform developer initial setting (step 53) again.

[B]

A172/A199 3-20 SM
[B]

[A]

Installation
57. Put the toner tank [A] on the Accuride rails (2 screws).
58. Add toner [B] for all colors.
NOTE: • Read the instructions on the box for how to add toner.

• Before reinstalling the toner tank, wait at least 30 seconds to


let the toner settle.

59. Slowly push the toner tank [A] in.


60. Close the front doors and install the copy tray.
61. Load A3 or 11" x 17" paper in the 3rd paper tray.
62. Place a C-4 test chart on the exposure glass.
63. Touch the Copy In SP key [C] and make 20 full color copies using A3 or
11" x 17" size paper. (40 full color copies using A4 or 11" x 81/2" is also
acceptable.)

[C]

SM 3-21 A172/A199
64. Wait 5 minutes to ensure that no residual voltage remains on the drum.
NOTE: The process control self check (step 67) must be performed
when there is no residual voltage on the drum.

65. Touch the SP Mode key [A] to enter the SP mode.


[A]

66. Touch the Index key.


67. Touch the SP Special Feature key [B].

[B]

68. Confirm that the PID key [C] is selected for the Process Control Mode
Selection. If not, touch the PID key [C].
69. Touch the Index key [D].

[D]

[C]

A172/A199 3-22 SM
70. Touch the SP Test Mode key [A].

[A]

71. Touch the Next key [B] to open page 4.

Installation
[B]

72. Touch the Process Control Self Check Start key [C]. After the self check
is completed, the machine stops automatically.

+ CAUTION
While process control is taking place, do not touch the knob, drum
stay, or drum shaft. These parts and the fly wheel carry a high
electrical voltage during process control.
73. Touch the Index key [D].

[D]

[C]

SM 3-23 A172/A199
74. Touch the SP Data Output key [A].

[A]

75. Touch the Next key [B] and open page 3.

[B]

76. Check the VD and VL [C] for each color. If the difference between ’Target’
and ’Actual’ for any color exceeds 5, wait 5 minutes and go back to step
72 and perform the process control self check again.
77. Touch the Index key [D].

[D]

[C]

A172/A199 3-24 SM
78. Touch the Exit key [A].

[A]

79. Turn off the main switch and place the accessory switch actuator in its
original position.
80. Reinstall the right inner cover (3 screws) and turn on the main switch.

Installation
81. Copy the C-4 test chart in letter mode and printed photo mode.
82. Perform the ACC procedure. (See chapter 5.)

SM 3-25 A172/A199
2.4 PAPER SIZE CHANGE
[C]

[B]

[B]

[A]

At the customer’s request, change the paper size for the 3rd feed tray as
follows.
1. Slide out the paper feed tray [A].
2. Change the position of the front and the rear side fences [B] (1 screw
each) and the end fence [C] (1 screw) to match the paper size.

A172/A199 3-26 SM
3. Enter SP Mode as follows:
1) Press the clear modes key.
2) Wait for 2 or 3 seconds while the display returns to the initial screen.
3) Enter "107".
4) Hold down the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds.

4. Touch the SP special feature key [A].

Installation
[A]

5. Touch the Previous key [B] to select the paper tray size setting mode
(page 12).

[B]
6. Touch the appropriate paper size key and direction key for the 3rd feed
station. Then touch the Index key [C].

[C]

SM 3-27 A172/A199
7. Touch the Exit key [A] to exit SP mode.

[A]

8. Check machine operation and copy quality.

A172/A199 3-28 SM
2.5 OPTIONAL HOLDER (A702-18)

[B]

Installation
[A]

[C]

1. Remove the right upper cover [A] (2 screws).


2. Install the holder base bracket [B] (6 screws).
3. Install the holder cover [C] (2 screws).

SM 3-29 A172/A199
[A]

[B]

4. Install the lower cover [A] (2 truss screws).


5. Install the front cover [B] (1 truss screw).

A172/A199 3-30 SM
2.6 KEY COUNTER INSTALLATION

[D] [E]
[C] [B]
[A]

Installation
[F]

[G]

1. Remove the following parts. (Refer to Exterior And Inner Covers.)


• Upper rear cover
• Right inner cover
• Upper right cover
2. Remove the key counter cover [A] (2 screws) from the key counter holder
bracket [B].
3. Disconnect the short-circuit connector [C] from the key counter connector
[D].
4. Couple the connector [D] with the key counter connector [E].
5. Hold the securing plate [F] on the inside of the key counter holder bracket
and insert the key counter holder [G].
6. Align the screw holes in the securing plate with the mounting holes in the
key counter holder and secure the key counter holder (2 screws).
NOTE: The securing plate has three different hole sizes. Use the holes
that match those on the key counter holder that you are installing.
7. Reinstall all the covers and check the key counter operation.

SM 3-31 A172/A199
2.7 UPPER AND LOWER TRAY HEATERS (OPTIONS)

[A]

[E]

[B]
[C]

[D]

NOTE: Both heaters are available as service parts.


1. Attach the heater to the bracket (2 M4 x 10 screws).
2. Pull out and remove all the paper feed trays [A] (4 screws each).
3. Install the upper tray heater assembly [B] (2 M4 x 8 screws).
4. Mount the harness in the clamp [C] and connect as shown.
5. Install the lower tray heater assembly [D] (2 M4 x 8 screws).
6. Mount the harness in the clamp [E] and connect as shown.
7. Reinstall the paper feed trays [A].

A172/A199 3-32 SM
3. DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610)
3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories against the following list:
Description Q’ty
1. Installation Procedure ....................................................... 1
2. NECR (-17, -27 only)......................................................... 1
3. Stepped Screw.................................................................. 2
4. Sponge Retainer ............................................................... 1
5. Philips Pan Head Screw with Washer - M5 x 10............... 2
6. Hinge Stopper Bracket ...................................................... 2

Installation
7. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 6 ..................................... 2
8. Feed-out Guide Mylar ....................................................... 1
9. Decal ................................................................................. 1

SM 3-33 A172/A199
3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]

[C]

[B]
[D]

[D]

[A]

1. Remove the tape strips and the cushions [A] as shown.


2. While raising the lock plate [B], slide the platen cover [C] to the right and
remove it.
3. Remove the platen cover mounting screws [D].

A172/A199 3-34 SM
[B]
[C]

[A]

Installation
[D]

[E]

[F]

4. Install two stepped screws [A].


5. Attach the sponge retainer [B] to the top cover of the copier as shown.
6. Mount the DF on the copier by inserting the two stepped screws into the
holes in the DF hinge [C], then slide the DF to the front, as shown.
7. Secure the DF to the copier by using the screw holes as shown
(2 screws - M5 x 10 [D]).
8. Remove the small cap on the upper rear cover then connect the main
connector [E] and the fiber optic cable connector [F].

SM 3-35 A172/A199
Face up

Mit der Schriftseite


nach oben

Face imprimée
deuuus

Faccia in su

Boca arriba

[A]
[D]
[B]

A610I507.wmf

[C]

[E]

[F]

9. Secure the hinge stopper bracket [A] as shown (2 screws - M4 x 6).


10. Attach the feed-out guide mylar [B] under the original table. Attach it
between the 3rd [C] and 4th [D] ribs (counting from the rear).
11. Apply the appropriate decal at [E].
12. Remove the small cover [F] at the rear of the DF upper cover (1 screw),
and turn on DIP SW101-1.
13. Plug in the copier and turn on the main switch.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the DF has been
installed.
14. Make copies using the DF and confirm the machine functions properly.
15. Explain to the customer that settings may now be changed, depending on
the characteristics of each original.

A172/A199 3-36 SM
4. SORTER (A322)
4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories against the following list:
Description Q’ty
1. Installation Procedure ....................................................... 1
2. NECR (-17 only)................................................................ 1
3. Stud ................................................................................... 2
4. Knob Screw....................................................................... 2
5. Sorter Bin ..........................................................................15
6. Interrupt Bin....................................................................... 1

Installation
7. Grounding Screw .............................................................. 1

Sorter Adapter
Description Q’ty
1. Fan Motor Assembly ......................................................... 1
2. Air Outlet Plate .................................................................. 1
3. Harness Clamp ................................................................. 2
4. Relay Harness................................................................... 1
5. Guide Plate Assembly....................................................... 2
6. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 6 ..................................... 9

SM 3-37 A172/A199
4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[A]
[H]

[C]

[B]

[F] [E]
[D]

[F]

[G]
[F]

NOTE: To install this sorter on the A172/A199 copier, the A527 sorter
adapter kit (option) is necessary.
1. Remove four pieces of tape:
Sorter Top Cover [A] (1 pc)
Transport Guide [B] (2 pcs)
Sorter Harness [C] (1pc)
2. Open the top cover [D] and remove the following items:
Tape [E] (1 pc)
Cushion [F] (4 pcs)
Clamp [G] (1 pc) [1 screw]
Cardboard [H] (1 pc)

A172/A199 3-38 SM
[B]

[C]
[A]

Installation
[E]

[D]

3. Remove the upper rear cover [A] (4 screws).


4. Open the front doors, then remove the left inner cover [B] (1 screw).
5. Remove the upper left cover [C] (4 screws).
6. Remove the 5 caps [D].
7. Remove the portion of the cover [E] with cutting pliers as shown.
8. Reinstall the upper left cover.

SM 3-39 A172/A199
[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

9. Install the studs [A]. [E]

10. Install the upper guide plate [B] (2 screws).


11. Install the lower guide plate [C] (2 screws).
12. Remove the sorter top cover [D] (3 screws).
13. Remove the sorter rear cover [E] (4 screws).
14. Remove the sorter front cover (2 screws).

A172/A199 3-40 SM
[A]

[B]

Installation
[C]

15. Remove the rear cover mounting bracket [A] (1 screw).


16. Install the air outlet plate [B] where the rear cover mounting bracket was
previously installed (1 screw). Use the screw which was used for the rear
cover mounting bracket.
NOTE: Make sure the air outlet plate hook [C] engages the sorter rear
frame as shown.

SM 3-41 A172/A199
[A]

[B]
[C]
[D]

[E]

[F]

17. Connect the accessory harness connectors [A] to the fan assembly
connectors.
18. Install the fan assembly [B] on the sorter rear frame
(3 screws and 1 connector).
NOTE: Make sure to run the harness through the cutout [C] as shown.
19. Install the sorter into the mounting holes [D] on the copier while inserting
the sorter harnesses [E] through the opening in the left cover (connect the
2 studs of the copier to the sorter).
20. Attach the sorter to the copier with two screws (2 knob screws [F]).

A172/A199 3-42 SM
[C]

[A]

[B] [D]

Installation
[E]

21. Remove the protective cover and secure the 4p connector [A].
22. Secure the grounding wire [B]* (1 grounding screw with toothed washer).
NOTE*: For all models other than those intended for North America, the
green wire is intended as a functional earth and should be
connected as shown.
23. Install two wire clamps [C].
24. Connect the fiber optics connector to CN515 of the main control board.
25. Insert all 15 sorter bins [D].
26. Insert the interrupt bin [E].
27. Install all covers on the copier and the sorter.
28. Check machine operation.

SM 3-43 A172/A199
5. FILM PROJECTOR (A718)
5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Make sure that each accessory listed in the following table is in the box. Also
check the condition of each item.
Description Q’ty
1. Mirror Unit.......................................................................... 1
2. Power Cord ....................................................................... 1
3. Optical Fiber Cable ........................................................... 1
4. Film Strip Holder ............................................................... 1
5. Slide Holder....................................................................... 1
6. Glass Mount Holder .......................................................... 1
7. Base Film (FUJI, KODAK, AGFA)..................................... 3
8. Slide Mount ....................................................................... 1
9. Correction Filter (P, N) ...................................................... 2
10. Blower Brush .................................................................... 1
11. Projection Lamp ................................................................ 1
12. Film Position Sheet ........................................................... 2
13. Positioning Pin .................................................................. 2
14. Spacer ............................................................................... 4
15. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 8 ..................................... 2
16. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 12 .................................. 4
17. Spring Washer - M4 .......................................................... 1
18. Installation Procedure ....................................................... 1
19. NECR (-17, -27 only)......................................................... 1

A172/A199 3-44 SM
5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

[B] [C]

[A]

[E]

Installation
[D]

NOTE: Holder Type C (A702-18) must be installed before starting the


following procedure.
1. Remove the lower cover [A] from the holder bracket (2 screws).
2. Remove the cover plate [B] from the holder.
3. Install two positioning pins [C] on the holder bracket as shown (2 screws -
M4 x 8) and reinstall the lower cover.
4. Set four spacers [D] at the four corners on the hollow surface of the
holder.
5. Place the projector unit [E] on the holder by aligning the holes of the
projector base plate with the positioning pins.

SM 3-45 A172/A199
[A]
[B]

[C] [D]

[E]

[F]

6. Remove two rubber caps [A] and cover [B] (4 screws).


7. Remove the shield plate [C] (2 screws).
8. Open the front cover and remove the front cover assembly [D] (2 screws).
9. ttach the projector unit to the holder with screws (M4 x 12).
NOTE: When securing the screw [E], insert the spring washer [F]
between the screw and the projector unit. This spring washer
secures the grounding of the projector unit’s frame.

A172/A199 3-46 SM
[E]
[A]

[C]

[F]
[B]

[G]

Installation
-
[D]

10. Remove the lamp cover [A] (1 screw) and open the reflector cover [B].
Then, plug the projector lamp [C] into the socket. Then close the reflector
cover.
NOTE: The projector lamp should be inserted horizontally until it stops.
11. Remove the cap [D] from the upper right cover of the copier.
12. Run the optical fiber cable [E] between the projector control board (CN6)
and the copier through the rubber bushing [F] as shown.
13. Connect the power cord [G] to the power inlet and plug it into the wall
outlet.

+ WARNING
After plugging the power cord into the wall outlet, do not touch the
electrical components inside the projector unit other than the test
switch used in steps 14-4) and -8). Otherwise, you might receive an
electrical shock. -

SM 3-47 A172/A199
[B]

[C]
[A]

14. Adjust the height as follows.


1) Place the film position sheet [A] on the exposure glass, aligning it at
the rear left corner.
2) Put the mirror unit [B] on the exposure glass by aligning the holes with
the positioning pins [C] on the lens cover.

A172/A199 3-48 SM
[I]

[A]

[D]

[B]

[E]

[F] [H]
[C]

Installation
[G]

3) Insert the film strip holder [A] into the film projector unit at the base film
setting position.
NOTE: Push the film strip holder gently to confirm that the film strip
holder has been inserted correctly.
4) Turn on the test switch [B] on the projector control board and turn on
the projector unit main switch [C].

+ CAUTION
The lamp housing and reflector [D] will become very hot. The lamp
cooling fan [E] will start turning suddenly when the lamp housing
temperature becomes high. Keep hands away from those components
to avoid any injury.
5) Loosen the wing nut [F].
6) Adjust the position of the projected light by turning the dial [G] with a
hexagon wrench [H] until it is at the center of the 4" x 5" frame [I] which
is reflected in the mirror unit.
7) Tighten the wing nut [F].
8) Turn off the projector main switch and the test switch.
9) Reinstall the lamp cover and other covers.

SM 3-49 A172/A199
⇒ 10) Enter SP Mode as follows: Rev. 6/13/97

1) Press the clear modes key.


2) Wait for 2 or 3 seconds while the display returns to the initial screen.
3) Enter "107".
4) Hold down the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds.

11) Touch the SP ADJUSTMENT feature key [A].

[A]

Open page 14 in SP Adustments


Set AD-Vref Target Voltage for the FPU to a Value of 2.7.

Set the AD-Vref Coefficient (Data Mode) for the FPU to the following Value.

R-E = 66 G-E = 60 B-E = 65


R-O = 66 G-O = 60 B-O = 65

A172/A199 3-49 A SM
Rev. 4/14/97

Installation
This page intentionally left blank

SM 3-49 B A172/A199
[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

15. Adjust the angle [A] of the mirror unit as follows:


1) Turn on the copier main switch and wait for the ready condition.
2) Open the lens cover and position the mirror unit on the exposure glass.
3) Put the correction filter [B] for positive films in the filter slot.
4) Turn on the projector main switch and press the option key.
5) Perform shading using the positive 35 mm slides mode.
6) Put one of the orange base films in the slide holder and position it in
the projector unit.
7) Make a copy of the orange film.
8) Check if the orange image is even or not. If the image is uneven,
adjust the mirror angle as follows:
8-1) When the leading part is dark [C].
a) Move the front and rear arm guides [D] to the left so that the
mirror angle is increased (2 screws each).
NOTE: Position the arm guides at the same location at front
and rear, using the ruler decals. This prevents the mirror
from being twisted.
b) Make a copy of the orange film.
c) Repeat steps a) and b) until the orange image becomes even.

A172/A199 3-50 SM
[A]

[B]

Installation
8-2) When the trailing part is dark [A].
a) Move the front and rear arm guides [B] to the right so that the
mirror angle is reduced (2 screws each).
NOTE: Position the arm guides at the same location at front
and rear, using the ruler decals. This prevents the mirror
from being twisted.
b) Make a copy of the orange film.
c) Repeat steps a) and b) until the orange image becomes even.
16. Check some copy images from positive or negative films.

SM 3-51 A172/A199
6. CONTROLLER INTERFACE TYPE-C (A583-05)
6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Make sure that each accessory listed in the following table is in the box. Also
check the condition of each item.
Description Q’ty
1. Controller Interface Board ................................................. 1
2. PTL.................................................................................... 1
3. Controller Interface Harness ............................................. 1
4. Fuse Harness.................................................................... 1
5. Stepped Screw - M3.......................................................... 1
6. Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 x 8 ..................................... 1
7. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 8 ..................................... 6
8. Wire Saddle....................................................................... 2
9. Ferite Core ........................................................................ 2
10. Fiber Optics Cable ........................................................... 1
11. PTL Relay Harness ........................................................... 1
12. Installation Procedure ....................................................... 1

A172/A199 3-52 SM
6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1. Remove the covers.

[A]

Installation
[B]

+ CAUTION
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before starting the
following procedure.
1. Open the front doors and remove the toner tank unit [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the right inner cover [B] (3 screws).
3. Remove the upper rear cover (4 screws).
4. Remove the lower rear cover (4 screws).

SM 3-53 A172/A199
2. Attach the PTL (Pre-Transfer Lamp) to the belt cleaning unit.

[D]
[B]

[C]

[E]

[F]
[A]

[G]

1. Lower the toner collection duct (1 hook).


2. Disconnect the three connectors and free them from the three harness
clamps.
3. Remove the transfer belt stay (5 screws).
4. Remove the belt cleaning unit [A] by pulling it out.
5. Connect the PTL relay harness [B] (from the kit) to the PTL [C].
6. Attach the PTL [C] to the cleaning unit [A]
(M3 x 8 [D] ,stepped screw - M3 [E]).
7. Reinstall the belt cleaning unit.
8. Reinstall the transfer belt stay (5 screws, 3 connectors and 3 clamps).
9. Connect the PTL relay harness [F] to the PTL harness [G] (from the
copier).
10. Reinstall the toner collection duct (1 hook).

A172/A199 3-54 SM
3. Install the interface board and harness.

[C]
[B]

[G]

[E]
[A]

[F] [D]

Installation
[I]

[H]
[J]

1. If the DJF is equipped on the copier, remove the DJF from the scanner
unit. NOTE: If the DJF is left attached to the scanner you must secure the
scanner unit with the DJF fixing belt [A] as shown.
2. Remove the two fixing screws [B] at the front of the scanner unit.
3. Remove the two fixing screws [C] at the rear of the scanner unit.
4. Open the scanner unit and set the scanner support bar [D] as shown.
5. Disconnect the shielded flat cable [E] and remove the IPU board cover [F]
(2 long and 5 short screws).
6. Remove the harness cover [G] from the right rear corner.
7. Remove the lower rear cover [H] (6 screws) and the lower left cover [I] (4
screws). Then remove the cap [J] from the lower left cover.

SM 3-55 A172/A199
[A]

[C]

[B]
[F]

[D]

[E]
8. Route the harness above the left rail of the 1st tray [A] from the left side
to the rear.
9. Place the controller interface harness bracket [B] on the left side frame
and secure it with the grounding wire (1 screw) [C].
10. Remove the timing belt [D] and install the two harness clamps [E].
11. Route the harness from the lower to the upper as shown [F].
NOTE: Route the harness behind the charge inlet fan duct.

A172/A199 3-56 SM
[H] [I]
[C]

[F] [Fig. 2]

[B]
[E] [A]
[G] [D]
[K]

[J]

Installation
[M] [Fig. 1]
[K] [L]
12. Install the controller interface board [A] by connecting it to CN308 [B] of
the IPU board (4 screws).
13. Connect the white 2P connector [C] to CN301 [D] of the controller
interface board via the fuse harness [E].
14. Connect the controller interface harness [F] to CN303 [G] of the controller
interface board. Then secure the grounding wire [H] to the IPU board
bracket (1 screw).
NOTE: 1. Do not route the harness over the board to prevent
electromagnetic wave. (See [Fig. 1])
2. Make sure that the connectors are set properly. Otherwise, the
copier might not achieve the ready condition or blank copies
might be made.
15. Install the gray ferrite core [I] and the white ferrite core [J] as shown.
NOTE: Secure the gray ferrite core with the harness band as shown
[Fig. 2].
16. Connect the fiber optics cable [K] to CN514 [L] on the main control board
and route it to the IPU board area following other fiber cables.
17. Run the fiber optics cable through the harness clamps and connect it to
CN304 [M] on the controller interface board.

SM 3-57 A172/A199
18. Secure the interface harness with the three harness clamps and reinstall
the timing belt as shown.
NOTE: Route the remaining part of the harness along the top of the
AC/DC Drive Board as shown. Position the harness near by the
rear side plate so that the harness won’t touch any moving parts
such as timing belts and motors.
19. Reassemble the machine.

4. Connect to the Fiery and adjust the printer gamma.


1. Connect the Fiery controller to the controller interface connector with the
cable provided from EFI.
2. Adjust the γ correction data for printer (See Section 5) and check the
controller function.

A172/A199 3-58 SM
SERVICE TABLES
1. SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change
modes, and adjust values.

1.1.1 Service Program Access Procedure


1. Press the clear modes key.
2. Enter "107".
3. Hold down the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds until the service
program index menu appears on the touch panel display.

4. Touch a number [A] on the display to access the desired function.


This copier has 9 service program modes.

Service
Tables
[B]

[A]

1.1.2 To Exit SP Mode


1. Touch the key [B].

SM 4-1 A172/A199
1.1.3 To Return to the Index Menu
1. Return to the index menu by touching [A] on the display.

[D]

[A]

[B]

[C]
1.1.4 Change the Menu Screen
1. To move to the next page, touch [B].

2. To move to the previous page, touch [C].

1.1.5 To Make a Copy While in SP Mode


1. Touch [D] to access "Copy in SP" mode. The LCD is as
shown below.
2. Select the appropriate copy mode and make trial copies.
3. Return to the SP mode by pressing [E].

[E]

A172/A199 4-2 SM
1.1.6 To Input Settings
If and keys [A] are displayed as shown, touch the key or
key to change the setting. In this case, the default setting is 00.
[A]

If the keys display numbers, as shown:


[B]

1) Touch the key [B]. Its color will change.

Service
2) Input the setting with the numeric keys.

Tables
3) Touch the key [B] again to store the setting.
NOTE: If you forget to touch key [B] again, the setting will not be changed.

1.1.7 To Clear the Counters


1. Touch the clear key [C].
2. To clear the counter, touch the key [D].
To cancel without clearing the counter, touch the key [E].

[C]

[D] [E]

SM 4-3 A172/A199
1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLE

NOTE: • Shaded items should not be adjusted in the field.


• Items written in bold italic letters are newly added service
programs to the base copier (DFC-Alpha/A109).
• The SP mode screens are sample ones. The values in these
screens are not realistic.
Refer to the Default in Note column or the factory data sheet
coming with the machine for the realistic values.

1.2.1 [1] SP ADJUSTMENT

A172/A199 4-4 SM
Page Item Function Note
Lead Edge Shifts the vertical image Evaluate the width of the blank
Registration position by changing the ON area at the leading edge of the
(Printing) timing of the registration clutch. test pattern image. (Use
(0.5 mm/step) trimming area mode in test
* Normal paper: mode, page 2.)
Transfer belt speed = 180 mm/s Adjustment standard: 0 ± 2 mm
* OHP/Thick Paper: (2 ± 2 mm in Trimming area
Transfer belt speed = 90 mm/s mode)

* DF Thin Original: For the following adjustment,


Adjusts the one-sided the dip switches of the DJF
original’s stop position should be in the Normal
without moving the original in position.
reverse against the left scale. Enter the standard copy screen
* DF 2-side Original: by pressing the "Copy in SP"
Adjusts the two-sided key, select a suitable mode,
original’s stop position feed the original from the DJF
against the left scale after original tray by pressing the
inversion. "Start" key, then check the
* DF Thick Original: original stop position by
Adjusts the one-sided opening the DJF.
<1> original’s stop position after * DF Thin Original: 1-sided
-1 moving the original in reverse The thin original mode should
against the left scale. be selected with user tools.
[–]: Towards the left scale

Service
Tables
[+]: Away from the left scale
* DF 2-side Original
Duplex mode (2S Ä 1S) should
be selected for this adjustment.
Overlap amount with the left
scale: [–] Increase, [+] Decrease
* DF Thick Original:
The thick original mode should
be selected with user tools.
Overlap with the left scale: [–]
Increase, [+] Decrease
Transfer Belt Changes the transfer belt Default: 0
Speed rotation speed (0.19%/step) Do not change the setting in
the field
Paper Feed Changes the paper feed clutch Adjustable range: –9.9 ∼ 9.9 mm
Timing on time for each paper feed
station to adjust the paper
buckle at the registration rollers.
(0.1 mm/step)

SM 4-5 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-6 SM
Page Item Function Note
By-pass Feed * Normal Paper and For by-pass feed, there are
* OHP/Thick Paper adjustments for normal paper,
Changes the by-pass feed OHP, and thick paper mode.
clutch on time for each paper Adjustable range: –9.9 ∼ 9.9 mm
kind to adjust the paper buckle Thick 2nd Feed
at the registration rollers. (0.1 Default: 0
mm/step) When the data is "0", the
* Thick 2nd Feed by-pass feed clutch turns on at
Adjusts the by-pass feed clutch the same time as the
ON timing for the 2nd time to registration clutch. Increasing 1
ensure thick paper feeding from step makes the on timing 20
the registration rollers. msec. earlier. The off timing is
(20 msec./step) fixed wich is the same as the
pick-up solenoid.
<1>
-2 Side to Side Adjusts the horizontal Adjustable range: –9.9 ∼ 9.9 mm
Registration registration for the scanned
(Printing) image by adjusting the laser
exposure start timing
(0.1 mm/step)
DF Side to Side Adjusts the horizontal image This adjustment should be done
Registration position by changing the main after the above adjustment
scanning start position in DJF "Side to Side Registration
mode. (Printing)" for each feeding
station.

Service
Fusing Temp. Selects the fusing temperature Default: ON/OFF control

Tables
Control Mode control mode.
Combined Adjusts the distance between Default: 0
Original the two originals in Combine Adjustment range: –15 ~ +15
Distance Originals mode.
Face Side Adjusts the target temperature Default:
Fusing Temp. of the hot roller and the Stand-by
pressure roller in stand-by Hot roller: 180°C
mode. Pressure roller: 120°C
Adjusts the hot roller’s target Copying normal paper
temperature for copying normal Single color: 160°C
and OHP/Thick paper. Full color: 170°C
This is for the single side copy Copying OHP/Thick paper
mode. Single color: 170°C
<1> Full color: 170°C
-3 Back Side Adjusts the target temperature Default:
Fusing Temp. of the hot roller and the Stand-by
pressure roller in stand-by Hot roller: 180°C
mode. Pressure roller: 120°C
Adjusts the hot roller’s target Copying normal paper
temperature for copying normal Single color: 160°C
and OHP/Thick paper Full color: 170°C
This is for the back side copy in Copying OHP/Thick paper
the manual duplex mode. Single color: 170°C
Full color: 170°C

SM 4-7 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-8 SM
Page Item Function Note
Setting P-con Factory use only Do not adjust in the field.
OFF Mode Default:(for all the colors)
VG: 650 V
VB: 495 V
ILD: 128
Toner Max. M/A Sets the maximum toner Do not adjust in the field.
<1> Target amount on the gradation Default: 1.000 (= 1 mg/cm2)
-4 patterns in the process control
self check.
TC Correction Sets the threshold for the Vcnt Do not adjust in the field.
Threshold correction. Default:
Upper limit: 3.8
Target: 3.5
Lower limit: 2.3
Transfer Belt Adjusts the transfer belt bias Do not adjust in the field.
Bias (Face Side: voltage for each transfer Default:
Normal Humidity) process in single side copy 1C: 1410 2C: 1490
mode with normal humidity. 3C: 1575 4C: 1660
Adjustable range: 50 ~ 4000 V
<1>
-5 1C Mode Adjusts the 1C transfer belt bias Do not adjust in the field.
Output voltage for unusual humidity Default:
Correction ranges. Low 1: 2075
This is for single side copy Low 2: 1740
mode. Low 3: 1740

Service
Tables
High: 1410

SM 4-9 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-10 SM
Page Item Function Note
Transfer Belt Adjusts the transfer belt bias Do not adjust in the field.
Bias (Back voltage for each transfer Default:
Side: Normal process of the back side copy 1C: 1410 2C: 1490
Humidity) in the manual duplex mode with 3C: 1575 4C: 1660
normal humidity. Adjustable range: 50 ~ 4000 V
1C Mode Adjusts the 1C transfer belt biasDo not adjust in the field.
Output voltage for unusual humidity Default:
<1> Correction ranges. Low 1: 2075
-6 These are for the back side Low 2: 1740
copy in the manual duplex Low 3: 1740
mode. High: 1410
Humidity Range Sets the threshold of the Do not adjust in the field.
Threshold humidity ranges for the transfer Default:
belt bias and roller bias. 1: 43
2: 85
3: 113
4: 215
Transfer Roller Adjusts the transfer roller bias Do not adjust in the field.
Bias (Normal voltage for each transfer Adjustable range: 500 ~ 4000 V
Humidity) process (1C ∼ 4C) and the Default:
paper modes (Normal, Thick, Normal Paper
OHP: S, OHP: L, Normal: Back, 1C: 1200 2C: 1500
and Thick: Back). 3C: 1800 4C-L&P: 1500
Thick Paper

Service
1C: 1100 2C: 1360

Tables
<1> 3C:1640 4C-L&P: 1360
-7 OHP: S&L
1C: 2020 2C: 2080
3C: 2370 4C-L&P: 2080
Normal: Back
1C: 1200 2C: 1700
3C: 1980 4C-L&P: 1700
Thick: Back
1C: 1360 2C: 1640
3C: 1930 4C-L&P: 1640

SM 4-11 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-12 SM
Page Item Function Note
Transfer Roller Sets the coefficient (%) for the Do not adjust in the field.
Bias Coefficient transfer roller bias (normal Adjustable range: 0 ~ 255
By Humidity humidity) for other humidity
Range ranges.
Default:
Normal Paper
Low3 1C: 108 / 4C: 113 Low2 1C: 121 / 4C: 122
Low1 1C: 133 / 4C: 139 High 1C: 77 / 4C: 71
Thick Paper
Low3 1C: 109 / 4C: 103 Low2 1C: 116 / 4C: 110
<1> Low1 1C: 127 / 4C: 118 High 1C: 84 / 4C: 71
-8 OHP-S
Low3 1C: 98 / 4C: 97 Low2 1C: 98 / 4C: 95
Low1 1C: 98 / 4C: 95 High 1C: 93 / 4C: 97
OHP-L
Low3 1C: 98 / 4C: 100 Low2 1C: 98 / 4C: 97
Low1 1C: 98 / 4C: 97 High 1C: 95 / 4C: 100
Normal - Back
Low3 1C: 117 / 4C: 108 Low2 1C: 138 / 4C: 116
Low1 1C: 157 / 4C: 128 High 1C: 84 / 4C: 71
Thick - Back
Low3 1C: 110 / 4C: 108 Low2 1C: 118 / 4C: 115
Low1 1C: 131 / 4C: 127 High 1C: 68 / 4C: 70
PCC Selects the PCC ac (V) and dc Default:
(µA) output. AC: 3180 V DC: –40 mA

Service
Tables
Adjustable range:
AC: 2800 ~ 3800 V
DC: –10 ~ –140 mA
Discharge Plate Adjusts the output voltage of Do not change the setting in
Output the discharge plate for each the field.
paper mode. Default:
Normal paper: 4000 V
<1> Thick paper: 3500 V
-12 Duplex: Face: 4000 V
Duplex: Back: 4000 V
Toner Sensor Manually changes the TD Do not adjust in the field.
Gain sensor gain data (VCNT Gain)
determined during the
developer’s initial setting.
Toner Sensor Manually changes the target Default: 2.5 V (Bk, Y, M, C)
Control Target voltage of the TD sensor output Adjustable range: 0 ∼ 5.0 V
(VREF) during the developer’s Do not adjust in the field.
initial setting.

SM 4-13 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-14 SM
Rev. 4/14/97

Page Item Function Note


Blank Margin Adjusts the width of the margins Adjustable range:
at the edges of the copy paper. Right edge: –5 ∼ 5 mm
Main Scan Lead Edge: Left edge: –5 ∼ 5 mm
Adjusts the margin at the right Lead edge: –5 ∼ 5 mm
edge of the copy paper. Trailing edge: –5 ∼ 5 mm
Main Scan Trail Edge:
Adjusts the margin at the left
edge of the copy paper.
Sub Scan Lead Edge:
<1> Adjusts the margin at the
-13 leading edge of the copy paper.
Sub Scan Trail Edge:
Adjusts the margin at the
trailing edge of the copy paper.
Max Bk Level Adjusts the black level target Default:8
Detection 1 (DA1) for the AGC. Do not adjust in the field.
Target
Max Bk Level Adjusts the black level target Default:4
Detection 2 (DA2) for the AGC. (R-E, G-E, B-E, R-O, G-O, B-O)
Target Do not adjust in the field.
AD-Vref Target Selects the AD-VREF target Default: Copier: 2.7
Voltage voltage to set the exposure FPU: 2.7
lamp voltage in the AGC. Do not adjust in the field.

Service
Tables
AD-Vref Selects the AD-VREF coefficient Default data: Copier: 110
Coefficient to prevent the overflow of white SPU: 110
<1> (Shading) shading data. Do not adjust in the field.
-14 AD-Vref Factory use only (Gray balance Do not adjust in the field.
Coefficient (Data adjustment)
Mode)

⇒ Copier AD-Vref Factory use only.


Coefficient
R-E = 66 G-E = 60 B-E = 65

(Data Mode) R-O = 66 G-O = 60 B-O = 65


FPU

SM 4-15 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-16 SM
Page Item Function Note
Exposure Lamp Adjusts the exposure lamp input Default: 70 V
Voltage voltage during factory Adjustable range: 50 ∼ 75 V
adjustment. Do not adjust in the field.
This does not influence the
exposure lamp input voltage
during copying.
Vertical Line Adjusts the YMCBk vertical line If the image alignment at the left
Alignment alignment at the sides of copies side is incorrect, change this
caused by the CCD board data.
being not positioned If the image alignment at the
perpendicularly to the light axis. right side is incorrect, change
this data.
Lead Edge Adjusts the vertical image Default: 75
Registration position by changing the start Adjustable range: 0 ∼ 4095
(Scanning) time of image reading in the Do not adjust in the field.
<1>
subscan direction.
-15
Side to Side Adjusts the horizontal image Default: 155
Registration position by changing the start Adjustable range: 0 ∼ 255
(Scanning) time of image reading in the Do not adjust in the field.
main scan direction.
Scanner Motor Adjust the scanner motor speed Motor current adjustment
Current by changing the scanner motor Default: 100
Adjustment current. Fine adjustment
Default: 0

Service
Tables
Do not adjust in the field.
Sub Scan Adjust the scanner motor speed Motor current adjustment
Magnification by changing the scanner motor Default: 100
Fine Adjustment current. Fine adjustment
Default: 0
Do not adjust in the field.
SP Adjustment Prints out the SP adjustment
Print Out data.
Other SP Only #13 is effective. #13 default: 0
<1>
Adjustments #13: Select the humidity sensor 0: Humidity sensor ON
-16
function ON or OFF. 1: Humidity sensor OFF

SM 4-17 A172/A199
1.2.2 [2] SP Test

A172/A199 4-18 SM
Page Item Function Note
Test Pattern Adjusts the laser power for the Default: 255
<2> Condition test pattern density for the 256 This function effects the test
-1 grades. patterns in the bottom part of
SP <2>-2.
Gradation Scale Enables the gray scale printing. Default: Reset
Condition *Border Erase *Border Erase
Enables the creation of the Default: No
white margin between the *Pattern Selection
different density gray scales. Access the "Copy in SP" mode
*Pattern Selection and press the Start key to print
Selects the kind of gray scales. the gray scales.
Test Pattern Enables test pattern printing. Default: Reset
<2> Condition *Pattern Selection If both test pattern and
-2 Selects the type of test pattern. gradation scale are enabled,
only the gradation pattern is
printed.
*Pattern Selection
Access the "Copy in SP" mode
and press the start key to print
the test pattern.
Pattern Selects the type of test pattern. Access the "Copy in SP" mode
Selection and press the start key to print
the test pattern.

Service
Tables

SM 4-19 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-20 SM
Page Item Function Note
Forced Toner Factory use only Do not use in the field.
Supply
Operation
Toner Density Starts and stops the toner Do not make a copy with new
Initial Setting density sensor’s initial setting. developer before the initial
Indicates the gain data of each developer setting. Do this
color TD sensor. without the toner tank installed.
<2> Both toner supply reference This mode is required when
-3 values of the TD sensor and the new developer is installed or
TD sensor gain value are set the TD sensor is replaced.
automatically when developer is This mode automatically stops
replaced. when completed.
Belt Cleaning Performs the transfer belt This mode must be performed
cleaning. after replacing the transfer belt.
Belt cleaning automatically
stops after about 10 seconds.

Service
Tables

SM 4-21 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-22 SM
Rev. 1/97
Page Item Function Note
Developer Starts and stops the developer The Bk or color development
Collection Bk collection. drive motor rotates and the
selected color sleeve motor
rotates forwards and reverse
alternatively.
Process Control Starts and stops the process Perform this mode when the
Self Check control self check. following parts are replaced (or
cleaned)
Drum potential sensor/drum/
charge corona wire, charge
corona grid, and casing/lamps
around the drum/developer/
RAM etc.
This mode should be performed
with a drum not used for more
than 5 minutes.
This mode automatically stops
after completing.
Potential Sensor Starts and stops the drum This mode should be performed
<2> Calibration potential sensor calibration. with a drum not used for more
-4 than 5 minutes.
This mode automatically stops
after completing.
Input Check Checks if the sensors or Status 0 --- de-activated

Service
(Note 1:) switches are correctly activated Status 1 --- activated

Tables
and de-activated.
Output Check Checks if the motors, solenoids, Access this mode as follows:
(Note 2:) clutches etc. activate and 1. Touch the output mode key.
de-activate. 2. Enter the electrical
component number by
using the number keys on
the operation panel.
3. Touch the output mode key.
Touch the start key to
activate and touch the stop
key to de- activate the
electrical component.
Charge Wire Starts the charge corona This mode automatically stops
Cleaning wire/grid cleaning. after completing. The forced
process control self check must
be done immediately after this.

Note 1: Refer to Input Check Mode Table on page 4-60.

Note 2: Refer to Output Check Mode on page 4-63.

SM 4-23 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-24 SM
Page Item Function Note
SC Detection Disables the self-diagnostic Default: Reset (enable)
OFF Mode function.
Jam Detection Disables jam detection (ON Default: Reset (enable)
OFF Mode check).
Printer Free Run Starts printer free run mode. Paper is not fed in this mode.
System Free Starts system free run mode. Paper is not fed in this mode.
<2> Run When using the system free
-5 run, close the platen cover or
place white paper on the
exposure glass to avoid toner
scattering inside the machine.
Scanner Free Starts scanner free run mode. Paper is not fed in this mode.
Run
Auto Shading Separately performs the Factory use only
Mode Data shading compensation
Selection sequence.
AGC Start Lamp Separately performs the auto Factory use only
Voltage gain control sequence.
VR Adjustment Turns on the exposure lamp. Factory use only
<2> Mode
-6
APS Data Checks if the original size Status 0 --- de-activated
Confirmation sensors are correctly activated Status 1 --- activated
or de-activated at the 1st and

Service
2nd detection.

Tables

SM 4-25 A172/A199
1.2.3 [3] SP Data Output

A172/A199 4-26 SM
Page Item Function Note
Fusing Temp. Indicates the hot roller/pressure
roller temperature based on the
output of the thermistors.
Potential Sensor Indicates the potential sensor V1: Potential sensor output at a
Calibration Data calibration data. drum potential of 300 V
<3> V2: Potential sensor output at a
-1 drum potential of 600 V
Humidity Indicates the humidity sensor
Sensor Output output for the temperature and
relative humidity.
Toner Density Indicates values (VT, VREF,
(TD Sensor) VCNT) relating to each color
toner density sensor.
Drum Potential Indicates the drum potential
<3> Data data and the pointer table
-2 number determined during the
process control self check.

Service
Tables

SM 4-27 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-28 SM
Page Item Function Note
Drum Potential Indicates the target and actual VD: charge potential
Control Output data related to process control. VL: exposed drum potential
<3>
VB: development bias
-3
γ : development gamma
VK: development reference data
Bk Level DA1 Displays DA1 settings. Factory use only
Setting
Bk Level DA2 Displays DA2 settings. Factory use only
Setting
<3> Max Bk Level Displays DA2* settings. Factory use only
-4 Detection Data
after AGC
Vref DA3 Setting Displays DA3 settings. Factory use only
Auto γ Indicates the correction data Indication only
Correction Data decided in auto γ correction.

Service
Tables

SM 4-29 A172/A199
1.2.4 [4] SP Special Feature

A172/A199 4-30 SM
Rev. 1/16/97
Page Item Function Note
Auto Process Factory use only "PID" setting must be used.
Control Self
check
Toner Supply Selects toner supply mode. Default: Fuzzy
Control Mode "Fuzzy" setting must be used.
Selection
Transfer Bias Selects the output voltage for Default: Normal
Humidity the transfer belt and the transfer This function is effective under
Selection roller bias that are used if the the following conditions:
humidity sensor is not working 1. Humidity sensor is not
properly. Use the setting that working well:
best approximates the • Output is 0.
machine’s location. • Temperature output is
over 49°C or below 2°C.
• Humidity output is over
98% or below 2%.
2. Humidity sensor is
<4>
disconnected.
-1
3. Humidity sensor function is
disabled:
SP<1>P.16 Other SP #13=1
Auto γ Enable or disable the auto γ Default: ON
Correction Mode correction mode.
Dev. Sleeve Selects the interval of the Default: 40 copies

Service
Tables
Cleaning development sleeve cleaning
Condition in mode in ACS&DJF mode and
ACS Mode black mode
TC Correction Selects the TC correction (Vcnt Default: ON
correction) on or off. Do not change the setting in
the field.
TC Correction Selects to use or not to use the Default: Reset
Threshold threshold set in the SP "<1>-4 Do not change the setting in
TC Correction Threshold". the field.
Wire Cleaner Enables/disables the automatic Default: Set (Enabled)
Operation charge corona wire/grid
cleaning operation.

SM 4-31 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-32 SM
Page Item Function Note
Printer γ Adjusts image density for each Do not change the STEP data
Correction Data color in letter mode. (Letter in the field.
Rough mode rough adjustment) See section 5, color balance
Adjustment adjustment.
=Letter=
γ Correction Saves or recalls the printer g Factory settings for the printer g
Data Registration correction data for Letter & correction are kept in
Photo rough adjustment and permanent memory.
Letter & Printed Photo fine • To keep the factory settings,
<4> adjustment in the temporary do not use "Save in
-2 memory or the permanent Permanent Memory", as long
memory. as the data has not been
*Saves current data as back-up corrupted.
Saves the current printer g • The current settings will be
correction data in the memory. saved in the temporary
*Recalls the back-up data memory automatically after
Recalls the printer g correction performing the ACC.
data from the memory. • "Recall from Temporary
Memory" can be used to
undo the last ACC.
Printer γ Adjusts image density for each Do not change the STEP data
Correction Data color in photo mode. in the field.
<4>
Rough (Photo mode rough adjustment) See section 5, color balance
-3
Adjustment adjustment.

Service
=Photo=

Tables

SM 4-33 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-34 SM
Service
Tables
Page Item Function Note
Printer γ Adjusts each color image Do not adjust in the field.
<4> Correction Data density (Letter mode fine Default: 5 for all
-4 Fine Adjustment adjustment)
=Printed Photo=
Printer γ Not used. Default: 5 for all
Correction Data (Indication only)
<4>
Fine
-5
Adjustment
=Glossy Photo=
Printer γ Adjusts each color image Do not change the data in the
<4> Correction Data density (Letter mode fine field.
-6 Fine Adjustment adjustment) Default: 5 for all
=Letter=

SM 4-35 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-36 SM
Page Item Function Note
Printer γ Not used. Default: 5 for all
Correction Data (Indication only)
<4>
Fine
-7
Adjustment
=Copied Photo=
Printer γ Not used. Default: 5 for all
Correction Data (Indication only)
Fine
<4>
Adjustment
-8
=Map=
Scanner γ Not used. Default: 75 for all
Correction Data (Indication only)

Service
Tables

SM 4-37 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-38 SM
Page Item Function Note
Coin Lock Not used. Default: No
Connection
Key Card Count Not used. Default: Paper Exit
Timing
Set User Enables user code mode. Default: OFF
Code(s) The key counter shorting
connector should be
disconnected to enable user
code mode.
ADS Priority Not used.
Count Up/Down Selects copy count up or down. Default: UP
<4>
A3/DLT Double Counts twice when an A3 or Defaults: OFF
-9
Count 11" x 17" copy is made.
Service Stores the service center Entering procedure:
Telephone No. telephone number. This 1. Touch 000000000000000
telephone number is indicated key.
on the LCD when a service call 2. Enter numbers by pressing
condition occurs or PM is the number keys. (touch –
required. to enter a hyphen).
3. Touch 000000000000000
key.
Length Unit Changes the length unit (mm or Default: inch (-10/15/17)
inches) for Shift, Erase, Size mm (-22/26/27/29)
Mag. and Non Standard

Service
Tables
Original.
ROM Version Indicates the ROM reference System 1: Main control IC1
number, with suffix, on each System 2: Main control IC522
PCB. Scanner 1:
Scanner control IC145
Scanner 2:
Scanner control IC144
<4>
IPU: IC305
-10
Operation Panel: IC1
Transfer Belt:
Transfer belt motor drive
IC609
FPU: ---
APL: ---

SM 4-39 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-40 SM
Page Item Function Note
PM Counter Selects the PM alarm interval If you do not use the PM alarm,
<4>
after counter clear. set this to "0".
-11
Default: 0
Tray Paper Size Selects the paper size and
<4>
Setting direction of the 3rd paper feed
-12
station.

Service
Tables

SM 4-41 A172/A199
1.2.5 [5] Jam/SC Counter

A172/A199 4-42 SM
Page Item Function Note
Total SC Indicates the total number of See section 6 for details on
<5> service calls for each SC code. each SC code.
-1 SCs that have not occurred at
least once are not displayed.
Jam Counter Indicates the total number of
jams which have occurred in
the copier and all peripherals.
<5>
-2 SC/Jam Count Prints out all the SC/Jam A4 sideways/11" x 81/2" or
Print Out counters. A3/11" x 17" paper should be
loaded in the tray or the
by-pass feed table.

Service
Tables

SM 4-43 A172/A199
1.2.6 [6] Operation Counter

A172/A199 4-44 SM
Service
Tables
Page Item Function Note
Original Counter Indicates the total number of
originals that have been copied
in each color mode.
<6>
-1 Copy Counter Indicates the total number of Count up method is the same
scans, broken down by copy as that for mecanical counters.
mode. Twin Color and SC (Single
Color) counters are not used.
Copies by Indicates the total number of
Color Mode copies, broken down by color
mode.
<6> Development Indicates the total number of
-2 Counter developments which have
occurred for each color since
the last Counter All Clear or
Operation Counter Clear was
performed.
Original Mode Indicates the total number of
copies broken down by original
<6> mode.
-3 Copies by Paper Indicates the total number of
Size copies broken down by paper
size.

SM 4-45 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-46 SM
Service
Tables
Page Item Function Note
Copies by Indicates the total number of
Paper Feed copies broken down by paper
<6>
feed station.
-4
APS Indicates the total number of
copies made in APS mode.
Copies by Indicates the total number of
Magnification copies broken down by
magnification range.
<6> AMS Indicates the total number of
-5 copies made in AMS mode.
Non-standard Indicates the total number of
Original non-standard originals.
Operating Time Indicates the total operation time. Unit: Hours
Shift Indicates the total number of
copies made in
Centering/Cornering and Margin
Adjustment modes.
<6> Erase Indicates the total number of
-6 copies broken down by erase
mode.
Single Copies Indicates the total number of
copies made in Series copy
mode.

SM 4-47 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-48 SM
Page Item Function Note
Image Creation Indicates the total number of
<6>
copies made in image creation
-7
modes.
Color Creation: Indicates the total number of
Whole Image copies broken down by color
creation mode used for the
whole copy image.
<6> Color/Image Indicates the total number of
-8 Adjustment copies made with color Image
adjustment modes.
Color Editing Indicates the total number of
copies made with the area
editing mode.

Service
Tables

SM 4-49 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-50 SM
Page Item Function Note
Area Shapes Indicates the total number of
editing areas broken down by
<6>
area shape.
-9
Special Indicates the total number of
Accessory copies for each peripheral.
Electronic Not used.
Counter Setting
<6> Operation Prints out all the operation A4 sideways/11" x 81/2" or
-10 Counter Print Out counters. A3/11" x 17" paper should be
loaded in the tray or the
by-pass feed table.

Service
Tables

SM 4-51 A172/A199
1.2.7 [7] Counter Clear

A172/A199 4-52 SM
Page Item Function Note
Counter All Clear Clears all counters Procedure:
<7>
1. Touch the clear key.
-1 Operation Clears all operation counters
Counter Clear 2. The display asks Yes or No.
If you are sure you want to
Jam/SC Counter Clears all jam and SC counters
<7> clear, touch Yes. If you do
-2 Clears all jam counters not want to clear, touch No.
Clears all SC counters

Service
Tables

SM 4-53 A172/A199
1.2.8 [8] Printer

A172/A199 4-54 SM
Page Item Function Note
Printer γ Adjusts each color’s image Do not change the STEP
Correction Dat. density. values in the field.
Rough (Halftone mode rough
Adjustment adjustment)
=Halftone=
γ Correction Saves or recalls the printer g The printer g correction for the
Data correction data for Halftone & printer function is not adjusted
Registration Contone rough adjustment and at the factory. The default data
Halftone & Contone fine is kept in memory and this
<8> adjustment in the temporary cannot be overwritten.
-1 memory or the permanent • The current settings will be
memory. saved in the temporary
*Saves current data as memory automatically after
back-up performing the ACC.
Saves the current printer g • "Recall from Temporary
correction data in the temporary Memory" can be used to
memory. undo the last ACC.
*Recalls the back-up data
Recalls the printer g correction
data from the memory.
Printer γ Adjusts each color’s image Do not change the STEP
Correction Dat. density. values in the field.
<8>
Rough (Contone mode rough
-2
Adjustment adjustment)
=Contone=

Service
Tables

SM 4-55 A172/A199
A172/A199 4-56 SM
Service
Tables
Page Item Function Note
Printer γ Adjusts each color image Do not adjust in the field.
<8> Correction Dat. density.
-3 Fine Adjustment (Halftone mode fine
=Halftone= adjustment)
Printer γ Adjusts each color image Do not adjust in the field.
<8> Correction Dat. density.
-4 Fine Adjustment (Contone mode fine adjustment)
=Contone=
Printer: User Limits users from the remote Default: OFF
<8> Limitation terminal. Do not change the setting
-5 when connected to the Fiery
Controller.

SM 4-57 A172/A199
1.2.9 [10] Special Mode Program

A172/A199 4-58 SM
Rev. 1/16/97
Page Item Function Note
Copier Special Sets the following items for This special mode should be
Mode Copier Special Mode 1 and 2. used for user’s special
<1>SP Adjustment application paper which does
-1: Lead Edge Registration not have good copy quality with
(Printing) standard settings.
-1: Paper Feed Timing
-2: Paper Feed Timing: By-pass "<4>-5: Printer g Correction
-3: Face side Fusing Temp. Data Fine Adjustment = Glossy
-3: Back side Fusing Temp. Photo=" is not effective
-7: Transfer Roller Bias (indication only).
(Normal Humidity)
-8: Transfer Roller Coefficient Special Mode 1 has the
by Humidity Range following default for very thick


*1 Change the setting from "0" paper (about 200 g/m2):
to "4" for "Thick 2nd Feed" <1>-7:Transfer Roller Bias
in SP <1>-2 By-pass Feed (Normal Humidity)
in order to ensure feeding of Normal Paper
very thick paper in 1C: 1200 2C: 1500
Special Mode 1. 3C: 1800 4C-L&P: 1500
<4>SP Special Features Thick Paper
-2: Printer g Correction Data 1C: 1360 2C: 1500
Rough Adjustment =Letter= 3C:1800 4C-L&P: 1500
-3: Printer g Correction Data OHP: S&L
Rough Adjustment =Photo= 1C: 2020 2C: 2080
<10> -4: Printer g Correction Data 3C: 2370 4C-L&P: 2080

Service
Tables
-1 Fine Adjustment Normal: Back
=Printed Photo= 1C: 1200 2C: 1700
-5: Printer g Correction Data 3C: 1980 4C-L&P: 1700
Fine Adjustment Thick: Back
=Glossy Photo= 1C: 1600 2C: 1830
-6: Printer g Correction Data 3C: 2130 4C-L&P: 1830
Fine Adjustment =Letter=
*2 Printer γ correction data in
this mode is independent
from that in the standard
mode. (ACC results will not
be reflected.)
Printer Special Sets the following items for This special mode should be
Mode Printer Special Mode 3. used for user’s special
<1>SP Adjustment application paper (Printer
-1: Lead Edge Registration mode) which does not have
(Printing) good copy quality with standard
-1: Paper Feed Timing settings.
-2: Paper Feed Timing: By-pass
-3: Face side Fusing Temp.
-3: Back side Fusing Temp.
-7: Transfer Roller Bias
(Normal Humidity)
-8: Transfer Roller Coefficient
by Humidity Range

SM 4-59 A172/A199
1.2.10 Input Check Mode Table
NOTE: • Input numbers written in bold italic letters with an asterisk ("*")
are newly added items to the base copier (A109).
• Underlined input number items are the same as the base copier
(A109) but with a different input number.

Input Status
Sensor/Switch/Signal
No. 0 1
1 Charge corona leak detection Not detected Detected
2 PCC leak detection Not detected Detected
3 Development bias leak detection Not detected Detected
Bk-Development drive motor lock detection Not monitoring Monitoring
4
(Motor rotating)
Color-Development drive motor lock detection Not monitoring Monitoring
5
(Motor rotating)
Drum motor lock detection Not monitoring Monitoring
6
(Motor rotating)
Transport motor lock detection Not monitoring Monitoring
7
(Motor rotating)
Cleaning motor lock detection Not monitoring Monitoring
8
(Motor rotating)
Polygon motor lock detection Not monitoring Monitoring
9
(Motor rotating)
Bk-Sleeve motor abnormal detection Not monitoring Monitoring
10
(Motor rotating)
Y-Sleeve motor abnormal detection Not monitoring Monitoring
11
(Motor rotating)
M-Sleeve motor abnormal detection Not monitoring Monitoring
12
(Motor rotating)
C-Sleeve motor abnormal detection Not monitoring Monitoring
13
(Motor rotating)
Paper feed motor lock detection Not monitoring Monitoring
14
(Motor rotating)
15 Paper discharge leak detection Not detected Detected
16 By-pass feed table sensor Closed Open
17 Front door safety switches Closed Open
18 LD power supply OFF detection Not detected Detected
19 Vertical transport set switches Closed Open
20* Bk - Toner end sensor Not end End
21* Y - Toner end sensor Not end End
22* M - Toner end sensor Not end End
23* C - Toner end sensor Not end End
24 Toner overflow sensor Not full Full
Registration guide set sensor Set Not set
25

Oil end sensor Not end End


26

A172/A199 4-60 SM
Input Status
Sensor/Switch/Signal
No. 0 1
By-pass paper end sensor Paper detected Paper not
27
detected
1st paper end sensor Paper detected Paper not
28
detected
2nd paper end sensor Paper detected Paper not
29
detected
3rd paper end sensor Paper detected Paper not
30
detected
31 Transfer belt position sensor Release Touch
32 Transfer roller position sensor Release Touch
33 1st lift sensor Not lifted Lifted
34 2nd lift sensor Not lifted Lifted
35 3rd lift sensor Not lifted Lifted
1st paper feed sensor Paper not Paper detected
36
detected
2nd paper feed sensor Paper not Paper detected
37
detected
3rd paper feed sensor Paper not Paper detected
38
detected
Registration sensor Paper not Paper detected
39

Service
detected

Tables
Transport sensor Paper not Paper detected
40
detected
Exit sensor Paper not Paper detected
41
detected
42 1st paper size switch-1 Actuated Not actuated
43 1st paper size switch-2 Actuated Not actuated
44 1st paper size switch-3 Actuated Not actuated
45 1st paper size switch-4 Actuated Not actuated
46 1st paper size switch-5 Actuated Not actuated
47* 2nd paper size switch-1 Actuated Not actuated
48* 2nd paper size switch-2 Actuated Not actuated
49* 2nd paper size switch-3 Actuated Not actuated
50* 2nd paper size switch-4 Actuated Not actuated
51* 2nd paper size switch-5 Actuated Not actuated
By-pass paper size-1 Grounded Not grounded
52
(Low) (High)
By-pass paper size-2 Grounded Not grounded
53
(Low) (High)
By-pass paper size-3 Grounded Not grounded
54 (Low) (High)

By-pass paper size-4 Grounded Not grounded


55
(Low) (High)
3rd tray set switch Not set Set
56

SM 4-61 A172/A199
Input Status
Sensor/Switch/Signal
No. 0 1
By-pass length sensor Paper not Paper detected
57
detected
58 Sorter connection detection Not connected Connected
59* Toner tank set detection Set Not set
Scanner H.P. sensor Not actuated Actuated
201*
(at H.P.)
Platen cover position sensor Not actuated Actuated
202*
(Closed)
DF position sensor Not actuated Actuated
203*
(Closed)

A172/A199 4-62 SM
1.2.11 Output Check Mode Table
NOTE: • Output numbers written in bold italic letters with an asterisk
("*") are newly added items to the base copier (A109).
• Underlined output number items are the same as the base copier
but with a different output number (A109).
NOTE: The motors keep turning in this mode regardless of the upper or
lower limit sensor signal. Do not keep the electrical component
on for a long time, to prevent mechanical or electrical damage.
Output No. Electrical Component
1 Charge corona with grid - Bk
2 Charge corona with grid - C
3 Charge corona with grid - M
4 Charge corona with grid - Y
5 Development bias - Bk
6 Development bias - C
7 Development bias - M
8 Development bias - Y
9* Transfer belt bias - 1C
10* Transfer belt bias - 2C / 1st color
11* Transfer belt bias - 2C / 2nd color

Service
Tables
12* Transfer belt bias - 3C / 1st color
13* Transfer belt bias - 3C / 2nd color
14* Transfer belt bias - 3C / 3rd color
15 Transfer belt bias - 4C / 1st color
16 Transfer belt bias - 4C / 2nd color
17 Transfer belt bias - 4C / 3rd color
18 Transfer belt bias - 4C / 4th color
19* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 1C
20* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 2C / 1st color
21* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 2C / 2nd color
22* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 3C / 1st color
23* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 3C / 2nd color
24* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 3C / 3rd color
25* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 4C / 1st color
26* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 4C / 2nd color
27* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 4C / 3rd color
28* Transfer belt bias (Back side) - 4C / 4th color
29 PCC
30 Drum cleaning bias (BR)
31 Transfer roller bias - Normal paper - 1C
32 Transfer roller bias - Normal paper - 2C
Transfer roller bias - Normal paper - 3C
33

Transfer roller bias - Normal paper - 4C (Letter)


34*

SM 4-63 A172/A199
Output No. Electrical Component
35* Transfer roller bias - Normal paper - 4C (Photo)
36* Transfer roller bias - OHP (Lengthwise) - 1C
37* Transfer roller bias - OHP (Lengthwise) - 2C
38* Transfer roller bias - OHP (Lengthwise) - 3C
39* Transfer roller bias - OHP (Lengthwise) - 4C (Letter)
40* Transfer roller bias - OHP (Lengthwise) - 4C (Photo)
41 Transfer roller bias - OHP (Sideways) - 1C
42 Transfer roller bias - OHP (Sideways) - 2C
43 Transfer roller bias - OHP (Sideways) - 3C
44* Transfer roller bias - OHP (Sideways) - 4C (Letter)
45* Transfer roller bias - OHP (Sideways) - 4C (Photo)
46 Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper - 1C
47 Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper - 2C
48 Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper - 3C
49* Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper - 4C (Letter)
50* Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper - 4C (Photo)
51* Transfer roller bias - Normal Paper (Back side) - 1C
52* Transfer roller bias - Normal Paper (Back side) - 2C
53* Transfer roller bias - Normal Paper (Back side) - 3C
54* Transfer roller bias - Normal Paper (Back side) - 4C (Letter)
55* Transfer roller bias - Normal Paper (Back side) - 4C (Photo)
56* Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper (Back side) - 1C
57* Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper (Back side) - 2C
58* Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper (Back side) - 3C
59* Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper (Back side) - 4C (Letter)
60* Transfer roller bias - Thick Paper (Back side) - 4C (Photo)
61 Discharge plate bias - Normal paper
62* Discharge plate bias - OHP
63* Discharge plate bias - Thick paper
64* Discharge plate bias - Normal paper (Back side)
65* Discharge plate bias - Thick paper (Back side)
66 Transfer belt motor (180 mm/sec)
67 Transfer belt motor (90mm/sec)
68 Bk-Development drive motor
69 Color development drive motor
70 Drum motor - Forward
71 Drum motor - Reverse
72 Cleaning motor
73 Polygon motor
74 Bk-Sleeve motor - Forward
75 Bk-Sleeve motor - Reverse
76 Y-Sleeve motor - Forward
Y-Sleeve motor - Reverse
77

A172/A199 4-64 SM
Output No. Electrical Component
78 M-Sleeve motor - Forward
79 M-Sleeve motor - Reverse
80 C-Sleeve motor - Forward
81 C-Sleeve motor - Reverse
82 Y-Toner supply motor - Forward
83 Y-Toner supply motor - Reverse
84 M-Toner supply motor - Forward
85 M-Toner supply motor - Reverse
86 C-Toner supply motor - Forward
87 C-Toner supply motor - Reverse
88 B- Toner supply motor - Forward
89 Bk-Toner supply motor - Reverse
90 1st lift motor - Forward
91 1st lift motor - Reverse
92 2nd lift motor - Forward
93 2nd lift motor - Reverse
94 3rd lift motor - Forward
95 3rd lift motor - Reverse
96 Paper feed motor
97 Transport motor (180 mm/sec)

Service
Tables
98 Transport motor (90 mm/sec)
99 Transport fans
100 Development exhaust fan - Low
101 Development exhaust fan - High
102 Fusing exhaust fan - Low
103 Fusing exhaust fan - High
104 Charge inlet fan
105 LD cooling fan
106 Polygon motor cooling fan - Low
107 Polygon motor cooling fan - High
108* IPU cooling fan
109* Optics exhaust fan
110 Cleaning blade solenoid - Touch
111 Cleaning blade solenoid - Release
112* Lubricant bar solenoid - Touch
113* Lubricant bar solenoid - Release
114 Cleaning entrance seal solenoid - Touch
115 Cleaning entrance seal solenoid - Release
116 By-pass pick-up solenoid
117 1st pick-up solenoid
118 2nd pick-up solenoid
119 3rd pick-up solenoid
1st separation roller solenoid
120

SM 4-65 A172/A199
Output No. Electrical Component
121 2nd separation roller solenoid
122 3rd separation roller solenoid
123 Fusing heater - Hot roller
124 Fusing heater - Pressure roller
125 Anti-condensation heater relay (on noise filter board)
126 Main power relay
127 Potential sensor calibration relay (on H.V.S. Board – B)
128 Transfer belt position clutch
129 Transfer roller position clutch
130 Registration clutch
131 By-pass feed clutch
132 1st Feed clutch
133 2nd Feed clutch
134 3rd Feed clutch
135 Quenching lamp
136* Pre-transfer lamp
201* Optics cooling fan
202* Scanner motor current OFF
203* Exposure lamp ON

A172/A199 4-66 SM
2. ADMINISTRATOR TOOLS

2.1 ADMINISTRATOR TOOLS ACCESS PROCEDURE


This access procedure is for a key operator (copier’s administrator), allowing
to access the administrator tools.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Press the Clear Modes/Stand-by key.
2. Input "993" using the Number keys.
3. Hold down the Clear/Stop key for more than three seconds.

NOTE: This procedure is not described in the operating instructions.

The administrator tools contain the following settings:


[1] Set Operation Modes
Maximum copy number and Auto tray switching

Service
Tables
[2] Restrict Color Modes (User code will be required to use
restricted modes.)
Full Color / Black / Single Color / Twin color
NOTE: To enable "Restrict Color Modes", set SP mode "<4>-9 Set User
Code(s)" to ON and remove the key counter shorting connector.
[3] Set User Code(s)
Register / Change / Delete
[4] Check/Reset Specified Copy Counter
[5] Print All Copy Counters
[6] Reset All Copy Counters

SM 4-67 A172/A199
3. TEST POINTS/DIP SWITCHES/LEDS
3.1 MAIN CONTROL BOARD
The function of the test points, DIP switches, and LEDs are the same as
those of the base copier (A109).

3.2 IPU BOARD


3.2.1 DIP switches
SW301-1:
Selects the accuracy level of synchronizing the video signal clock (18.6
MHz) with the laser synchronizing signal.
OFF: 1/4 clock ON: 1/10 clock (MUST BE ON)
SW301-2:
Designer’s use only (MUST BE OFF, otherwise the entire background
appears dirty.)
SW301-3, 4, 5:
Used by designers for monitoring signals. (NORMALLY OFF)

3.2.2 LEDs
LED 308:
Laser synchronizing signal monitor
LED309:
Monitor for the combination of SW301-3, 4, 5

A172/A199 4-68 SM
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
4.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: The numbers mentioned for PM intervals indicate the number of
scans.
Items written in italic letters with an asterisk ("*") are different parts
from the base copier (A109). Items in shaded columns are newly
added parts.
Symbol key: C: Clean R: Replace L: Lubricate I: Inspect
ITEM EM 40K 80K 120K 160K 200K NOTE
OPTICS
Platen Cover Sheet C C C C C C Replace if necessary.
Exposure Glass C C C C C C Alcohol or glass cleaner
Mirrors, Reflectors Cotton pad with water, or
C C C C C
blower brush
Lens, Correction Filter C C C C C Blower brush
Exposure Lamp* R
Scanner Guide Rails C C C C C Dry cloth
Original Size Sensors C C Blower brush
Optics Cooling Fan Filter* R R R R R (NOTE 1)

Service
Tables
PAPER FEED (Main Body)
Registration Rollers C C C C C Alcohol
Relay Roller (Drive) C C C C C Alcohol
By-pass Pick-up Roller C C C C C R Water
By-pass Paper Feed Roller C C C C C R Water
By-pass Separation Roller C C C C C R Water
By-pass Feed Pad C C Alcohol or water
Paper Feed Guide Plate C C Alcohol or water
Registration Sensor C C C C C Blower brush

PAPER FEED (Paper Supply Unit)


Paper Guide Plate, Alcohol or water
C C
Vertical Transport Plate
Pick-up Rollers C C C C C R Water
Paper Feed Rollers C C C C C R Water
Separation Rollers C C C C C R Water
Vertical Transport Rollers C C Alcohol
Vertical Transport Plate C C Alcohol or water
Tray Bottom Plate Pad C C C C C Alcohol or water

DEVELOPMENT
Developer (Y/M/C/Bk) Y/M/C/Bk should be
R R replaced all together.

SM 4-69 A172/A199
Rev. 1/16/97
ITEM EM 40K 80K 120K 160K 200K NOTE
Sleeve Roller Side Seals Replace if damaged or
C C C C C
wavy.
Development Unit Casing Dry cloth or vacuum
C C C C C
cleaner (ATTENTION 1)
Development Drive Gears Blower brush or vacuum
C C C C C
cleaner
Toner Supply Dry cloth or vacuum
Receptacles, Toner C C C C C cleaner
Supply Joints
Toner Tank Cover, Toner Dry cloth or vacuum
C C C C C
Bottle Guides cleaner
Development Duct Lower Blower brush or vacuum
Filter cleaner
C C C C C
Replace if necessary.
(NOTE 1)
Development Filter R R R R R (NOTE 1)
Development Ozone Filter R R R R R (NOTE 1)
Development Exhaust (NOTE 1)
R R R R R
Fan Filters

AROUND THE DRUM


OPC Drum R R or replace as necessary
Charge Corona Wire* C C R C R C Clean with dry cloth.
Charge Corona Grid* Blower brush, water, then
C C R C R C
dry cloth (ATTENTION 2)
Corona Wire/Grid Cleaner R R R R R
Wire/Grid Cleaner Spiral Wet cotton
C C C C C
Shaft
Charge corona casing C C C C C C Wet cotton and dry cloth
Charge corona end blocks C C C C C C Dry cloth
Quenching Lamp C C C C C C Dry cloth
Drum Potential Sensor C C C C C Blower brush and dry cloth
ID Sensor C C C C C Dry cloth
Charge Inlet Fan Filter R R R R R (NOTE 1)
DRUM CLEANING
Cleaning Blade Dust with setting powder
after replacement or
R R R R R
cleaning.

Cleaning Brush* Inspect if the brush


I R I R I functions properly.

Bias Roller Blade Dust with setting powder


after replacement or
C R C R C
cleaning.

Drum Lubricant Bar Replace if damaged


R R R R R
(holes, dents, or cracks).

A172/A199 4-70 SM
ITEM EM 40K 80K 120K 160K 200K NOTE
Cleaning Bias Roller Dry cloth or alcohol
C C
Dust with setting powder.
Cleaning Side Seals, Dry cloth
C C C C C
Casing
Cleaning Entrance Seal Blower brush and dry cloth
I C C C C C
Replace if it is wavy.
PCC Wire C C R C R C Dry cloth
PCC Casing C C C C C C Water and dry cloth
PCC End Blocks C C C C C C Dry cloth

TRANSFER BELT / TRANSFER ROLLER


Transfer Belt Perform Belt Cleaning
R R R R R (SP<2>-3) after
replacement.
Transfer Belt Unit Rollers C C C C C Alcohol
Transfer Belt Release Silicone Grease G40M
L L L L L
Cams (NOTE 2)
Belt Bias Roller Shaft Silicone Grease G40M
L L L L L
(NOTE 2)
Transfer Roller Replace if the surface is
I I I I I I
damaged.

Service
Transfer Roller Shaft Silicone Grease G40M

Tables
L L L L L
(NOTE 3)
Transfer Roller Blade* R R
Toner Catch Pan C C C C C Vacuum cleaner
Transfer Roller Entrance Dry cloth
C C C C C
Seal
Paper Discharge Plate* R R R R R
Roller Lubricant Bar Replace if damaged
R R R R R
(holes, dents, or cracks).

TRANSFER BELT CLEANING


Cleaning Blade* Dust with setting powder
R R R R R
after replacement.
Cleaning Entrance Seal Replace if damaged or
I C C C C C
wavy.
Cleaning Side Seals C C C C C Vacuum cleaner
Toner Catch Seals C C C C C Vacuum cleaner
Cleaning Unit Casing C C C C C Dry cloth
Belt Lubricant Bar Replace if damaged
R R R R R (holes, dents, or cracks).

FUSING UNIT
Hot Roller* R R R R R (NOTE 4)
Heat Isolating Bushing Barrierta L55/2 (NOTE 4)
L L L L L

SM 4-71 A172/A199
ITEM EM 40K 80K 120K 160K 200K NOTE
Hot Roller Ball Bearing Clean with dry cloth.
C C C R C
(NOTE 4)
Pressure Roller*, Barrierta L55/2 (NOTE 5)
Pressure Roller Ball R
Bearing
Oil Blade Suitable solvent
Apply silicone oil on the
C R C R C
edge after cleaning or
replacement.
Oil Supply Pad R R R R R
Oil Sump C Dry cloth and alcohol
Hot Roller Stripper Suitable solvent
C C C C C Apply silicone oil on the
top after cleaning.
Fusing Thermistor, Suitable solvent
Pressure Roller Thermistor C C C C C Apply silicone oil on the
surface after cleaning.
Oil Tank Add silicone oil after
I C/L I C/L C/L removing paper dust with
a pipette.
Fusing Drive Gears Mobil Temp. 1 or 78
L L
(NOTE 4)
Cleaning Roller, Suitable solvent
C C C C C
Cleaning Roller Scraper
Pressure Roller Suitable solvent
C C C C C
Cleaning Roller

OTHERS
Transport Belts C C C C C Alcohol
Toner Collection Bottle I C C C C C Clean at EM if necessary.
Inner Cooling Fan Filter R R R R R (NOTE 1)

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SORTER (A511) (Number of Copies)
Transfer Rollers C C C C C C Alcohol
Exit Rollers C C C C C C Alcohol
Gears and Bushings (L) (L) (L) (L) (L) (L) Lubricate if noisy.

DUAL JOB FEEDER (A376) (Number of Originals)


ITEM EM 48K 96K 144K 192K 240K NOTE
Transport Belt Belt cleaner
C R R R R R
Replace if necessary.
Pick-up Roller Alcohol
C C C C C C Replace if necessary.

Feed Roller Alcohol


Replace if necessary.
C R R R R R

A172/A199 4-72 SM
ITEM EM 40K 80K 120K 160K 200K NOTE
Rev. 1/97
ITEM EM 48K 96K 144K 192K 240K NOTE
Separation Belts Alcohol
C R R R R R
Replace if necessary.
Registration, Original Blower brush
width, and Feed-out C C C C C C
Sensors

ATTENTION
1. When cleaning the development unit with a vacuum cleaner, always
ground the casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner
density sensor with static electricity.
2. When cleaning and drying the charge corona grid with cloth, be
careful not to damage the grid by allowing fibers from the cloth to
remain on the grid.

Service
Tables

SM 4-73 A172/A199
NOTE 1: Filters

[A]
[D]
[C]

[F]

[E]
[B]

[G]

The locations of the filters which should be cleaned or replaced at PM are


shown above.
1. Dust filters to be replaced at 40 K PM:
• Optics cooling fan filter [A]
• Development filter [B]
• Development exhaust fan filters [C]
• Charge inlet fan filter [D]
• Inner cooling fan filter [E]

2. Ozone filters to be replaced at 40 K PM:


• Development ozone filter [F]

3. Dust filter to be cleaned at 40 K PM:


• Development duct lower filter [G]

A172/A199 4-74 SM
NOTE 2: Transfer Belt Unit

[A]

[A]

[B]

The following parts should be lubricated with silicone grease G40M every
40K scans:
• Transfer belt release cams [A]
• Belt bias roller shaft [B] (only at the end)

Service
Tables
NOTE 3: Transfer Roller Unit

[C]

The end of the transfer roller shaft [C] should be lubricated with silicone
grease G40M every 40 K scans.

SM 4-75 A172/A199
NOTE 4: Fusing Unit 1

[B]
[C]
[A]

[D]

[C] [E]
[B]

When replacing the hot roller [A] every 40 K scans, lubricate the inner and
outer surface of the heat isolating bushings [B] with Barrierta L55/2. The ball
bearings [C] for the hot roller should be cleaned with a dry cloth every 40 K
scans and should be replaced every 160 K scans. The fusing drive gears
[D, E] should be lubricated with Mobil Temp. 1 or 78 every 80 K scans.

NOTE: 5 Fusing Unit 2


[H]

[F]
[G]

[H]

[G]

When replacing the pressure roller [F] and its ball bearings [G] every 160 K
scans, lubricate the roller shaft [H] and inner surface of the ball bearings with
Barrierta L55/2.

A172/A199 4-76 SM
REPLACEMENT
AND
ADJUSTMENT
1. COLOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
1.1 AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC)
1.1.1 Calibration Procedure
Perform the Auto Color Calibration (ACC) at installation, every service call,
or after replacing the drum or the developer.
1. Press the User Tool key on the operation panel.
2. Select No. 2: Sensitivity Adjustment.

3. Press the Yes key [A].

Replacement
Adjustment
[A]

and
4. Press the Print Start key [B]. A test pattern will be printed.
It will be printed on A4 or 81/2" x 11" sideways. If there is no paper of
these sizes available, it will be printed on a larger size.

[B]

SM 5-1 A172/A199
5. Place the test pattern on the exposure glass as shown in the illustration.
If the copier is equipped with an optional dual job feeder, put the test
pattern face-up on top of several sheets of white paper of the same size.
Then place all the sheets face-down on the exposure glass.

6. Press the Scan Start [C] key.


The γ correction data will be automatically adjusted.

[C]

7. Make copies using the C-4 Test chart in letter mode and printed photo
mode.
8. Compare the copies made before the ACC (Auto Color Calibration) and
after the ACC.

A172/A199 5-2 SM
Rev. 10/18/96
• If necessary, adjust the machine as shown in the following flow chart.

Replacement
Adjustment

and

SM 5-3 A172/A199
1.1.2 To recall the settings that were in use before the ACC
Touch the Prev. Setting [A] key.

[A]
(Also, from the SP mode, the previous settings can be recalled by touching
the Recall from Temporary Memory [B] key.)

[B] (SP Mode No. 4 Special Feature, Page 2)

A172/A199 5-4 SM
Rev. 10/18/96
1.1.3 To change the value of the γ correction data
1. Enter the SP mode and touch No. 4 SP Special Feature.
2. Go to page 2 (letter mode) or page 3 (photo mode) and change the
OFFSET values. (Refer to the tables on the next page.)

NOTE: Make sure Auto Image Density is not selected. ⇐

Replacement
Adjustment
NOTE: Always adjust the color balance using the "OFFSET" keys only. and
Do not change the values in the "STEP" column.
3. To finish the operation, touch the Index [B] key to return to the SP mode
menu. Touch the Exit key to exit the SP mode.
• To back up the current settings, refer to the information in chapter 4,
"Service Tables".

SM 5-5 A172/A199
Rev. 10/18/96
⇒ NOTE: Make sure Auto Image Density is not selected.
— STANDARD COPY QUALITY IN LETTER MODE —
Level to Refer to on
Step No. Key to Adjust Adjustment Standard
the C-4 Chart
ID MAX Adjust the ID of the 10th level to the
1 for each color same value as the C-4 test chart.

10th level of the color scale


MIDDLE ID Adjust the ID of the 5th level to the
for each color same value as the C-4 test chart.
2
5th level of the color scale
HIGH ID Adjust the ID of the 8th level to the
3 for each color same value as the C-4 test chart.

8th level of the color scale


LOW ID Adjust the ID so that the 2nd level is
for each color not visible, and the 3rd level is the
4 same value as the C-4 test chart.

2nd and 3rd level of the color scale

NOTE: If the customer tends to use the "3 COLOR" mode in the user tools
frequently, perform the following color balance adjustment.
1) Enter the User Tools.
2) Open Sensitivity Adjustment "Color Mode" and select "3C".
3) Exit the User Tools and take a full color copy in the letter mode.
4) Adjust the black scale level 3 to 5 (LOW ID) by combining cyan,
magenta, and yellow ID’s to an acceptable shade of gray.

— STANDARD COPY QUALITY IN PHOTO MODE —


Level to Refer to on
Step No. Key to Adjust Adjustment Standard
the C-4 Chart
ID MAX Adjust the ID of the 10th level to the
for each color same value as the C-4 test chart.
1
10th level of the color scale
MIDDLE ID Adjust the ID of the 5th level to the
2 for each color same value as the C-4 test chart.

5th level of the color scale


HIGH ID Adjust the ID of the 8th level to the
for each color same value as the C-4 test chart.
3
8th level of the color scale
LOW ID Adjust the ID so that the 2nd level is
for each color slightly (just) visible and the 3rd level
4 is the same as the C-4 test chart.

2nd and 3rd level of the color scale


Low ID The levels should be an acceptable
of Y, M, C shade of grey.
5
3rd, 4th, and 5th level of the black
scale

A172/A199 5-6 SM
2. LASER UNIT
2.1 WARNING
+ DANGER
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before attempting
any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can seriously
damage your eyes.

– CAUTION DECAL –

Replacement
Adjustment
or

and
Five caution decals are located in the laser unit, as shown.

SM 5-7 A172/A199
3. DRUM UNIT
3.1 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND WIRE CLEANER PAD
REPLACEMENT
[B]
[J]
[E]
[C] [H]
[I]
[D] [G]

[F]

[A]

1. Take out the charge corona unit [A]. (See A109 Drum Unit Removal.)
2. Remove the grid plate [B] (1 screw).
3. Remove the wire cleaner [C].
4. Remove the front end block cover [D] and the rear end block cover [E] by
using a small screwdriver at the rear of the unit as in [F].
5. Remove the terminal spring [G] and then remove the charge corona wire
[H].
NOTE: When reinstalling, do the following.
1) Hook the spring [G] to the bias terminal [I].
2) Install the two parts down through the hole as shown.
3) Hook the corona wire [H] to the spring.
4) Hook the other end of the wire [H].
5) Snap in both end block covers [D], [E].
6) Set the wire cleaner [C] so that the corona wire runs between
the cleaner pads.
7) Install the grid plate [B] using the holder bracket [J], making
sure that the hooks lie under the casing as shown (1 screw).
6. If the grid plate, casing, or the corona wire were replaced or cleaned,
perform the "Process Control Self Check" (SP Test Mode P-4).

A172/A199 5-8 SM
3.2 DRUM LUBRICANT BAR REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A] [C]

1. Remove the cleaning brush. (See A109 Cleaning Brush Replacement.)


2. Remove the drum lubricant bar [A] as shown.
NOTE: When reinstalling make sure that the lubricant plate [B] lies over
the unit frame [C] as shown.

Replacement
Adjustment
and

SM 5-9 A172/A199
3.3 WIRE CLEANER MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[C]

[A]

[B]

1. Remove the toner tank.


2. Remove the cleaner motor cover [A] (2 screws) and remove the wire
cleaner motor [B].
NOTE: When reinstalling, route the harness [C] as shown.

A172/A199 5-10 SM
3.4 INSTALLING A NEW DRUM
NOTE: • The installation procedure for a new drum is the same as for the
base copier (A109) except the following steps which come after
turning on the main switch.
• The steps from 3 to 12 are to apply lubricant to the new drum
surface. These steps can all be replaced by just making 10
copies of the C-4 Test Chart on A3 (11"X17") paper.
• If the developer is replaced together with the OPC drum, steps 3
to 12 are unnecessary because lubricant is applied to the drum
surface during the developer initialization.

1. Replace the OPC drum with a new one and reassemble the copier.
2. Turn on the main switch.
3. Place a few sheets of A3 (11"X17") white paper and close the platen
cover (DJF).
4. Enter the SP mode and open [2]SP Test, page 1.

Replacement
Adjustment
and
[A]
5. Set the Test Pattern Level [A] to "30".
NOTE: If the test pattern level is too high, a lot of toner will be
consumed and toner scattering will occur inside the machine.

SM 5-11 A172/A199
Rev. 1/16/97
6. Open [2]SP Test, page 2.
[B] [E]

[A]
7. Select "Full Dot Pattern" [A] in Pattern selection and select "Set" [B] in
Test Pattern Condition.
8. Touch the "Copy in SP" key and select "Black" copy mode.
9. Touch the "SP MODES" key and open [2]SP Test, page 5.

[C] [D]

10. Start the Printer Free Run by touching "ON" [C] and wait for 6 to 7
minutes.
11. Stop the Printer Free Run by touching "OFF" [D].
12. Open [2]SP Test, page 2 and select "Reset" [E] for Test Pattern
Condition.
13. Wait for 5 minutes and open [2]SP Test, page 4.
14. Perform Process Control Selfcheck by touching "Start".
15. Check the result of Process Control Selfcheck referring to the installation
procedure and exit the SP mode.
16. Perform Auto Color Calibration.

A172/A199 5-12 SM
4. DEVELOPMENT SECTION
4.1 DEVELOPER COLLECTION

[E] [B]

[D]
[D] [C]

[A]

NOTE: • The machine must be at the "READY" condition to perform the


developer collection.
• To maintain good color copy quality, developer replacement
should be performed for all colors at the same time so that all the
developers have similar characteristics.
• For more detailed information concerning access to SP modes,

Replacement
Adjustment
refer to section 4 (Service Program Mode Operation).

and
• Before performing this procedure, place old newspapers on the
floor to keep the customer site clean.
• Collect 2 developers per bag (black and cyan, magenta and
yellow).
1. Open the front door and remove the toner tank unit (2 screws).
2. Place the developer collection bag [A] on the hooks [B] on the copier
frame.
3. Turn on the front safety switch using the accessory switch actuator. Wait
until the machine is at the ’READY’ condition.
4. Swing over the stopper bracket [C] then pull the collection cover [D] of
the desired development unit. Developer will fall into the bag.
NOTE: For black developer, shift the lever [E] instead of the stopper
bracket [C].

SM 5-13 A172/A199
[F]

5. Enter SP mode and open SP Test Mode P-4 (Developer Collection) [F].
6. Press "ON" for the desired developer to be collected.
NOTE: Support the developer bag [A] while performing this procedure.
7. Wait until the developer is collected completely (about 2 to 3 minutes)
and press "OFF".
8. Perform the same procedure for the other developers.
9. Reinstall the collection cover [D].
NOTE: For black developer, make sure to shift back the lever.

A172/A199 5-14 SM
4.2 DEVELOPER INSTALLATION

[F] [C]

[A]

[B]

[B]

1. From the Developer Collection procedure step number 9 condition,


remove all the toner supply receptacles [A] (1 screw).
2. Remove the right inner cover. (See A109 Right Inner Cover Removal.)
3. Remove the developer supply funnel [B] from the bracket [C] and clean
the inner surface.
4. Set the developer supply funnel on the black development section as
shown.
5. Open SP Test Mode P-4 (Output Check).
6. Touch the key [D], to enter the output mode.

Replacement
Adjustment
7. Enter "68" with the number keys, then touch the key [D] again to select

and
test mode #68 "black development drive motor ON".
8. Touch the Start key [E].
9. Shake a pack of black developer [F] 20 times then pour it in.
10. 1 minute after pouring the developer, touch the stop key [G].
NOTE: Do not touch the stop key within 1 minute, otherwise, the
developer will not be distributed evenly in the development unit.

[G]

[D] [E]

SM 5-15 A172/A199
11. Remove the developer supply funnel, then install the toner supply
receptacle.
12. Install the cyan, magenta and yellow developer in the same manner as
black developer installation (step #3 to #11).
NOTE: To select the "color development drive motor ON" mode, enter
"69" for color instead of 68 for black (refer to step #7).
13. Return the developer supply funnel to the original position.
14. Touch the Previous key [A] to open page 3.

[A]
15. Perform the developer initial setting as follows.
1) Confirm that the main charge corona, PCC, ID sensor boards are
installed correctly (1 screw each).
2) Confirm that the toner tank is not installed.
NOTE: If the toner tank is installed, toner is supplied during the
developer initial setting and the machine cannot figure out the
proper toner concentration of the new developer.
3) Touch the All Start key [B] to start the developer initial setting. After
the adjustment is completed, the machine stops automatically.
16. Touch the Index key [C].

[C]

[B]

A172/A199 5-16 SM
17. Open SP Data Output P-1 (Toner Density).

[B]

18. Check that VT has the same values as Vref for all colors (Bk, Y, M, C). If
not, touch the Index key [B] then return to the test mode page 3 to
perform the developer initial setting (step 15) again.
19. Put the toner tank [A] on the Accuride rails (2 screws).

Replacement
Adjustment
20. Close the front doors and install the copy tray.

and
21. Place a C-4 test chart on the exposure glass.
22. Touch the Copy In SP key [C] and make 20 full color copies using A3 or
11" x 17" size paper. (40 full color copies using A4 or 11" x 81/2" is also
acceptable.)

[C]

SM 5-17 A172/A199
23. Wait 5 minutes to ensure that no residual voltage remains on the drum.
NOTE: The process control self check (step 28) must be performed
when there is no residual voltage on the drum.

[D]

24. Open SP Special [C]


Feature P-1.
25. Confirm that the PID key [C] is selected for the Process Control Mode
Selection. If not, touch the PID key [C].
26. Touch the Index key [D].
27. Open SP Test Mode P-4 (Process Control Self Check).

[D]

[C]
28. Touch the Process Control Self Check Start key [C]. After the self check
is completed, the machine stops automatically.

+ CAUTION
While process control is taking place, do not touch the knob, drum
stay, or drum shaft. These parts and the fly wheel carry a high voltage
during process control.
29. Touch the Index key [D].

A172/A199 5-18 SM
30. Open SP Data Output P-3 (Drum Potential Control Output).

[D]

[C]
31. Check VD and VL [C] for each color. If the difference between ’Target’
and ’Actual’ for any color exceeds 5, wait 5 minutes and go back to step
28 and perform the process control self check again.
32. Touch the Index key [D].
33. Touch the Exit key [A].

[A]

Replacement
Adjustment
and
34. Turn off the main switch and place the accessory switch actuator in its
original position.
35. Reinstall all parts.
36. Check the copy image and adjust the color blance if necessary.

SM 5-19 A172/A199
5. TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT
5.1 BELT LUBRICANT BAR REPLACEMENT

[A]

[B]

[A]

[C]

1. Remove the following parts and slide out the transfer belt cleaning unit
[A]. (Refer to Section 3, Installation.)
• Toner tank
• Right inner cover
• Yellow toner supply receptacle
• Transfer belt stay [B].
2. Remove the belt lubricant bar [C] (2 screws).
NOTE: To prevent the belt lubricant bar [C] from being scratched, pull
the handle of the transfer belt unit slightly to the right while you
insert the transfer belt cleaning unit.

A172/A199 5-20 SM
5.2 BELT LUBRICANT BAR SOLENOID REPLACEMENT

[C]
[B] [I]

[A]

[E]
[H]
[G] [D]

[F]

1. Remove the cleaning unit [A] and remove the lubricant bar [B]. (Refer to
the Transfer Belt Lubricant Bar Replacement section.)
NOTE: To prevent the belt lubricant bar [B] from being scratched, pull
the handle of the transfer belt unit slightly to the right while you
pull the transfer belt cleaning unit out.
2. Remove the blade solenoid bracket [C] (2 screws).

Replacement
Adjustment
3. Remove the blade solenoid [D] (2 screws).

and
4. Remove the base plate securing bracket [E] (1 screw) and remove the
base plate [F].
5. Disconnect the lubricant bar solenoid connector.
6. Remove the lubricant bar solenoid plunger E-ring [G].
7. Remove the lubricant bar solenoid [H] (2 screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling, make sure of the following:
• Set the arm hole of the solenoid plunger on the pin first, then
screw down the solenoid bracket.
• The belt lubricant bar solenoid’s plunger must be in (the
position for no contact with the transfer belt).
• The spring [I] must fit the projection on the blade solenoid
bracket.

SM 5-21 A172/A199
Rev. 1/16/97
6. TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
When completing machine assembly, after changing the roller lubricant
bar and/or the transfer roller, perform steps 3 to 12 of "3.4 INSTALLING
A NEW DRUM". This will cause the new lubricant bar to fully contact the
roller and also applies the lubricant to the roller surface evenly.

NOTE: 1) If these steps have been done for a new drum, it is


unnecessary to repeat them.
2) If the developer is replaced together with the roller lubricant
bar and/or the transfer roller, the above steps are
unnecessary. (Lubricant is applied to the transfer roller
surface during the developer initialization.)
3) Note that "Printer Free Run" must be used at step 10 of
"3.4 INSTALLING A NEW DRUM".

6.1 ROLLER LUBRICANT BAR REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A]
[D]

[C]
[B]

1. Remove the transfer roller unit [A]. (See A109 Transfer Roller Unit
Removal).
2. Remove the transfer roller guide [B] (2 screws).
3. Remove the hook [C] (1 screw) and replace the roller lubricant bar [D].

A172/A199 5-22 SM
[B]
[C]

[E]

[D]

[A]

[H]
[G]

[D]

[F]

Replacement
Adjustment
NOTE: When installing, do the following.

and
• Handle the lubricant bar [A] gently. They break or crack easily.
• When resting the lubricant bar bracket [B] on the unit, make sure
that the spring plate [C] is positioned as shown. (The spring plate
should not be under the lubricant bar bracket.)
• To install the hook [D], press the lubricant bar bracket in the
direction [E] as shown above.
• When reinstalling the lower guide [G], flip the upper guide [F] to
the normal position. Do not push it in the direction indicated by
the arrow [H]. Let the guide lie naturally in its position, then
tighten the 2 screws.

SM 5-23 A172/A199
7. FUSING UNIT
7.1 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER
REPLACEMENT
+ CAUTION
1. Be careful when handling the fusing unit. It is hot.
2. Take care not to spill silicone oil on the floor. If silicone oil spills on
the floor, immediately clean it with a silicone oil remover. Silicone
oil is very slippery and can cause someone to fall.

[C]

[D]
[C]

[A] [B]

1. Remove the fusing unit from the machine. (See A109 Fusing Unit
Removal.)
2. Remove the fusing lower cover [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the cleaning roller support bracket [B] (3 screws).
4. Remove the bearings [C] and remove the pressure roller cleaning roller
[D].

A172/A199 5-24 SM
7.2 FUSING PRESSURE (NIP BAND WIDTH) CONFIRMATION
NOTE: Normally this adjustment is not needed in the field. (The standard
factory settings are shown in the table below.)
Perform the following procedures only when the problem is thought
to be caused by an incorrect nip band width.

LOCATION STANDARD
9.0 ± 0.5 mm
Center
(Confirmation reference)
Both Edges 9.5 ± 0.5 mm

[A]

1. After warming up, turn off the main switch and pull out the fusing unit.
2. Pass an OHP sheet sideways [A] through the rollers to about the center
position.
3. Wait 30 seconds, then remove the OHP sheet.

Replacement
Adjustment
4. Measure the width of the the center area and both edges of the nip band.

and
5. If out of standard, adjust the pressure by using the spring screws located
at both edges of the fusing unit. (Turning the screws clockwise will
increase the nip band width.)

Confirm that the nip band width is within specification.

SM 5-25 A172/A199
8. OTHERS
8.1 OPTICS COOLING FAN FILTER REPLACEMENT

[B]

[C]

[A]

1. Remove the top left cover [A] (1 screw).


2. Remove the filter securing bracket [B] (1 screw).
3. Remove the optics cooling fan filter [C].

A172/A199 5-26 SM
8.2 OPERATION PANEL CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT

[A]

[F]

[D]

[C]

[B]

[E]

Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the operation panel [A] (2 screws).

and
2. Disconnect the operation panel control board [B] connectors.
(A172: 5 connectors, A199: 4 connectors).
NOTE: • Pull out the connector catch [C] first, when disconnecting the
flexible connector [D].
Also when reinstalling, slide in the flexible connector when
the connector catch is pulled out.
• The connector [E] is for A172 only.
3. Remove the operation panel control board [B] (2 screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling the operation panel, make sure that the panel
is properly hooked in [F].

SM 5-27 A172/A199
8.3 POINT ACCURACY ADJUSTMENT
When the touch panel sensing mechanism is not working properly, adjust it
as follows:
1. Press the Interrupt key.
2. Hold down the Clear/Stop key for more than 3 seconds.

[C]

[A]

[B]

3. The graphic sensing adjustment screen will appear. Touch the upper left
corner [A] then the lower right corner [B] of the panel using the editor pen
[C].
4. Touch a few spots on the LCD touch panel, and confirm that the marker
on the screen appears at exactly the same location as the pointed tip.
If it does not, press the Clear/Stop key and repeat this procedure.
5. Press the Enter key to save the setting.
6. Press the Interrupt key to cancel the interrupt mode.

A172/A199 5-28 SM
9. A172/A199 Fiery XJ System Printer γ
Adjustment Procedure
9.1 Procedure
After you install the Interface Kit Type-C in the A172/A199 copiers,
perform the following printer γ adjustment procedure.

NOTE: 1 The printer gamma must be adjusted for both Fiery print mode
settings (contone and halftone).

NOTE: 2 The ACC procedure automatically adjusts both printer gamma


settings (contone and halftone) at once. These printers modes can
not be adjusted independently using ACC.

1. Connect the copier to the Fiery XJ with the cable provided.


2. Turn on the copier. When the copier is in standing by mode, turn on the
Fiery XJ.
NOTE: Make sure that the copier is not in use and that the Fiery XJ screen
displays "idle".

3. Print a Test Page to check the color balance and image density.
1) At the idle screen, press the menu button of the Fiery XJ LCD once.
2) Press the line selection button (to the right of "Print XJ Pages").

Replacement
Adjustment
3) Select Test Page from the submenu to print the Test Page (default:

and
contone).
4. Compare the color scales on the Test Page just printed with the color
scales on the reference Fiery XJ Test Page.
Check that the various grades along the color scales are similar in
density to those on the reference Test Page.
5. If the color scales on the Test Page are not acceptable, perform the Auto
Color Calibration (ACC: Steps from 6 to 14).

SM 5-29 A172/A199
6. Press the User Tool key on the operation panel.
7. Select No. 2: Sensitivity Adjustment.

8. Press the Yes key [A]. If you want to recall the previous settings, press
the Prev. Setting key [B].

[A] [B]
9. Press the Print Start key [C].
A test pattern will be printed.
It will be printed on A4 or 81/2" x 11" sideways. If these sizes are not
available, it will be printed on a larger size.

[C]

A172/A199 5-30 SM
10. Place the test pattern on the exposure glass as shown in the illustration.
If the copier is equipped with an optional dual job feeder, put the test
pattern face-up on top of several sheets of white paper of the same size.
Then place all the sheets face-down on the exposure glass.

11. Press the Scan Start [D] key.


The γ correction data will be automatically adjusted.

Replacement
Adjustment
and
[D]

12. Print out the test page.


13. Compare the printouts made before the ACC (Auto Color Calibration)
and after the ACC.
14. If you want to recall the previous settings, perform steps 6 ~ 8 and in
step 3 press the Prev. Setting key [B] instead of the Yes key.
15. If the output quality is still not satisfactory, change the value of the γ
correction data for each mode as follows (contone/halftone).

SM 5-31 A172/A199
9.2 To change the value of the γ correction data.
1. Enter the SP mode and touch No.8 SP Printer.
2. On page 1 (Halftone mode) or page 2 (Contone mode), change the
OFFSET values as follows.

9.2.1 For Letter Mode


In the "=Halftone=" screen (page 1) of the SP mode, adjust the 11th levels
for the colors that need adjusting by changing only the ID MAX setting in the
OFFSET column.

NOTE: The ID MAX OFFSET setting should be between 0 and 4.


Do not change the data in the STEP columns; these must remain at
the default settings.
Do not change the H, M, or L settings in the OFFSET column. Such
changes will have no effect on the printout, because the various
colors in the H, M, and L ranges are produced by dithering (the laser
is switched on and off to produce dither patterns).

A172/A199 5-32 SM
Rev. 10/18/96
9.2.2 For Photo Mode
In the "=Contone=" screen (page 2), adjust the color scales by changing the
γ data in the OFFSET columns for each color.
⇒ Low: Use to adjust levels 5 to10 of the 100-step color scale in the
middle of the Test Page.
Middle: Use to adjust levels 10 to 90.
High: Use to adjust levels 90 to 100.
ID MAX: Use to adjust the whole range, including level 100.
Do not change this unless the whole range needs to be made
brighter or darker. The adjustment is very sensitive, so it is best
not to change the default settings.
Do not change the γ data in the STEP column from the default settings.

[A]

Replacement
Adjustment
3. To finish the operation, touch the Index [A] key to return to the SP mode

and
menu. Touch the Exit key to exit the SP mode.

SM 5-33 A172/A199
To save the current data as a back-up
→ Press the Save in Temporary Memory key [A].

To recall the data from the Temporary Memory, or to undo the last ACC
→ Press the Recall form Temporary Memory key [B].
NOTE: When the ACC is performed, the current printer gamma setting will
be stored automatically in the Temporary Memory.

To recall the default data


→ Press the Recall the Default Data key [C].

[A] [B] [C]

A172/A199 5-34 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Display
The SC can only be The SC display will not be canceled.
reset by a service
representative (see the
notes on the next page)
A
to prevent the machine
from being damaged.
The copier cannot be
operated at all.
The SC can be reset by
turning main switch off
and on if the SC is
caused by a
misdetection.
B

The copier can be If the related function is selected, this display appears.
operated as usual
except for the unit
related to the service
call.

Trouble -
shooting

Only the SC counter is The SC will not be displayed.


incremented. The copier
D
can be operated as
usual.

SM 6-1 A172/A199
NOTE: 1) If the problem is related to electrical circuit boards, first disconnect
then reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem is related to motor lock, first check the mechanical
load before replacing motors or sensors.
3) To reset a Level A SC, enter SP mode then turn the main switch
off and on.
4) When a Level A or B SC condition occurs while in SP mode, the
display does not indicate the SC number. You can recognize that
there is an SC condition because no key input is possible. If this
occurs, check the SC number by turning the main switch off and
on and make some test copies.

A172/A199 6-2 SM
1.2 SCANNING
SC107: Lamp regulator malfunction
- Definition - [B]
The machine detects lamp regulator malfunctions by monitoring the
signal for both the exposure lamp on and off conditions.
- Possible causes -
• Lamp regulator defective
• Exposure lamp open
• Optics thermoswitch open
• Scanner control board defective or poor connection

SC120: Scanner HP sensor abnormal - Stays off


- Definition - [B]
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition
during scanner initialization.
- Possible causes -
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Scanner motor defective or poor connection
• Scanner drive board defective or poor connection
• Scanner control board defective or poor connection
• Loose Allen screw on scanner drive pulleys
• DC power supply board defective (FU802)

SC121: Scanner HP sensor abnormal - Stays on


- Definition - [B]
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition
during scanner initialization.

Trouble -
shooting
- Possible causes -
• Scanner HP sensor defective
• Scanner motor defective or poor connection
• Scanner drive board defective or poor connection
• Scanner control board defective or poor connection
• Loose Allen screw on scanner drive pulleys
• DC power supply board defective (FU802)

SM 6-3 A172/A199
SC130: Scanner start abnormal
- Definition - [B]
The scanner start signal is detected before the scanner returns to the
home position.
- Possible causes -
• Scanner control board defective

SC170: Scanner DA1 abnormal


- Definition - [B]
When performing the AGC, DA1 is not in the proper range.
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between CCD board and scanner control board
• Scanner control board defective
• CCD board defective

SC171: Scanner DA2 abnormal


- Definition - [B]
When performing the AGC, DA2 is not in the proper range.
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between CCD board scanner control board
• Scanner control board defective
• CCD board defective

SC172: Scanner DA3 abnormal


- Definition - [B]
When performing the AGC, DA3 is not in the proper range.
- Possible causes -
• Dirty white plate, reflectors, mirrors, or lens
• White plate on the exposure glass not properly positioned
• Exposure lamp deteriorated
• Scanner or mirrors not properly positioned
• Scanner control board defective
• CCD board defective

A172/A199 6-4 SM
SC173: Lamp regulator adjustment error
- Definition - [B]
When performing the AGC with the lamp voltage at 72 V, the CCD output
does not exceed 1 V.
- Possible causes -
If the exposure lamp lights during AGC
• White plate on the exposure glass not properly positioned
• Dirty white plate, reflectors, mirrors, or lens
• Poor connection between lamp regulator and scanner drive board
(CN105) or between scanner control board and scanner drive board
(CN101)
• Exposure lamp deteriorated
• CCD board defective
• Scanner or mirrors not properly positioned
• Lamp regulator defective or poor connection (CN3)
• Scanner control board defective or poor connection (CN106)

If the exposure lamp does not light during AGC


• Poor connection between lamp regulator and scanner drive board
(CN105) or between scanner control board and scanner drive board
(CN101)
• No ac input to lamp regulator (CN1) → AC drive board or main power
relay defective
• Lamp regulator defective or poor connection (CN3)
• Scanner control board defective or poor connection (CN106)

SC174: Scanner DA2* abnormal


- Definition - [B]
When performing the AGC, DA2* is not in the proper range.

Trouble -
shooting
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between CCD board and scanner control board
• Scanner control board defective
• CCD board defective

SM 6-5 A172/A199
SC191: Bar code scanning error
- Definition - [B]
The bar code for the machine identification number cannot be detected
when the AGC is performed after the main switch is turned on.
- Possible causes -
• The bar code label is dirty.
• Scanner mirrors are not in position

SC192: Bar code number is different


- Definition - [B]
The bar code number is not identical to the machine identification number
stored in memory.
- Possible causes -
• Wrong machine identification number in memory
• Machine identification number is not entered in the new (replaced)
RAM board
• RAM board defective
• Main control board defective

SC193: IDU connection error


- Definition - [B]
IDU connection cannot be detected.
- Possible Causes -
• IDU is disconnected
• IDU defective

SC194: IDU detection error


- Definition - [B]
IDU detection error
- Possible Causes -
• IDU defective

A172/A199 6-6 SM
1.3 PRINTING
SC302: See AROUND THE DRUM
SC303: See AROUND THE DRUM

SC320: Polygon motor lock


- Definition - [B]
The polygon motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Polygon motor defective
• Polygon motor drive board defective
• Scanner control board defective

SC321: Transfer belt start signal error


- Definition - [B]
The transfer belt start signal is not detected within 500 ms relative to the
programmed timing.
- Possible causes -
• IPU board defective
• DIP SW301-1 on the IPU board is not ON

SC322: Laser synchronizing signal error


- Definition - [B]
The intervals between laser synchronizing signals become over 1.2 times
the normal interval.
- Possible causes -
• Laser synchronizing detector board defective

Trouble -
shooting
• Scanner control board defective
• Laser synchronizing detector board not properly positioned
• LD unit defective

SC323: LD drive current over


- Definition - [B]
The LD drive board applies more than 100 mA to the LD for over 2.3 ms.
- Possible causes -
• LD unit defective

SM 6-7 A172/A199
1.4 DEVELOPMENT
SC341: Bk-development motor lock
- Definition - [B]
The Bk-development motor lock signal is detected for more than 3
seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Bk-development motor defective or poor connection
• Too much load on the Bk-development section
• Interface board 1 defective or poor connection (CN708)
• Main control board defective

SC342: Bk-sleeve motor lock


- Definition - [B]
The Bk-sleeve motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Bk-sleeve motor defective or poor connection
• Too much load on the Bk-sleeve roller
• Interface board 1 defective or poor connection (CN708)
• Main control board defective

SC343: Y-sleeve motor lock


- Definition - [B]
The Y-sleeve motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Y-sleeve motor defective or poor connection
• Too much load on the Y-sleeve roller
• Interface board 2 defective or poor connection (CN806)
• Main control board defective

A172/A199 6-8 SM
SC344: M-sleeve motor lock
- Definition - [B]
The M-sleeve motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• M-sleeve motor defective or poor connection
• Too much load on the M-sleeve roller
• Interface board 2 defective or poor connection (CN806)
• Main control board defective

SC345: C-sleeve motor lock


- Definition - [B]
The C-sleeve motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• C-sleeve motor defective or poor connection
• Too much load on the C-sleeve roller
• Interface board 2 defective or poor connection (CN806)
• Main control board defective

SC346: Color-development motor lock


- Definition - [B]
The Color-development motor lock signal is detected for more than 3
seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Color-development motor defective or poor connection
• Too much load on one of the C/M/Y-development sections
• Interface board 1 defective or poor connection (CN708)
• Main control board defective

Trouble -
shooting

SM 6-9 A172/A199
SC350: Bk-TD sensor initial setting error
SC351: Y-TD sensor initial setting error
SC352: M-TD sensor initial setting error
SC353: C-TD sensor initial setting error
- Definition - [B]
TD sensor output (Vt) does not reach a value between 2.4 and 2.6 V
when performing the toner density initial setting.
- Possible causes -
• TD sensor defective
• Main control board defective
• Developer not distributed evenly

SC354: Bk-TD sensor gain adjustment error


SC355: Y-TD sensor gain adjustment error
SC356: M-TD sensor gain adjustment error
SC357: C-TD sensor gain adjustment error
- Definition - [B]
When adjusting TD sensor gain during the toner density initial setting,
Vcnt (output voltage) does not reach a value between 7 and 11 V.
- Possible causes -
• Main control board defective

SC360: Development bias leak


- Definition - [B]
The development bias leak signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Sleeve roller receptacle damaged
• High voltage supply board - B defective

A172/A199 6-10 SM
SC370: Bk-TD sensor upper detection abnormal
SC371: Y-TD sensor upper detection abnormal
SC372: M-TD sensor upper detection abnormal
SC373: C-TD sensor upper detection abnormal
- Definition - [B]
TD sensor output (Vt) exceeds 4.5 V during copy cycles.
- Possible causes -
• TD sensor defective
• Main control board defective
• Too much toner in the development unit (accidental)

SC374: Bk-TD sensor lower detection abnormal


SC375: Y-TD sensor lower detection abnormal
SC376: M-TD sensor lower detection abnormal
SC377: C-TD sensor lower detection abnormal
- Definition - [B]
TD sensor output (Vt) becomes lower than 0.5 V during copy cycles.
- Possible causes -
• TD sensor defective
• Main control board defective
• Toner supply system defective

Trouble -
shooting

SM 6-11 A172/A199
1.5 AROUND THE DRUM
SC302: Charge current leak
- Definition - [B]
A charge current leak signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Charge corona end block damaged
• Charge corona receptacle damaged
• High voltage supply board - C/G defective

SC303: Wire cleaner motor error


- Definition - [B]
Over current signal is detected for more than 10 seconds, when the wire
cleaner motor rotates.
- Possible causes -
• Wire cleaner motor defective
• Wire cleaner drive board defective
• Wire cleaner pad unit not properly positioned

SC380: Drum potential sensor calibration error


- Definition - [D]
When performing the process control self-check, the drum potential
sensor is not calibrated properly. The previous settings are used in this
case. If there are no previous settings, the defaults are used.
- Possible causes -
• Drum potential sensor defective
• Interface board 1 defective
• Main control board defective
• High voltage supply board - B defective

SC381: Charge potential abnormal


- Definition - [D]
When performing the process control self-check, the charge potential of
the drum is not in the proper range.
- Possible causes -
• High voltage supply board- C/G defective
• Main control board defective

A172/A199 6-12 SM
SC382: VD adjustment error
- Definition - [D]
When doing the process control self-check, VD does not come within 5 V
of the target after 30 trials. The previous settings for VG, VB, and ILD are
used in this case. If there are no previous settings, the defaults are used.
- Possible causes -
• High voltage supply board - C/G defective
• Main control board defective

SC383: VL adjustment error


- Definition - [D]
When performing the process control self-check, VL does not come within
5 V of the target after 30 trials. The previous settings for VG, VB, and ILD
are used in this case. If there are no previous settings, the defaults are
used.
- Possible causes -
• LD drive board defective
• IPU board defective

SC384: LD exposure abnormal


- Definition - [D]
When performing the process control self-check, the potentials on the
14-step gradation pattern do not come within the target range.
- Possible causes -
• LD drive board defective
• IPU board defective

SC390: ID sensor adjustment error


Trouble -
shooting
- Definition - [D]
When performing the process control self-check, Vsg adjustment does
not result in 4.0 ± 0.2 V.
- Possible causes -
• ID sensor defective
• Main control board defective
• ID sensor too dirty

SM 6-13 A172/A199
SC422: PCC leak
- Definition - [B]
A PCC leak signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• PCC end block damaged
• High voltage supply board - T1/PCC/BR defective

SC440: Drum motor lock


- Definition - [B]
The drum motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Too much load on the drum drive mechanism
• Drum motor defective or poor connection
• Interface board 1 defective or poor connection (CN708)
• Main control board defective

A172/A199 6-14 SM
1.6 TRANSFER BELT / ROLLER
SC405: Transfer belt position abnormal
- Definition - [B]
The transfer belt is positioned to touch the drum in the following
conditions:
Belt and drum cleaning completed after the main switch is turned on
Belt and drum cleaning completed after a paper jam is removed
Copy job completed
- Possible causes -
• Transfer belt position sensor defective
• Transfer belt position clutch defective
• Interface board 1 defective
• Main control board defective

SC406: Transfer roller position abnormal


- Definition - [B]
The transfer roller is positioned to touch the transfer belt in the following
conditions:
Belt and drum cleaning completed after the main switch is turned on
Belt and drum cleaning completed after a paper jam is removed
Copy job completed
- Possible causes -
• Transfer roller position sensor defective
• Transfer roller position clutch defective
• Interface board 2 defective
• Main control board defective

SC411: Paper discharge leak

Trouble -
shooting
- Definition - [B]
A paper discharge leak signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Paper discharge plate is touching a conductive foreign object
• High voltage supply board - D defective

SM 6-15 A172/A199
SC420: Cleaning motor lock
- Definition - [B]
The cleaning motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Cleaning motor defective or poor connection
• Interface board 1 defective or poor connection (CN710)
• Main control board defective

SC422: See AROUND THE DRUM


SC440: See AROUND THE DRUM

A172/A199 6-16 SM
1.7 PAPER FEED
SC500: Transport motor lock
- Definition - [B]
The transport motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
- Possible causes -
• Too much load on the transport unit, fusing unit, transfer roller unit, or
transfer belt cleaning unit
• Transport motor defective or poor connection
• Interface board 2 defective or poor connection (CN806)
• Main control board defective

SC502: 1st tray lift motor abnormal


SC503: 2nd tray lift motor abnormal
SC504: 3rd tray lift motor abnormal
- Definition - [C]
The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the lift motor starts
turning. The SC message for level C is displayed when this condition is
detected twice.
- Possible causes -
• Lift sensor defective
• Tray lift motor defective or poor connection
• Paper feed interface board defective or poor connection (CN906)
• Main control board defective

SC510: Paper feed motor abnormal


- Definition - [B]
The paper feed motor lock signal is detected for more than 3 seconds.
Trouble -
shooting
- Possible causes -
• Too much load on the paper feed mechanism
• Paper feed motor defective or poor connection
• Paper feed interface board defective or poor connection (CN910)
• Main control board defective

SM 6-17 A172/A199
1.8 FUSING
SC541: Fusing (hot roller) thermistor open
- Definition - [A]
The output of the fusing (hot roller) thermistor goes to 5 V, corresponding
to 0°C.
- Possible causes -
• Fusing (hot roller) thermistor open
• Fusing unit not installed
• Main control board defective

SC542: Fusing (hot roller) warm-up error


- Definition - [A]
The fusing (hot roller) temperature does not reach the ready temperature
within 12 minutes after the main switch is turned on.
- Possible causes -
• Fusing (hot roller) thermistor not in position
• Fusing (hot roller) lamp open
• Fusing (hot roller) thermistor defective
• Main control board defective

SC543: Fusing (hot roller) overheat


- Definition - [A]
A fusing (hot roller) temperature of over 200°C is detected 5 times (within
5 seconds).
- Possible causes -
• Fusing (hot roller) thermistor defective
• AC drive board defective (triac)
• Main control board defective

A172/A199 6-18 SM
SC544: Fusing (hot roller) low temperature abnormal
- Definition - [A]
A fusing (hot roller) temperature of below 90°C is detected 6 times (within
6 seconds) after warm-up is completed.
- Possible causes -
• Fusing (hot roller) thermistor defective
• AC drive board defective
• Main control board defective
• Fusing (hot roller) thermistor not in position
• Fusing (hot roller) lamp open

SC545: Fusing (hot roller) ready temperature abnormal


- Definition - [A]
Fusing (hot roller) temperature goes below the ready temperature (10°C
below the control temperature) after warm-up is completed, and it does
not reach the ready temperature within 6 minutes.
- Possible causes -
• Fusing (hot roller) thermistor defective
• AC drive board defective
• Main control board defective

SC547: Fusing (hot roller) temperature does not increase


- Definition - [A]
During warm-up, the fusing (hot roller) temperature does not increase
when compared to the temperature 1 minute before.
- Possible causes -
• Fusing (hot roller) thermistor defective
• AC drive board defective
Trouble -
shooting
• Main control board defective

SM 6-19 A172/A199
SC551: Pressure roller thermistor open
- Definition - [A]
The output of the pressure roller thermistor goes to 5 V, corresponding to
0°C.
- Possible causes -
• Pressure roller thermistor open
• Main control board defective
• Fusing unit not installed

SC552: Pressure roller warm-up error


- Definition - [A]
Pressure roller temperature does not reach the ready temperature within
12 minutes after the main switch is turned on.
- Possible causes -
• Pressure roller thermistor not in position
• Pressure roller lamp open
• Pressure roller thermistor defective
• Main control board defective

SC553: Pressure roller overheat


- Definition - [A]
A pressure roller temperature of over 180°C is detected 5 times.
- Possible causes -
• Pressure roller thermistor defective
• AC drive board defective (triac)
• Main control board defective

A172/A199 6-20 SM
SC554: Pressure roller low temperature abnormal
- Definition - [A]
A pressure roller temperature of below 70°C is detected 6 times after
warm-up is completed.
- Possible causes -
• Pressure roller thermistor defective
• AC drive board defective
• Main control board defective
• Pressure roller thermistor not in position
• Pressure roller lamp open

SC555: Pressure roller ready temperature abnormal


- Definition - [A]
The pressure roller temperature goes below the ready temperature (10°C
below the control temperature) after warm-up is completed, and does not
reach the ready temperature within 6 minutes.
- Possible causes -
• Pressure roller thermistor defective
• AC drive board defective
• Main control board defective

SC557: Pressure roller temperature does not increase


- Definition - [A]
During warm-up, pressure roller temperature does not increase when
compared to the temperature 1 minute before.
- Possible causes -
• Pressure roller thermistor defective
• AC drive board defective
Trouble -
shooting
• Main control board defective

SC558: Zero cross signal abnormal


- Definition - [A]
Zero cross signals are not detected within a certain period.
- Possible causes -
• Main control board defective

SM 6-21 A172/A199
1.9 COMMUNICATION
SC600: Communication error between main control and operation panel
boards
- Definition - [B]
The main CPU cannot communicate with the operation panel CPU
properly.
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between main control board and operation panel
board
• Main board defective
• Operation panel defective

SC601: Communication error between main control and scanner control


boards
- Definition - [B]
The main CPU cannot communicate with the scanner control CPU
properly.
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between main control board and scanner control
board (optical fiber cable)
• Optical fiber cable defective
• Main control board defective
• Scanner control board defective
• DC power supply board defective (no dc 5V input to scanner control
board)

SC602: Communication error between main control and transfer belt


motor drive boards
- Definition - [B]
The main CPU does not receive the response signal from the transfer belt
drive board after 3 tries.
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between main control board and transfer belt drive
board
• Main control board defective
• Transfer belt drive board defective

A172/A199 6-22 SM
SC603: Communication error within main control board
- Definition - [B]
The CPUs on the main control board cannot communicate properly with
each other.
- Possible causes -
• Main control board defective

SC604: Serial signal error in main control board


- Definition - [B]
Writing and reading serial signals for the DRAM produces discrepancies.
- Possible causes -
• Main control board defective

SC605: Communication error between main control and IPU boards


- Definition - [B]
The main CPU cannot communicate with the IPU CPU properly.
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between main control board and IPU board
• Main control board defective
• IPU board defective

SC622: Communication error between main control board and display


editor I/F board
- Definition - [C]
The main CPU cannot start communication with the editor I/F properly.
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between main control board and the display editor I/F

Trouble -
shooting
board
• Main control board defective
• Display editor I/F board defective

SM 6-23 A172/A199
SC623: Communication error between main control board and projector
unit
- Definition - [B]
The main CPU cannot start communication with the projector unit
properly.
- Possible causes -
• Poor connection between main control board and projector unit
• Main control board defective
• Option interface board defective
• Projector control board defective

A172/A199 6-24 SM
1.10 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SC700: DJF feed-in motor abnormal
SC701: DJF belt drive motor abnormal
SC702: DJF feed out motor abnormal
- Definition - [D]
The encoder pulse is not detected by the DJF main board under each
motor on condition. The first time, an original jam occurs. The second
time, an SC is displayed.
- Possible causes -
• DJF feed-in motor defective
• DJF belt drive motor defective
• DJF feed out motor defective

SC703: Size detection encoder pulse error


- Definition - [C]
The encoder pulse from the pull-out roller is not detected by the DJF main
board. The first original jam will not display an SC. The second jam,
however, will display an SC code.
- Possible causes -
• Pulse generator defective
• Original length detection error
• Original has slipped

SC704: DJF friction belt motor abnormal


- Definition - [D]

Trouble -
shooting
The encoder pulse is not detected by the DJF main board under the
friction belt motor on condition. The first original jam will not display an
SC. The second jam, however, will display an SC code.
- Possible causes -
• Friction belt turn sensor defective
• Friction belt motor defective
• Pulse generator defective
• Some tension has been applied to the friction belt

SM 6-25 A172/A199
SC730: Sorter motor abnormal
- Definition - [B]
The encoder pulse is not detected by the sorter control board for 200 ms
after the sorter motor starts. A paper jam indication is displayed the first
time. An SC is displayed the second time.
- Possible causes -
• Sorter motor defective

SC790: Projector lamp does not turn on


- Definition - [C]
The projector lamp does not turn on 100 ms after 10 V (or more) is
applied to the lamp.
- Possible causes -
• Projector lamp open
• Thermofuse blown

SC791: Projector lamp does not turn off


- Definition - [C]
The projector lamp stays on when it should turn off.
- Possible causes -
• Projector lamp regulator defective

SC792: Projector lamp overheat


- Definition - [C]
The projector control board detects a lamp overheat condition through the
thermistor.
- Possible causes -
• Projector lamp regulator defective
• Thermistor defective

A172/A199 6-26 SM
1.11 OTHERS
SC900: Bk-total counter not on
- Definition - [B]
The Bk-total counter does not turn on.
- Possible causes -
• Bk-total counter defective
• DC power supply board defective (FU803, FU804)

SC901: Bk-total counter not off


- Definition - [B]
The Bk-total counter does not turn off.
- Possible causes -
• Bk-total counter defective

SC902: FC-total counter does not turn on


SC903: FC-total counter does not turn off
- Definition - [B]
The FC-total counter does not turn on or off.
- Possible causes -
• FC-total counter defective

Trouble -
shooting

SM 6-27 A172/A199
1.12 ACC Control
SC910: ACC Calculation Error (Letter Mode: Bk)
SC911: ACC Calculation Error (Letter Mode: C)
SC912: ACC Calculation Error (Letter Mode: M)
SC913: ACC Calculation Error (Letter Mode: Y)
SC914: ACC Calculation Error (Photo Mode: Bk)
SC915: ACC Calculation Error (Photo Mode: C)
SC916: ACC Calculation Error (Photo Mode: M)
SC917: ACC Calculation Error (Photo Mode: Y)
- Definition - [D]
Even if the test pattern has been scanned in, the CPU on the IPU could
not find the appropriate adjustment table to approximate the actual curve
to the target gamma curve.
- Possible Causes -
• IPU defective

SC920: ACC not performed (internal error)


- Definition - [D]
Under any of the following conditions, the ACC will not performed.
1) Process Control self-check error, ID sensor error, Drum potential
sensor error, Potential control error.
2) When an SC occurs while the ACC test pattern is printed.
3) When the TD sensor output (Vt) value becomes lower than 2.5 ± 1.0 V.
- Possible Causes -
• The actual printer gamma curve changed over a big range (caused by
process control self-check).
• Main Control Board defective

A172/A199 6-28 SM
2. BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

Rating
Fuse Symptom (Main Switch: ON)
110 - 120 V 220 – 240 V
DC Power Supply Board
FU801 8A/125 V 5 A/250 V No response (Dead machine)
SC121 (Scanner HP sensor abnormal - stays on) or
FU802 6.3 A/125 V
SC120 (Scanner HP sensor abnormal - stays off)
FU803 6.3 A/125 V SC900 (Bk-total counter not on)
SC900 when the Start key is pressed, or misfeed
FU804 6.3 A/125 V occurs before registration when copy mode without
black is selected.

Trouble -
shooting

SM 6-29 A172/A199
3. OPERATION PANEL SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
MODES
The machine can make a self-diagnosis on the operation panel (operation
control unit).

3.1 OPERATION PANEL SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TESTS


The machine can perform the following tests on the operation control unit:
• Main RAM read/write test
• System ROM check sum test
• Video RAM read/write test
• VGA register test
• LCD pattern test
• Touch panel test
• LED/Conventional key test
• CMOS RAM test

A172/A199 6-30 SM
3.2 STARTING THE OPERATIONAL DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM

Operational Panel Diagnostic Program

KEY/LED Controller Hardware Error

Message indicating a problem with


the key/LED controller

Operational Panel Diagnostic Program

Touch Panel Controller Hardware Error

Message indicating a problem with the


touch panel controller

Trouble -
shooting
1. To start the operational diagnostic program, turn on the main switch while
pressing the [Special Accessory Key] key, then press the [Start] key.
2. If there is an error before the main menu is displayed, the operation
control unit system displays the error message as shown in the above
diagrams. This error message indicates that something is wrong inside
the operation control unit.
If this error message appears, turn off the main switch to forcibly
terminate the operational diagnostic program.

SM 6-31 A172/A199
3. When you start the operational diagnostic program, the system displays
the point accuracy calibration screen.

Press this part. Press this part.

Operational Panel Diagnostic Program

Press the crosses in the 4 corners.


SKIP : Clear/Stop Key

Message indicating an instruction to press the crosses in the


four corners.
Pressing the Clear/Stop key skips the menu.

a) If the point accuracy calibration is necessary, touch the crosses in the


four corners with the editor pen. This enables the correct touch key
operation in the subsequent self diagnostic program screen.
NOTE: You can press the crosses in any order.
This calibration is independent from the point accuracy of the
standard operation panel screen.
b) When the calibration is unnecessary, press the Clear/Stop key to go to
the menu screen.

Ver : ✱. ✱✱ Operational Panel Diagnostic Menu ID CODE : ✱✱

Please select function and execution key.

Main RAM Read/Write Test Touch Panel Test

System ROM CHeck Sum Test LED/Conventional Key Test

Video RAM Read/Write Test CMOS RAM Test

VGA Register Test

LCD Pattern Test

Test Cont Exec Exit

A172/A199 6-32 SM
3.3 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODES
The following three self-diagnostic modes are available.
Usually, the test mode is the most convenient for self-diagnosis.
(1) Test mode

Reverse display indicating that the ROM


check sum test is selected.

Operational Panel Diagnostic Menu ID : ✱ ✱

Please select function and execution key.

Main RAM Read/Write Test Touch Panel Test

System ROM Check Sum Test LED/Conventional Key Test

Video RAM Read/Write Test CMOS RAM Test

VGA Register Test

LCD Test

Test Cont Exec Exit

Pressing this key starts the self-diagnostic


program in the test mode.

The self-diagnostic program in the test mode executes the selected test and
all the subsequent tests.
Note that the following tests involve the use of touch panel operation to start
the tests:
• LCD pattern test
• Touch panel test
Trouble -
shooting
• LED/conventional key test
• CMOS RAM test

If it detects a problem, the self-diagnostic system stops executing the test


and displays information about the problem.

SM 6-33 A172/A199
(2) Continuous mode

Reverse display indicating that the ROM


check sum test is selected.

Operational Panel Diagnostic Menu ID : ✱ ✱

Please select function and execution key.

Main RAM Read/Write Test Touch Panel Test

System ROM Check Sum Test LED/Conventional Key Test

Video RAM Read/Write Test CMOS RAM Test

VGA Register Test

LCD Test

Test Cont Exec Exit

Pressing this key starts the selected test in


the continuous mode.

The self-diagnostic program in the continuous mode repeats the selected test
without cessation. It displays the number of times it repeats the test. You can
stop this test by using the End key. If a problem is detected, the machine
stops the test and displays information about the problem. The self-diagnostic
program does not support the continuous mode for the following tests:
• LCD pattern test
• Touch panel test
• LED/conventional key test
• CMOS RAM test

A172/A199 6-34 SM
(3) Execution mode
The self-diagnostic program in the execution mode executes the selected
test once.

Reverse display indicating that the ROM


check sum test is selected.

Operational Panel Diagnostic Menu ID : ✱ ✱

Please select function and execution key.

Main RAM Read/Write Test Touch Panel Test

System ROM Check Sum Test LED/Conventional Key Test

Video RAM Read/Write Test CMOS RAM Test

VGA Register Test

LCD Test

Test Cont Exec Exit

Pressing this key starts the Pressing this key terminates


selected test in the execution the self-diagnostic program.
mode.

Trouble -
shooting

SM 6-35 A172/A199
3.4 Details about Operation Panel Self-diagnosis
Select a test. Then, select a mode.

3.4.1 Main RAM read/write test

Diagnostic test (title) Message indicating that the test is


currently under way

Main RAM Read/Write Test

Testing ...

Check Address : ✱✱✱✱✱✱✱✱✱

Test Count : ✱✱✱✱ End

Number of times the system repeats [End] key.


the test (for the continuous mode). Pressing this key terminates the
test (for the continuous mode).

A172/A199 6-36 SM
Test result message
If the test is a success, [Test
successful] appears.
If it is not, [Test Failed] appears.

Main RAM Read/Write Test

4444

ERROR ADDRESS : 44444444


CHECK DATA : 4444
ERROR DATA : 4444

Menu
Test Count : 4444

Error information
[Menu] key.
You must press this key to return
(i) Message after the test to the menu screen.
(a) If the test is successful:
• [Test Successful] appears at the center of the screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• [Test Failed] appears at the center of the screen.
• Error information appears at the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Remarks: Error information
Error address Segment + Offset for an area of 1 MByte or less
Check data Value written at test execution time
Error data Value read from the same position that was written into

(ii) Processing after the test


Trouble -
shooting
(a) If the test is successful:
• Test mode: The system executes the next test.
• Continuous mode: The system repeats the same test.
• Execution mode: The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• The system displays the error information and [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.

SM 6-37 A172/A199
3.4.2 System ROM check sum test

Diagnostic test (title) Message indicating that the test is


currently under way

System ROM Check Sum Test

Testing ...

Check Address : 44444444

Test Count: 4444 End

Number of times the system repeats the test [End] key.


(for the continuous mode) Pressing this key terminates the test
(for the continuous mode).

A172/A199 6-38 SM
Test result message
If the test is a success, [Test successful]
appears.
If it is not, [Test Failed] appears.

System ROM Check Sum Test

Error information

4444

CHECK DATA : 0000


E R R O R D A T A : 4444

Test Count : 4444 Menu

[Menu] key.
(i) Message after the test You must press this key to return
to the menu screen.
(a) If the test is successful:
• [Test Successful] appears at the center of the screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• [Test Failed] appears at the center of the screen.
• Error information appears at the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Remarks: Error information
Check data 0000h is displayed because of 0 addition.
Error data Result of adding data in word units

(ii) Processing after the test

Trouble -
shooting
(a) If the test is successful:
• Test mode: The system executes the next test.
• Continuous mode: The system repeats the same test.
• Execution mode: The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• The system displays the error message and [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.

SM 6-39 A172/A199
3.4.3 Video RAM read/write test
NOTE: Vertical stripes (due to test data) appear on the LCD screen while
the test is running. This should be considered normal.

Message indicating that the test is


Diagnostic test (title) currently under way

Video RAM Read/Write Test

Testing ...

Test Count : 4444 End

Number of times the system [End] key.


repeats the test (for the Pressing this key terminates the
continuous mode) test (for the continuous mode).

A172/A199 6-40 SM
Test result message
If the test is a success, [Test successful]
appears.
If it is not, [Test Failed] appears.

Error information Video RAM Read/Write Test

4444

ERROR PLANE : 4444


ERROR SEGMENT : 4444
ERROR OFFSET : 4444
CHECK DATA : 4444
ERROR DATA : 4444

Menu
Test Count : 4444

[Menu] key.
(i) Message after the test You must press this key to return to
the menu screen.
(a) If the test is successful:
• [Test Successful] appears at the center of the screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• [Test Failed] appears at the center of the screen.
• Error information appears at the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Remarks: Error information
Error plane Memory bank at switching time
Error segment Segment (A000h or B000h) is displayed.
Error offset A value from 0000h through FFFFh is displayed.
Check data Value written at test execution time
Error data Value read from the same position that was written into

Trouble -
shooting
(ii) Processing after the test
(a) If the test is successful:
• Test mode: The system executes the next test.
• Continuous mode: The system repeats the same test.
• Execution mode: The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• The system displays the error message and [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.

SM 6-41 A172/A199
3.4.4 VGA test
NOTE: The image on the LCD screen blurs for a moment while the test is
running. This should be considered normal.

Message indicating that the test is


Diagnostic test (title) currently under way

VGA Register Test

Testing ...

Test Count: 4444 End

Number of times the system repeats [End] key. Pressing this key terminates
the test (for the continuous mode) the test (for the continuous mode).

A172/A199 6-42 SM
Test result message
If the test is a success, [Test successful] appears.
If it is not, [Test Failed] appears.

VGA Register Test

Error information

4444

ERROR REGISTER : 4444


ERROR INDEX : 4444
ERROR DATA : 4444
CHECK DATA : 4444

Test Count : 4444 Menu

[Menu] key.
You must press this key to return
(i) Message after the test to the menu screen.

(a) If the test is successful:


• [Test Successful] appears at the center of the screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• [Test Failed] appears at the center of the screen.
• Error information appears at the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Remarks: Error information
Error register Register address is displayed.
Error index Index for the register where an error occurred is displayed.
Check data Value set in the register is displayed.
Error data Read value is displayed.

Trouble -
shooting
(ii) Processing after the test
(a) If the test is successful:
• Test mode: The system executes the next test.
• Continuous mode: The system repeats the same test.
• Execution mode: The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• The system displays the error message and [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.

SM 6-43 A172/A199
3.4.5 LCD pattern test

1. All Black 4. 16 Gradations (Basic: White)


(Edit: R, G, B)

2. All White 5. Energy Saver Mode

HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH

3. 3 Primary Colors (x 3) 6. H Patterns


[Edit version only]

(i) Press any point on the LCD to display the above patterns in
order:

A172/A199 6-44 SM
Diagnostic test (title)

LCD Pattern Test

OK NG

If the test is a success, press the [OK] key.


If it is not, press the [NG] key.

(ii) Processing after the test


(a) If you press the [OK] area:
• Test mode: The system executes the next test.
• Execution mode: The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.
(b) If you press the [NG] area:
• The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.

Trouble -
shooting

SM 6-45 A172/A199
3.4.6 Touch panel test

Diagnostic test (title)

Touch Panel Test

Press the 5 crosses

The pressed cross Message indicating an instruction


changes color. to press the touch panel

(i) Pressing a cross changes the color of the cross.

A172/A199 6-46 SM
Detected coordinates displayed in the
LCD screen

Touch Panel Test

The pressed cross Touch Panel Test Error

changes color.
ERROR DATA : 44 : 44

Menu

If the test is successful, Press this key to return to the


[Test Successful] menu screen.
appears.

(ii) Message after the test


(a) If the test is successful:
• [Test Successful] appears at the center of the screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• [Touch Panel Test Error] appears at the center of the screen.
• Error information appears at the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Remarks: Error information is as follows.
• Error data (detected coordinates (X, Y))

(iii) Processing after the test

Trouble -
shooting
(a) If the test is successful:
• Test mode: The system executes the next test.
• Execution mode: The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.

SM 6-47 A172/A199
3.4.7 LED/Conventional key test

Reverse display of the area


Title associated with the conventional key

LED/Conventional Key Test

Special Accessory
Press the Conventional keys.
Icon chamges the color and User Tools
LED is turned on and off.
Adjustment/Memory
M e s s a g e – > 444444444444444 Program

1 2 3 Recall

Clear Modes/Stand b y
4 5 6
Conventional key Interrupt
7 8 9
to be pressed Start
# 0 4 Clear/Stop

ON OFF OK NG

Pressing this key turns all the Pressing this key turns all the
LEDs on. LEDs off.

(i) Pressing a conventional key causes the events shown below.


1. The buzzer sounds.
2. The associated LED lights (it goes out when you press the key again).
3. The associated LCD area changes color.

(ii) Pressing a touch panel key also causes the event shown below.
[ON]: Turns all the LEDs on.
[OFF]: Turns all the LEDs off.
[OK]: Terminates the test.
[NG]: Terminates the test.
NOTE: If you do not press the conventional key shown in the [MSG:] area,
an error occurs. (Pressing the same key again will not cause an
error.)

A172/A199 6-48 SM
Reverse display associated with the
Title conventional key

LED/Conventional Key Test

Special Accessory
Press the conventional keys.
Icon changes the color and User Tools
LED is turned on and off.
Adjustment/Memory
ERROR: 4444 / C H E C K : 4444 Program

1 2 3 Recall

Clear Modes/Stand b y
4 5 6
Interrupt
7 8 9
Start
# 0 4 Clear/Stop

Menu

Key code which should be detected and You must press this key to
key code actually detected. return to the menu screen.
[Test Successful] appears after you
have pressed all the keys.

(iii) Processing after the test:


(a) If the test is successful:
• The system displays [Test Successful] in the [MSG:] display area.
• Test mode: The system executes the next test.
• Execution mode: The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.
(b) If the test is unsuccessful:
• The system displays error information in the [MSG:] display area.
Error information:
[MSG:4444 (Key code to be checked): 4444 (Key code detected)]

Trouble -
shooting
The system displays [Menu] after the test. You must press [Menu] to return to
the menu screen.

SM 6-49 A172/A199
3.4.8 (8) CMOS RAM test
Date message.
[Please enter new time] appears
Diagnostic test (title) when you must enter the time.

CMOS RAM (Date&Time) Test

Please enter new date.


Programed date: 44 - 44 - 44
New date:

Indicates that the system waits Current settings in the RTC


for date (time) entry.

(i) Enter the date and time data with the Number keys (conventional
keys).
NOTE: You can re-enter data with the Clear/Stop key.
If entering the new date or time is unnecessary, press Start key to go
to the next screen
Example:
Entering the date (December 31, 1999) and time (23:59:55).
1. The system displays [Please enter new date].
2. Press the keys in the following order: "9", "9", "1", "2", "3", "1", and Start
3. The machine displays [Please enter new time].
4. Press the keys in the following order: "2", "3", "6" (wrong entry),
Clear/Stop, "2", "3", "5", "9", "5", "5", and Start
5. The machine displays the settings.

A172/A199 6-50 SM
Current date settings

CMOS RAM (Date & Time) Test

Date : 44 - 44 - 44
Time : 44 : 44 : 44

OK NG

Current settings in the RTC If the test is a success, press the [OK]
key. If it is not, press the [NG] key.

(ii) Test execution


• If the clock operation is normal, press [OK].

(iii) Processing after the test


The following shows what the system does after the test.
(a) If you press [OK]:
• Test mode: The system executes the next test.
• Execution mode: The system displays [Menu].
You must press [Menu] to return to the menu screen.
(b) If you press [NG]:
• The system displays [Menu]. You must press [Menu] to return to the
menu screen.

Trouble -
shooting
NOTE: The system does not support the continuous mode for the CMOS
RAM test. It can only perform this test once in the execution or test
mode.

SM 6-51 A172/A199
4. PROBLEMS DETECTED AT TESTS AND
SUSPECTED UNITS
(1) Problems detected at initial startup (power-on)
Problem Cause Suspected unit
LCD shows nothing. LCD drive voltage is Operation control unit
abnormal. Op-ports 1 and 2
Back-light is too dark. Op-ports 1 and 2
Control signal to the LCD is Operation control unit
abnormal.
Diagnostic program is not Start key detection is Op-ports 1 and 2
started ("Please wait" is abnormal. Operation control unit
displayed).

(2) Problems detected at initialization (point accuracy calibration)


Problem Cause Suspected unit
Pressing down on the touch Touch panel connector is Op-ports 1 and 2
panel does not provide defective.
reverse display. Analog voltage is not Op-ports 1 and 2
detected.
Touch panel is defective. Touch panel
A/D detecting section is Operation control unit
abnormal.
Detected data cannot be Operation control unit
obtained.
NVRAM abnormality Point accuracy data for ROM board
message is displayed (when back-up is cleared from
calibration is skipped). NVRAM.

(3) Problems detected in self-diagnostic mode


Problem Cause Suspected unit
Display is abnormal. LCD is defective. LCD
Specified plotting data cannot Operation control unit
be written into video RAM.
Menu cannot be selected. Interrupt signal from the Operation control unit
touch panel cannot be
detected.

A172/A199 6-52 SM
(4) Problems detected at the main RAM test
Problem Cause Suspected unit
Error message is displayed Written data is different from Operation control unit
(at address C00000h or less) read data.
when the test is finished.
Error message is displayed Written data is different from ROM board
(at address C00000h or less) read data.
when the test is finished.

(5) Problems detected at the system RAM test


Problem Cause Suspected unit
Error message is displayed ROM board is defective. ROM board
when the test is finished.

(6) Problems detected at the video RAM test


Problem Cause Suspected unit
Error message is displayed Video RAM is defective. Operation control unit
when the test is finished.

(7) Problems detected at the VGA RAM test


Problem Cause Suspected unit
Error message is displayed VGA chip and peripheral Operation control unit
when the test is finished. buses are defective.

(8) Problems detected at the LCD pattern test


Problem Cause Suspected unit
LCD test pattern is abnormal. VGA chip and control signals Operation control unit
to the LCD are abnormal.
LCD is defective (there are LCD
dots missing, etc.).
Back-light is out of control Inverter is defective. Op-ports 1 and 2

Trouble -
shooting
(always ON). Back-light control signal is Operation control unit
abnormal.

SM 6-53 A172/A199
(9) Problems detected at the touch panel test
Problem Cause Suspected unit
LCD shows an error Touch panel has low Op-ports 1 and 2
message. detection accuracy.

(10)Problems detected at the LED/Conventional key test


Problem Cause Suspected unit
LCD shows an error Abnormal signal is detected Op-ports 1 and 2
message. when a key is pressed.
Reverse display is not Signal line for key data is Operation control unit
obtained although a key is broken, or the switch is
pressed. damaged.
LED does not light. LED is damaged. Op-ports 1 and 2
Control signal line from the Operation control unit
LED controller to the LED is
broken.
Buzzer does not sound. Piezoelectric buzzer is Op-ports 1 and 2
damaged.
Control signal line is broken. Op-ports 1 and 2
Controller is abnormal. Operation control unit

(11) Problems detected at the CMOS RAM test


Problem Cause Suspected unit
Operation based on the date CMOS RAM is abnormal. Operation control unit
and time settings is abnormal.
Time settings are cleared. R.T.C. backup is abnormal. Operation control unit

(12) End processing


Problem Cause Suspected unit
[System will be reset] The system cannot be reset. Operation control unit
remains displayed.

A172/A199 6-54 SM
DUAL JOB FEEDER
A610
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Original Feed Mode: Automatic document feed mode
Automatic reverse document feed mode
Semi-automatic document feed mode
Combine 2 originals mode
Mixed sized mode
Preset mode

Original Size and Weight: Thick original mode (default mode)


Use this setting for normal paper types
Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Minimum: B6, 51/2" x 81/2"
Weight: 52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14-34 lb)

Thin original mode


Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Minimum: B6, 51/2" x 81/2"
Weight: 40 ~ 128 g/m2 (11-34 lb)

Auto reverse mode


Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Minimum: B6 (lengthwise)
Weight: 52 ~ 105 g/m2 (14-28 lb)

Combine two originals mode


Maximum: A4 (sideways), 81/2" x 11" (sideways)
Minimum: B5 (sideways), 51/2" x 81/2" (sideways)
Weight: 52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14-34 lb)

Mixed size Mode


Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Minimum: B5, 81/2" x 11"
Weight: 52 ~ 80 g/m2 (14-21 lb)
Original Table Capacity: 50 sheets at 80 g/m2 (21 lb)
(or stack height of less than 5 mm)
Dual Job Feeder

Original Standard Position: Rear left


DF62 (A610)

Original Separation: Feed and friction belt


Original Transport: One flat belt

SM 7-1 A172/A199
Power Source: DC24 V from the copier, 2.5 A (average)
Power Consumption: 70W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 680 x 522 x 133 mm
(26.8" x 20.0" x 4.6")
Weight: 14.5 kg (32.0 lb)

A172/A199 7-2 SM
2. COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1 2 3 4 5
12
6

11

10

9 8 7

1. Original Stopper 7. Inverter Roller


2. Press Roller 8. Transport Belt
3. Side Fence 9. Pick-up Rollers
4. Original Table 10. Pull-out Rollers
5. Exit Roller 11. Feed Roller
6. Inverter Pawl 12. Friction Belt

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-3 A172/A199
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1
22 2
21 3
4
20
5
19 6
7
8
18
9

17

10
16

15
11
14
12
13

1. Feed-in Cover Open Sensor 12. Pulse Count Sensor


2. Friction Belt Motor 13. Registration-2 Sensor
3. Feed-in Motor 14. Original Width-1 Sensor
4. Indicator Panel Lamps 15. Original Width-2 Sensor
5. Belt Drive Motor 16. Original Width-3 Sensor
6. DF Main Board 17. Registration-1 Sensor
7. DF Position Sensor 18. Original Set Sensor
8. APS Start Sensor 19. Original Feed Sensor
9. Inverter Solenoid 20. Friction Belt Turn Sensor
10. Feed-out Motor 21. Feed-in Clutch
11. Feed-out Sensor 22. Stopper Solenoid

A172/A199 7-4 SM
3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the
point-to-point large size diagram for symbols and index numbers.

Symbol Name Function Index No.


Motors
M1 Friction Belt Drives the friction belt. 2
Feed-in Drives the feed-in system (pick-up, feed,
M2 3
pull-out rollers)
M3 Belt Drive Drives the transport belt. 5
Feed-out Drives the feed-out and the inverter
M4 system. 10

Sensors
Feed-in Cover Open Detects whether or not the feed-in cover is
S1 1
open.
DF Position Informs the CPU whether the DJF is in the
S2 7
up or down position.
APS Start Informs the CPU when the DJF is being
closed so that the original size sensors in
S3 8
the main body can check the original size
(in platen mode).
Feed-out Checks for original misfeeds and sets
S4 original stop timing when in auto-reverse 11
mode.
Pulse Count Counts the pulses generated by the pulse
S5 generator disc to determine the original 12
length.
Registration-2 Detects the leading edge of the original to
turn off the feed-in clutch and to change
S6 13
the feed-in motor speed. Also detects the
original length.
S7 Original Width-1 Detects the original width. 14
S8 Original Width-2 Detects the original width. 15
S9 Original Width-3 Detects the original width. 16
Registration-1 Detects the original length and original
Dual Job Feeder

S10 jam by detecting the trailing edge of the 17


DF62 (A610)

original.
Original Set Detects if originals have been placed on
S11 18
the feed table.
Original Feed Detects if the originals have reached the
S12 19
feed roller or not.
Friction Belt Turn Counts the pulses generated by the pulse
generator disk to monitor the friction belt
S13 20
motor.

SM 7-5 A172/A199
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Solenoids
Inverter Inverts the original when copying
SOL1 9
two-sided originals.
Stopper Lifts the original stopper and lowers the
SOL2 press roller to feed the set of originals to 22
the feed roller.

PCBs
PCB1 DF Main Board Controls all DJF functions. 6

Magnetic Clutch
Feed-in Transmits the feed-in motor drive to the
CL1 21
pick-up, feed, and pull-out rollers.

Indicator Lamps
Ready Informs the operator that the DJF is in the
down position.
L1 4
Auto Informs the operator that the auto feed
mode is available.

A172/A199 7-6 SM
4. ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM

[D]

[C]

[A]
[E]

[B]
[C]

[J]

[F]

[I]
[G]
[H]

When an original [A] is placed on the original table [B], the leading edge is
stopped by the stopper [C], and the feeler [D] is pushed out of the original
set sensor. The Insert Original indicator light goes out and the DJF informs
the copier’s CPU that the originals have been placed on the original table.
When the Start key is pressed, the copier’s CPU sends the feed-in signal to
the DJF. On receipt of this signal, the stopper solenoid [E] activates to raise
the stopper, which allows the originals to be fed in, and to lower the press
rollers [F] to press the originals against the pick-up rollers, as shown.
The feed-in clutch [G] also activates when the DJF receives the feed-in
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)

signal. 200 ms after the feed-in clutch activates, the feed-in motor feeds all
originals to the feed roller [H].
When the originals reach the feed roller, the stopper solenoid de-activates to
lower the original stopper [I] and to lift up the press rollers [J].

SM 7-7 A172/A199
5. SEPARATION AND FEED MECHANISM
[A]

[E]
[F]
[D] [B]

[F]

[C]

Drive from the feed-in motor [A] is transmitted to the pick-up [B], feed [C],
and pull-out rollers [D], through the feed-in clutch [E], as shown. The feed
roller and the friction belts [F] are used to feed and separate the originals.
Original feed starts when the feed roller starts turning to advance the bottom
original of the stack. The feed roller moves the original past the separation
belt because the driving force of the feed roller is greater than the resistance
of the friction belt. The friction belt prevents multiple feeds because the
resistance of the friction belt is greater than the friction between original
sheets. At this time, the feed-in motor rotates slowly to ensure proper feed
and separation of the original.
When the leading edge of the original activates registration sensor-2 [G], the
feed-in clutch turns off and the motor rotates more quickly. To reduce
mechanical load, only the pull-out rollers are driven to feed the original to the
exposure glass.
To prepare the next original, it is separated in the same manner as explained
above, and stopped when the leading edge is detected by the registration
sensor-2 [G]. When it is time to feed this sheet to the exposure glass, the
feed-in motor rotates at high speed.

A172/A199 7-8 SM
6. FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM

[B]

[A]

[D]

[C]

The friction belts [A] are driven by the friction belt drive motor [B] through
timing belts, as shown.
When the Start key is pressed, the friction belts are not rotated (the motor is
electrically ON but the motor does not turn as the voltage is too low; see the
timing chart in section 13.1). As the leading edge of the original activates the
registration sensor-2, the friction belts rotate in the reverse direction to
reverse out the next original from in between the friction belts and feed
rollers. This results in less of a chance for originals to be damaged or
become dirty. Also, the area of the friction belt that contacts the feed roller or
the original changes, to prevent multiple feeding.
The friction belt turn sensor [C] counts the pulses generated by the pulse
generator disk [D] on the friction belt shaft. The sensor detects friction belt
motor error conditions.
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)

SM 7-9 A172/A199
7. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

[D]
[E]

[A]

[C]

[B]
[F] [G]

The DJF detects original width through the on/off combination of the three
original width sensors-1 [A], -2 [B], -3 [C]. It also detects the original length
with the registration sensors-1 [D], -2 [E] and the pulse count sensor [F].
The DJF CPU counts the pulses between registration sensor-2 [E] on timing,
and registration sensor-1 [D] off timing. Based on this pulse count, the CPU
determines the original length.
The reasons for using two registration sensors are:
1) Registration sensor-2 [E] is used to stop the pre-fed original, which
waits until the previous original is fed out. For precise control, the
original stop position must be after the pull-out rollers [G]. Therefore,
registration sensor-2 is placed after the pull-out rollers.
2) Registration sensor-1 [D] checks the trailing edge of the original. This
check is used to place the original in the correct position on the
exposure glass. Because this is a fast feeding mechanism, some
distance is required between the sensor and the original scale. If
sensor-2 was used to detect the stop timing, there would not be
enough time to stop the original at the correct place. Therefore,
registration sensor-1 is used for this; it is placed 34.9 mm before
sensor-2.

(The diagram at the start of section 8-1 shows the position of the
sensors with respect to the rollers.)

A172/A199 7-10 SM
Width Sensor Upper: Original Size
1 2 3 Lower: Threshold Level for Each Size (Pulse Count)

A4S A3
231 mm
(78)

B5S LTS B4 11" x 15" A3


201 mm 236 mm 377 mm 399 mm
(68) (80) (136) (145)

B6S A5S B6 L A5 L B5 L LT L A4 L B4 A3
or
143 mm 166 mm 201 mm 231 mm 271 mm 294 mm 316 mm 387 mm
(44) (54) (68) (78) (95) (103) (115) (140)

: Paper Present
: No Paper
S: Sideways
L : Lengthwise

Width Sensor Position

Original Alignment

C B A
Width Sensor 1: A = 210 mm

Width Sensor 2: B = 235 mm

Width Sensor 3: C = 284 mm

The original size is determined by the combination of the detected original


width and length as shown above. Note that when only width sensor 1 detect
that paper is preset, or if all width sensors are off, the original size is
detected only by the pulse count sensor data.

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-11 A172/A199
8. TRANSPORT MECHANISM
8.1 BASIC OPERATION

[D] [E] [A]

[B]

[C]

The transport belt [A] is driven by an independent motor called the belt drive
motor [B]. The belt drive motor starts rotating soon after the copier sends an
original feed-in signal. Inside the transport belt are five pressure roller shafts
[C], which achieve the proper amount of pressure between the belt and the
original.
When the leading edge of the original reaches the exposure glass, the
original is transported by the transport belt (the belt drive motor turns on 200
ms after the start key is pressed).
When the trailing edge of the original passes through registration sensor-1
[D], the feed-in motor turns off. When the trailing edge of the original passes
through registration sensor-2 [E], the belt drive motor gradually decreases its
speed to stop the original at the proper place on the exposure glass.
100 ms after the belt drive motor turns off, the feed-in motor turns on until
the next original activates registration sensor-2 [E], the next original waits
until the first original copy job is complete. This operation reduces the
original feed in time.
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier’s CPU sends the
feed-out and feed-in signals to the DJF CPU, and the feed-in motor is
activated again to change the original.
If the original is smaller than A4 sideways, the original just copied is
transported to the right side of the exposure glass then waits until the next
original copy job is completed. Then the previous original is delivered. This
operation also reduces the original feed-in time.

A172/A199 7-12 SM
Left Scale
Rear Scale 5.0 mm

Original

Since the copier’s original alignment position is at the left rear corner (not in
the center), the originals fed from the DJF must also be at this position. But if
the original was to be fed along the rear scale, original skews, jams or
wrinkling, may occur.
To prevent such problems, the original transfer position is set to 5.0 mm
away from the rear scale as shown. The correction for this 5.0 mm gap is
compensated for by the base copier’s optics unit.

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-13 A172/A199
8.2 THIN/THICK ORIGINAL MODES

Fig. 1

10±2 mm Fig. 2

25 mm Fig. 3

This document feeder has two different ways of stopping originals on the
exposure glass at the correct position. They are thin original mode and thick
original mode. The user can select the desired settings to match the type of
original being used.

1. Thick Original Mode


When thick original mode is selected, the belt drive motor remains
energized to carry the original approximately 10 mm past the left scale
(Figures 1 and 2). Then, the belt drive motor pauses and reverses to
feed the original back against the original scale for about 25 mm (Fig. 3).
This forces the original against the left scale and thus aligns the trailing
edge of the original with the scale.
Thick original mode is selected at the factory.
2. Thin Original Mode
To protect originals from being damaged by the movements of the
transfer belt, thin original mode can be selected. The original is stopped
at the correct position on the exposure glass based on an encoder pulse
count. The belt drive motor stops shortly after the original trailing edge
passes registration sensor-2. (Exact timing depends on registration
adjustment.)

The feed amount for both modes can be adjusted.


For more details, refer to the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.

A172/A199 7-14 SM
9. ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM

[A]

When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier’s CPU sends the
feed-out signal to the DJF CPU.
When the DJF receives the feed-out signal, the belt drive and feed-out
motors [A] turn on.
The feed-out sensor [B] installed in the feed-out section counts the number
of pulses to calculate how long the feed-out motor must stay on to feed the
original out of the machine properly. Also, the motor rotates at low speed for
the last 50 mm of the detected trailing edge to improve stacking efficiency.
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)

SM 7-15 A172/A199
10. TRANSPORT BELT LEVELING MECHANISM

[B]

[A]

[F]

[D]

[F]

[E]
[C]

The transport belt [A] and the two support arms [B] are formed as one unit,
(made of aluminum). This results in a more flexible structure than the
monocoque type (in which the cover carries all of the stress), and the gap
between the transport belt and the original can easily be kept precise during
belt transport.
On the support arm linked with the DJF hinge [C], there is a fulcrum [D] to
support the DJF. When the DJF is being closed and the rear stopper [E]
contacts the base copier first, the DJF rotates about the fulcrum, rotates and
the front stopper [F] will also contact the base copier to level the belt with the
exposure glass.

A172/A199 7-16 SM
11. LIFT MECHANISM


[A]
[E] ➂

[B]

[C]
[D]

When the DJF is opened, the lift springs [A] provide enough force to ensure
that the DJF does not fall onto the exposure glass. When the DJF is closed,
points "➀", "➁", and "➂" are positioned as shown and no upward force is
provided to the DJF.
The position sensor [B] is actuated when the DJF is closed. The copier then
shifts to the document feeder mode. The position sensor also serves as the
reset switch for DJF misfeeds.
After the cover is closed, the APS start sensor [C], which is below the DF
position sensor, informs the base copier CPU that original size sensors in
Dual Job Feeder

the main body can check the original size for the platen mode.
DF62 (A610)

When a book or thick original (maximum thickness 60 mm) is copied, the


DJF acts as a cover for the original as shown in the diagram [D]. The
position sensor is turned off during this condition, so the DJF does not
function. The tension of spring [E] returns the DJF to the normal condition
after copying a thick original.

SM 7-17 A172/A199
12. SPECIAL FEATURES
12.1 PRESET MODE

[C] [E] [B]

[D]

[F]

[A]

Two sets of originals for independent copy jobs can be set on the original
tray at the same time.
While the first set of originals [A] remains on the original tray, both the
original set sensor feeler [B] and original feed sensor feeler [C] are lifted out
of their sensors. A second set of originals [D] can be placed in the feeder on
top of the first set, as far as the original stopper [E]. In this case, when the
first set of originals are all fed-in, the original set sensor feeler is still lifted out
of the sensor, but the original feed sensor has dropped into the sensor.
Therefore, the copier’s CPU recognizes that the first job is completed.
If the second job is already preset, the second set of originals is
automatically fed to the feed roller [F] and fed one-by-one into the machine
in the same manner as the first set of originals.

A172/A199 7-18 SM
12.2 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED (AUTO REVERSE) MODE

[B]

[A]
[C]

[B]

Unlike for one-sided original feed, the back side of the original must be
copied first to keep the originals and copies in the correct order.
During original feed-in, the sequence is the same as for one-sided feed;
however, the belt drive motor continues rotating until the original reaches the
inverter section. The DJF CPU also energizes the feed-out motor and the
inverter solenoid [A] for a short time to lift the inverter pawls [B].
After the inverter mechanism inverts the original (10 pulses after the feed-out
sensor [C] activates), the belt drive motor reverses and the original is fed
towards the original scale. It is stopped at the correct position on the
exposure glass, and the DJF CPU sends the copy start signal.
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier’s CPU sends the
invert original signal to the DJF CPU in order to make a copy of the front
side. The original is inverted in the same way as for the back side, as
explained above. Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)

SM 7-19 A172/A199
12.3 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE

Fig. 1

Fig. 2
- Overview -
Two originals are fed onto the exposure glass at once in the combine two
originals mode as shown in figure 1. This allows copying two originals onto
one sheet of paper automatically either in the full size mode or in reduction
mode.
If an odd number of originals is placed on the original table, the first original
is placed on the exposure glass as shown in figure 2.
In this mode, only one-sided originals can be used, and Auto Paper Select
(APS) and Auto Reduce/Enlarge modes cannot be used.

A172/A199 7-20 SM
Figure 1

Figure 2

- Operation - Figure 3
The DF operates in the combine two originals mode as follows:
Figure 1
The first original is fed in the same manner as in one-sided original
mode. When registration sensor-2 detects the trailing edge of the first
original, the feed-in and the belt drive motors stop once and the feed-in
clutch turns on again to prepare to feed in the second original.
Figure 2
As soon as the feed-in and the belt drive motor turn off, the belt drive
motor starts rotating in reverse to align the first original against the
original scale. Then the belt drive motor turns off.
Figure 3
50 ms after the feed-in motor turns off, the feed-in motor turns on again
Dual Job Feeder

at a lower speed (372 mm/) to feed the second original.


DF62 (A610)

A few pulses (0 ∼ 14 pulses: depending on the settings of DIP switches


102-1 to 4) after the registration sensor-2 is activated by the leading
edge of the second original, the feed-in motor and the feed-in clutch turn
off.

SM 7-21 A172/A199
Figure 4

Figure 5
Figure 4
Soon after the feed-in motor turns off, both the feed-in and the belt drive
motors turn on again at the lower speed (372 mm/s).
After registration sensor-2 detects the trailing edge of the second
original, the feed-in and the belt drive motors turn off and gradually the
belt drive speed reduces to stop the original at the proper place on the
exposure glass.
Figure 5
After these originals have been copied, the belt drive motor and the
feed-out motor turn on to feed out the originals. 50 mm before the trailing
edge of the first original de-activates the feed-out sensor, both the belt
drive and the feed-out motor rotate at the lower speed to improve original
stacking.
48 pulses later, the belt drive motor turns off and 60 pulses after the
feed-out sensor detects the trailing edge of the second original, the
feed-out motor turns off.

A172/A199 7-22 SM
13. TIMING CHARTS WITH ORIGINAL MISFEED
DETECTION
13.1 A4 SIDEWAYS: ONE-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-23 A172/A199
13.2 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE

A172/A199 7-24 SM
13.3 A4 SIDEWAYS: TWO-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-25 A172/A199
14. SERVICE TABLES
14.1 DIP SWITCHES AND SWITCH 0: OFF 1: ON ↓ : Push

DPS101 DPS102 SW
Modes Function
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 101
Feed-in motor (M2) activates (High
1 0 0 0 —
Speed)
Feed-in motor (M2) activates (Low
1 0 0 1 —
Speed)
Motor Tests
1 1 0 1
(Speed Adj.) 0 1 0 0 — Belt drive motor (M3) activates
Feed-out motor (M4) activates
0 0 1 0 —
(High Speed)
Feed-out motor (M4) activates
0 0 1 1 —
(Low Speed)
Friction belt motor (M1) activates
1 0 0 0 ↓ (Reverse)
Friction Belt Friction belt motor (M1) activates
Free Run
1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 ↓ (Forward)
Push SW101 to feed the page in.
1 0 0 — ↓ Push it again to feed the sheet out.
1 0 0 0 — Stopper solenoid (SOL2) activates
MC, SOL 0 1 0 0 — Not used
0 0 1 1
Tests
0 0 1 0 — Feed-in clutch (CL1) activates
0 0 0 1 — Inverter solenoid (SOL1) activates
Feeds the original in and out
0 0 0 0 ↓ (thick / one-sided)
Feeds the original in and out
0 0 0 1 ↓ (thin / one-sided)
Feeds the original in and out
1 0 0 0 ↓ (thick / two-sided)
Feeds the original in and out
1 0 0 1 ↓ (thin / two-sided)
Original Feeds the original in and out
Feed 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 ↓ (low speed / thick / one-sided)
Tests
Feeds the original in and out
0 0 1 1 ↓ (low speed / thin / one-sided)
Feeds the original in and out
1 0 1 0 ↓ (low speed / thick / two-sided)
Feeds the original in and out
1 0 1 1 ↓ (low speed / thin / two-sided)
Feeds the original in and out
0 1 0 0 ↓ (pasted original mode)
Feeds the original in and out
1 1 1 0 ↓ (combine original mode)

A172/A199 7-26 SM
DPS101 DPS102 SW
Modes Function
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 101
0 0 0 0 ↓ Thick / one-sided original mode
0 0 0 1 ↓ Thin / one-sided original mode
1 0 0 0 ↓ Thick / two-sided original mode
1 0 0 1 ↓ Thin / two-sided original mode
Free Run
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 ↓ Thick / mixed size original mode
Mode
0 1 0 1 ↓ Thin / mixed size original mode
0 0 1 0 ↓ Low speed / thick / one-sided
0 0 1 1 ↓ Low speed / thin / one-sided
1 0 1 0 ↓ Low speed / thick / two-sided
1 0 1 1 ↓ Low speed / thin / two-sided
1 1 1 0 ↓ Combine two originals mode
LED 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 — Turns on the indicator lamp (L1)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — Standard setting for A172/A199
Standard
Operation Standard setting for A175/A176/
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 —
A177/A191/A192

14.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS


VR No. FUNCTION
101 Adjusts the registration in one-sided original mode
102 Adjusts the registration in two-sided original mode
103 Adjusts the feed-in motor (M2) speed (high speed)
104 Adjusts the feed-in motor (M2) speed (low speed)
105 Adjusts the belt drive motor (M3) speed
106 Adjusts the feed-out motor (M4) speed (low speed)
107 Adjusts the feed-out motor (M4) speed (high speed)

14.3 LEDs
These LEDs monitor motor speed. Use in conjunction with VRs 103 - 107.
LED 101 LED 102 FUNCTION
Correct speed, if they stay on for more than
ON ON
10 s
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)

ON OFF The motor is too fast


OFF ON The motor is too slow

14.4 FUSE
Fuse No. FUNCTION
101 Protects all voltage lines (5 V, 12 V, 24 V)

SM 7-27 A172/A199
15. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
15.1 UPPER COVER REMOVAL
[D]
[C]
[A]

[B] [E]

[F]

1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed-in cover [A].
2. Remove the stopper screw [B].
3. Remove the 2 screws securing the table bracket [C].
4. Remove the original table [D] (3 screws).
NOTE: Do not loosen the 2 screws securing the original table to the
table bracket.
5. Remove the small cover [E] at the rear side of the upper DJF cover (1
screw).
6. Remove the upper cover [F] (6 screws).

A172/A199 7-28 SM
15.2 TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT
[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

NOTE: Never use alcohol to clean the transport belt. The coating will be
damaged.
1. Turn off the main switch and lift up the DJF.
2. Remove the front cover [A] (3 screws).
3. Remove the 4 screws securing the transport belt guide assembly [B].
4. Fold the stay [C] as shown.
5. Remove the transport belt [D].
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)

SM 7-29 A172/A199
[A]
[B]

[C]

6. Install the new belt on the belt guide assembly [A].


NOTE: When installing the new belt, set the belt between the belt
guides [B].
7. While opening the original guide [C], carefully install the belt guide
assembly on the DJF (4 screws), making sure that the mylars on the
feed-in unit side are not damaged.
8. Reinstall the machine and check the machine operation.

A172/A199 7-30 SM
15.3 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[B]

[C]

[A]

1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove the snap ring [B].
3. Push the feed roller shaft to the front, then remove the roller assembly
[C] as shown.
4. Remove the 4 snap rings, then replace the feed rollers.
NOTE: When reinstalling the feed rollers, be sure that the one-way bearing
(silver color) is located at the front side (the roller must rotate only
counter-clockwise when the shaft is fixed).

Do not touch the rollers with bare hands.

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-31 A172/A199
15.4 FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT

[A]

[D]

[C]

[B]

1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover.
2. Remove the shaft receiving bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Gently pull up the friction belt assembly [B] and remove it from the drive
shaft [C].
4. Replace the friction belts [D].
NOTE: Use alcohol to clean the friction belts.
Do not touch the belts with bare hands.

A172/A199 7-32 SM
15.5 ORIGINAL SET/FEED, REGISTRATION-1/-2, AND
ORIGINAL WIDTH-1/-2/-3 SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]

[A]
[D]

[F]

[E]

1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove the stopper screw [B] and open the original stopper [C].
3. Remove the original table [D] (5 screws).
4. Remember the location of the original guide [E] against the guide plate
[F] as shown. This is to keep the same original side-to-side registration
after re-installation.
5. Remove the original guide (3 screws).
Dual Job Feeder

6. Replace the required sensor.


DF62 (A610)

7. After this replacement, adjust the side-to side original registration if


necessary.

SM 7-33 A172/A199
15.6 FEED-OUT UNIT REMOVAL

[C]

[B] [A]

[D]

[E]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper
Cover Removal)
2. Disconnect the 4P and 2P connectors [A] of the feed-out motor [B].
3. Disconnect all the connectors and remove the DJF main board [C].
4. Disconnect the APS start/DJF position sensor connector [D].
5. Remove the feed-out unit [E] (4 screws and 1 grounding screw).

A172/A199 7-34 SM
15.7 FEED-OUT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[B]
[A]

[F]

[D]

[E] [C]
[G]

1. Remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out Unit Removal.)


2. Remove the spring [A].
3. Remove the bracket [B] with the feed-out motor from the feed-out unit (3
screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling the bracket, be sure to set the arm [C] on the
plunger pin [D].
4. Remove the pulley [E] (1 Allen screw [F]).
5. Remove the feed-out motor [G] (4 screws).

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-35 A172/A199
15.8 INVERTER SOLENOID REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]

[C]

[A]

OFF ON
[D]
[E]

[F]

ON

OFF

1. Remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out Unit Removal.)


2. Remove the inverter solenoid [A] (2 screws).
NOTE: When installing the inverter solenoid, check the following:
1) The arm [B] must be set on the plunger pin [C].
2) The inverter solenoid connector harness [D] should be facing
the outside of the unit as shown.
3) Manually push the plunger and check that it works smoothly.
4) When the inverter solenoid does not activate (OFF), the
inverter guide [E] must be inside the outer inverter guide [F],
and when the inverter solenoid activates (ON), the inverter
guide must be outside the outer inverter guide, as shown.

A172/A199 7-36 SM
15.9 FEED-OUT SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[A]

[B]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out
Unit Removal.)
2. Remove the right cover [A] (1 screw).
3. Replace the feed-out sensor [B] (1 screw and 1 connector).

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-37 A172/A199
15.10 INVERTER ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A]
[C]

[E] [D]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to
Feed-out Unit Removal.)
2. Remove the feed-out motor [A]. (Refer to Feed-out Motor Removal.)
3. Remove the exit guide [B] (3 screws).
4. Remove the inverter roller [C] with the inverter guide [D] (2 E-rings, 1
pulley, 1 pin [E], and 2 bushings).
5. Replace the inverter roller.

A172/A199 7-38 SM
15.11 DF POSITION/APS START SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

1. Turn off the main switch and lift up the DF.


2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the harness clamp [B] and replace the DF position sensor [C] or
the APS start sensor [D] (1 connector each).

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-39 A172/A199
15.12 BELT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[A] [G] [I]

[D]

[H]

[B]

[E]
[C]

[F]
[E]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper
Cover Removal.)
2. Disconnect the 2 connectors [A] of the belt drive motor [B].
3. Disconnect the connector [C] of the indicator panel [D] as shown.
4. Remove the tension spring [E] and loosen the tension bracket [F] as
shown.
5. Remove the belt drive motor bracket [G] (3 screws), making sure not to
damage the 2 timing belts [H].
6. Remove the drive pulley [I] (1 Allen screw) then replace the belt drive
motor (4 screws).

A172/A199 7-40 SM
15.13 FEED-IN UNIT REMOVAL

[A]

[B]

[G]
[F]
[D]
[C]

[E]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the screw [A], then remove the feed cover [B].
3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [C] of the feed-in motor [D].
Dual Job Feeder

4. Disconnect the connector [E] of the friction belt motor [F].


DF62 (A610)

5. Disconnect CN104, 105, 108, 109, 110, and 111 on the DJF main board.
6. Disconnect the connector of the indicator panel as well.
7. Remove the feed-in unit [G] (5 screws).

SM 7-41 A172/A199
15.14 FEED-IN MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[B]

[C]

[A]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the feed-in motor bracket [A] (3 screws), making sure not to
damage the timing belt.
3. Remove the drive pulley [B] (1 Allen screw), then replace the feed-in
motor [C] (4 screws).

A172/A199 7-42 SM
15.15 FRICTION BELT MOTOR REPLACEMENT

[A]

[B]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the friction belt motor bracket [A] (2 screws), making sure not to
damage the timing belt.
3. Replace the friction belt motor [B] (4 screws).

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-43 A172/A199
15.16 FEED-IN CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

[B]

[A]

[C]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the friction belt motor. (Refer to Friction Belt Motor
Replacement.)
3. Replace the feed-in clutch [A] (2 Allen screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling, make sure of the following.
1) The clutch stopper groove must engage the clutch stopper.
2) The end of the clutch stopper [C] must be flush with the head of
the shaft.

A172/A199 7-44 SM
15.17 STOPPER SOLENOID REPLACEMENT

[B] [A]

[C]

[D]
[E]

[D]

[E]

1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper
Cover Removal.)
2. Disconnect the connector [A] of the stopper solenoid.
3. Open the feed-in cover and the original stopper.
4. Remove the bracket [B] with the stopper solenoid (2 screws and 1
E-ring.)
5. Remove the stopper solenoid [C] (2 screws).
NOTE: When installing the stopper solenoid, pay attention to the following
points:
1) The spring [D] must be correctly hooked onto the stopper [E], as
Dual Job Feeder

shown.
DF62 (A610)

2) Manually pull the stopper solenoid plunger to confirm that the


press rollers firmly contact the pick-up rollers. When the pick-up
rollers are manually rotated, the press rollers also rotate. If not,
adjust the stopper solenoid position.

SM 7-45 A172/A199
15.18 VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
15.18.1 One-sided Thin Original Mode
Perform this adjustment for machines having problems using the Thick
Original Mode as well.
The original stopping position in thick original mode depends on the setting
of this adjustment. (For details, refer to Detailed Descriptions.)
NOTE: 1) After replacing the DJF main board, always perform the
adjustment using VR101 on the DJF main board.
2) At other times, adjust with either the base copier SP mode or
VR101. Both procedures will move the original stopping position.
3) After finishing the adjustment, be sure to turn off the dip switches.

[C]

[A] [E]
[B]
[D] 0 ~ 2 mm

– Using VR101 –
1. Remove the small cover at the rear of the DJF upper cover (1 screw).
2. Turn on dip switch 101-2 and -4 [A].
3. Turn on dip switch 102-4 [B].
4. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [C] (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on
the original table.
5. Press switch 101 [D]. (Paper will be fed to the exposure glass.)
6. Raise the DJF carefully so that the original does not move.
7. Check that the gap between the trailing edge of paper and the left
original scale [E] is 0 ± 2.0 mm.
8. If the gap is not within this specification, adjust registration with VR101.
(Looking from the front, turning VR101 counter-clockwise will decrease
the gap.)
9. Return the user settings to their defaullts, if you have changed any.

A172/A199 7-46 SM
– Using The Copier SP Mode –
NOTE: 1) When performing this adjustment, always make test copies with
the "Copy In SP" mode. If you do not, the adjustment will not be
performed properly.
2) Make sure that the DJF dip switches are returned to the standard
setting of the base copier, if you have performed the adjustments
using the DJF main board.
3) Make sure that the "Thin Mode" is selected with the customer
settings of the base copier.

1. Turn the copier main switch off and on to initialize the machine.
2. Enter the copier SP mode, and open the DJF Registration Adjustment
page.
3. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on the
original table, and press the Copy In SP key.
To save toner, select BLACK and A4, then press the Start key.
4. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DJF carefully so
that the original does not move.
5. Check that the gap between the trailing edge of paper and the left
original scale is 0 ± 2.0 mm.
6. If the gap is not within this specification, adjust registration by pressing
the  and  keys of the thin mode inside the SP mode. The original
paper stopping position will change accordingly. (If you press  , the
gap will decrease.)
7. Return the user settings to their defaults, if you have changed any.

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-47 A172/A199
15.18.2 Two-sided Original Mode
[F]

[A]

0 ~ 5 mm

[D]

[B]
[C]
[E]

NOTE: 1) After replacing the DJF main board, always perform the
adjustment using VR102 on the DJF main board.
2) At other times, adjust with either the base copier SP mode or
VR102. Both procedures will move the original stopping position.
3) After finishing the adjustment, be sure to turn off the dip switches.

– Using VR102 –
1. Remove the copier’s left original scale [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the small cover at the rear of the DJF upper cover (1 screw).
3. Turn on dip switch 101-2 and -4 [B].
4. Turn on dip switch 102-1 and -4 [C].
5. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [D] (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on
the original table.
6. Press switch 101 [E]. (Paper will be fed to the exposure glass.)
7. Raise the DJF carefully so that the original does not move.
8. Check that the distance between the trailing edge of the paper and the
left edge of the rear original scale [F] is between 0 ~ 5 mm.
9. If the distance is not within this specification, adjust the registration with
VR102. (Looking from the front, turning VR102 counter-clockwise will
feed the paper more towards the left.)

A172/A199 7-48 SM
– Using the Copier SP Mode –
NOTE: 1) When performing this adjustment, always make test copies using
the "Copy In SP" mode. If you do not, the adjustment will not be
performed properly.
2) Make sure that the DJF dip switches are returned to the standard
setting of the base copier, if you have performed the adjustments
using the DJF main board.

1. Remove the copier’s left original scale (2 screws).


2. Turn off and on the copier main switch to initialize the machine.
3. Enter the copier SP mode, and open the DJF Registration Adjustment
page.
4. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on the
original table, and press the Copy In SP key.

Select the two-sided original mode to invert the original paper. Also to
save toner, select BLACK and A4 size paper. Then press the Start key.
5. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DJF carefully so
that the original does not move.
6. Check that the distance between the trailing edge of the paper and the
left edge of the rear original scale is between 15 ~ 20 mm.
7. If the distance is not within this specification, adjust the registration by
pressing the  and  keys of the two-sided mode inside the SP
mode. The original paper stopping position will change accordingly. (If
you press , the original will be fed more towards the left.)

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-49 A172/A199
15.19 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
[C]
[A] [E]
[D]

5 ± 2 mm

[F]

1. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [A] (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on
the original table and press the Start key.
2. Check the side-to-side registration comparing the original paper and the
copied paper.
3. If the side-to-side registration is not within 0 ± 2 mm, enter the SP mode
and perform the following steps:
1) Open the DJF Side To Side Registration Adjustment page.
2) Change the setting with the  and  keys to meet the above
specification. (The original stopping position will not change.)
Note that the direction of the image shift will differ for each base copier.
4. If it is still out of specification, leave SP mode and perform the following
original table positioning adjustment:
1) Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [A] (64 g/m2, 17 lb) on
the original table and press the Start key.
2) After the original stops on the exposure glass, gently raise the DJF so
that the original does not move.
3) Check if the gap between the rear edge of the paper and the original
rear scale is 5 ± 2 mm.
4) It the gap is not within specification, remove the stopper screw [C],
loosen the 8 screws securing the original table [D] and the original
guide [E] and shift the original table and the original guide position
accordingly.
NOTE: Before putting an original on the original table again, open and close
the feed unit cover [F].

A172/A199 7-50 SM
15.20 PREVENTING THE REAR SIDE OF ORIGINALS FROM
BECOMING DIRTY

[A]

NOTE: Perform the following adjustment only when needed (if the friction
belt needs to be changed but there is no spare friction belt
available). However, after this adjustment, thick originals are likely to
be misfed, so it is best to avoid this adjustment if the customer says
that thick originals will be used.
1. Remove the friction belt assembly. (Refer to Friction Belt Replacement.)
2. Remove the adjusting plate [A] and re-install it as shown (the belt folds
about 1 degree) or remove the adjusting plate (the belt folds about 2
degrees).

Dual Job Feeder


DF62 (A610)

SM 7-51 A172/A199
SORTER
A322
1. SPECIFICATION
Paper Size for Bins: Maximum: A3 (lengthwise) or
11" x 17" (lengthwise)
Minimum: A5 (sideways) or

Sorter
A322
51/2" x 81/2" (sideways and lengthwise)
Copy Paper Weight: 50 - 90 g/m2 or 14 - 24 lb
Number of Bins: 15 bins + interruption bin (total 16 bins)
Bin Capacity: Sort mode: 50 sheets/bin (A4 or 81/2" x 11")
Stack mode: 40 sheets/bin (A4 or 81/2" x 11")
Top Bin Capacity: 150 sheets (A4 or 81/2" x 11")
Print Bin Capacity: 40 sheets/bin (80 g/m2 or 20 lb
Interrupt Bin Capacity: 100 sheets (A4 or 81/2" x 11")
Power Source: DC 24V from the copier
Power Consumption: 0.03 kW
Dimensions (W x D x H): 499 x 535 x 600 mm
19.6" x 21.1" x 23.6"
Weight: 22 kg, 48.5 lb
Interface Requirement: A sorter adapter is needed.

SM 8-1 A172/A199
2. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM THE BASE
COPIER’S SORTER (A511)

• The number of bins has been changed. (Requests from the field.)
Sorter for This Machine Sorter for Base Copier
15 bins 10 bins
+ interruption bin + interruption bin
+ print bin

• The exterior color has been changed. (New corporate identity color)

Refer to the A109 Service Manual, A511 (CS210) section for details.

A172/A199 8-2 SM
FILM PROJECTOR UNIT
A718
Rev. 1/16/97
1. SPECIFICATION
Acceptable Film Types: • Type: Positive film/Negative film

Film Projector
• Size: 35 mm - Approx. 140 x 210 mm
Others: 45 x 60 mm, 60 x 60 mm,

A718
Unit
60 x 70 mm, 60 x 80 mm,
60 x 90 mm, 4" x 5"
Max: 142 x 210 mm or 5.6" x 8.2"
• Mount: Yes (Up to 5 frames can be set in
the film holder.)
• Strip: Yes (A series of 6 frames can be
set in the film holder.)

Focusing: Fixed/Manual
Effective Film Area: • 35 mm: Approx. 21.5 x 33.0 mm
• Other Sizes: Full Size

Projection Ratio • 35 mm: Approx. x 6


• Other Sizes: x1

Copy Image Size • 35 mm mount: 120.8 x 192.7 mm


• 35 mm strip: 129.3 x 198.6 mm
• Other Sizes: Full Size

All the reproduction features of the copier are available.


Power Source: 115 V 60 Hz, more than 1.0 A
220 ~ 240 V 50/60 Hz, more than 0.6 A
Power Consumption: Maximum: less than 185 VA
Dimensions (W x D x H): Projector: 300 x 442 x 212 mm
11.8" x 17.4" x 8.35"

Mirror Unit: 298 x 232 x 50 mm


11.73" x 9.13" x 1.97"
Weight: Less than 15kg or 31.9 lb
Remarks: The holder is required for installation.

SM 9-1 A172/A199
2. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM THE BASE
COPIER’S FILM PROJECTOR (A998)

Enhancements for this FPU Purpose


The projector lamp light intensity has been To improve the reproduction.
increased.
The material of the transparent parts of the To improve the holders concerning attracting
film strip/slide holders have been changed. dust particles, and reduce the appearance of
Newton ring patterns on copies.
The material of the guard unit has been To reduce the attraction of dust particles to
changed. the guard unit.
The height of the guard unit when placed on To flatten a curled original (positive film) on
the exposure glass has been changed. the exposure glass more effectively.
The height adjustment procedure has been For easier servicing of the machine.
changed.

• The exterior color has been changed. (New corporate identity color)

Refer to the A109 Service Manual A988 (SPU2) section for details

A172/A199 9-2 SM
CONTROLLER INTERFACE
A583
Rev. 1/15/97
1. SPECIFICATION
Refer to the Fiery Controller Service Manual for the Type A Controller.

2. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM THE BASE


COPIER’S CONTROLLER TYPE A (A583)

Controller
Interface
A583
• Harness for PTL
• ROMs
• The name "Contoller Interface Type C" is not referred to as a kit as
was the "Controller Interface Kit Type A".

Refer to the A109 Service Manual, "Controller Interface Kit Type-A" for
details.

3. PARTS CATALOG
• Refer to the following pages.

SM 10-1 A172/A199
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO 5106/5206 - 001 10/18/96


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO 5106/5206

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) PROCEDURE


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
This bulletin is being published to provide a greater understanding of the Auto Color Calibration (ACC)

MECHANICAL
procedure. The following points must be understood prior to performing an ACC procedure:

1. Adjustment of ACC changes gamma settings.

2. ACC is intended to provide a "rough" adjustment or a "starting point" for the color calibration process.

3. ACC is designed to allow a customer to set gamma settings to "reasonably acceptable" standards,
however, manual adjustment of gamma settings by a Service Representative will provide optimal

ELECTRICAL
copy quality.

4. In some cases, when copy quality is determined to be acceptable by the customer, ACC is not
required and should not be performed. If ACC is performed after manual adjustment of gamma
settings, the Service Representative settings will be lost if the previous settings are not selected
through ACC. Therefore, always save the Service Representative gamma settings in Permanent
memory as a back-up. For more information on Permanent and Temporary Memory, refer to the
Service Manual, page 4-33 (under NOTE).

PAPER PATH
5. The gamma settings stored in Permanent Memory for Printer Mode can not be changed. However,
the gamma settings stored in Permanent Memory for Glass-top Copy Mode can be changed.

6. ACC may not be required after a PM call.

7. The use of dry copy paper (<25% humidity) may result in "blasting" around text. If "blasting" around
text occurs, install fresh paper of greater than 25% humidity.

FSM
AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) PROCEDURE:
NOTE: Because the reflectivity of the copy paper can affect the ACC results, it is recommended that you
use Hammermill, Color Copy Paper (long grain, PhotoWhite).
PARTS

As mentioned in the Service Manual (Note: (a), page 3-6), be sure to plug the power cord in with
the Main Switch in the "OFF" position at machine installation. This will energize the Transfer Roll er
Heater and allow the internal temperature of the machine to stabilize. It may be necessary to have
the Transfer Roller Heater energized for 2 to 3 hours (depending on how cold an environment the
machine has been in).
OTHER

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO 5106/5206 - 001
Page 2 of 4

Glass-top Copy Mode Calibration


1. Place the C4 test chart on the glass, select 11 X 17 inch paper, select Photo Mode, and change Auto
Image Density to Manual Image Density. Enter User Tool No. 2 and set values to factory default and
press "Copy".

2. Check the copy quality.

3. If acceptable, do not proceed with ACC procedure.

4. If unacceptable, set copy sample aside and perform the ACC procedure as follows.

5. Select User Tool No. 2 - Sensitivity Adjustment (Auto Color Calibration ACC: Copy Mode).

6. Print out Test Pattern from copier.

7. Place Test Pattern on the glass and press "Scan Start".

8. Copier gamma settings will be automatically adjusted.

9. Place the C4 Test Chart (A0929503A) on the glass and press "Copy".

10. Compare the output to the original and also to the first copy sample (produced in step 1.).

11. Manually adjust the gamma settings to fine tune the copier if needed. Save settings in Permanent
Memory (Service Manual, page 5-3).

NOTE: The values stored in Permanent Memory will not be affected by subsequent ACC procedures.

Fiery XJ System Printer Gamma Adjustment Procedure


1. Attach the Fiery to the copier.

2. Run Fiery setup and select R2 under the Printer Setup / Printer Model selection.

3. Write down the factory default gamma settings. These values are not on the factory data sheet
provided with the copier.

NOTE: If the Fiery has been previously installed, remove the calibration from the Fiery. Removing any
previously stored calibration prepares the system to accept a new calibration. If installing for th e
first time, no calibration will be in the Fiery.

4. Print out the Fiery XJ Test Page by pressing the Menu Button on the XJ, then press the Print Pages
Button, then press the Test Page Button.

5. If acceptable, do not proceed with ACC procedure.

6. If unacceptable, set the printer sample aside and perform the ACC procedure as follows.

7. Select User Tool No. 2 - Sensitivity Adjustment (Auto Color Calibration ACC: Printer Mode).

8. Print out Test Pattern from the copier.


Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO 5106/5206 - 001
Page 3 of 4

9. Place Test Pattern on glass and press "Scan Start" (be sure to align the arrows on the glass
correctly).

10. Printer gamma settings will be automatically adjusted.

11. Print out the Fiery XJ Test Page and compare the outputs.

12. If you have the X-RITE DTP 32 densitometer, continue with step 14. If not, refer to the Service
Manual, page 5-32, to adjust the gamma settings manually. Refer to page 6-1 of the Fiery User
Manual for calibration procedure.

13. Print the Fiery Test Page and compare.

14. Start the Macintosh or PC and launch the Fiery Print Calibrator, version 3.0.

15. Select Fiery XJ R2 from the list of servers and click "Connect".

16. Click "Target". A list of device targets will appear. From this list, select R2 and click "OK".

17. From the "Server" menu at the top of the screen, select "Print Patch Page". The copier will now print
a series of CMYK patches.

18. From the "Measurements" menu, select "Densitometer".

19. At this time, "None" will be selected. Click on "None" and select "Modem" or "Parallel Port",
(depending on which port the densitometer is connected to).

20. Click "Start" and follow the directions in the "Status" box on the computer screen and the LCD
read-out on the densitometer.

21. After reading all CMYK strips, the status box reads "Measurements Read Successfully".

22. Click : "Accept".

23. Click "Test". Make sure "Calibrator Test Page" is selected, then click on "Print".

24. The system will now generate a comparison page with calibrated & non-calibrated images, side by
side.

25. From the "Server" menu select "Remove Calibration". The removes any previously stored calibration
and prepares the system to accept new calibration.

26. Click "Apply Calibration" if the comparison page calibrated image is acceptable. Otherwise, manually
adjust printer gamma settings or refer to Standard Fiery Print Calibration Targets below.

27. You may check calibration status by selecting "Calibration Status" from the Server menu. Refer to
the Fiery XJ user guide for more information regarding editing calibration curves.

28. When you are done, select "Quit" from the File menu.

Standard Fiery Print Calibration Targets:


A list of preliminary target numbers are listed on page 4. This list will be updated and re-issued as better
results are obtained.

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO 5106/5206 - 001
Page 4 of 4

Standard Fiery Print Calibration Targets


Modify the linear target that is supplied with version 3.0 software to the following numbers:

FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT:


The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin
package contains 2 sets of replacement pages.

PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

• 5-3 Updated Information


• 5-5 Updated Information
• 5-6 Updated Information
• 5-33 Updated Information
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: 5106/5206 - 002 01/16/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG CORRECTIONS


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following Parts Catalog Corrections are being issued for all AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 Parts Catalogs.

MECHANICAL
This information should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

3. Operation Panel (A172/A199) 17

ELECTRICAL
FSMPAPER PATH
PARTS

16

Add the illustration of the Operation Panel Harness - IPU 1 (item #17) to page 16 of the Parts Catalog.
OTHER

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. 5106/5206 - 002
Page 2 of 2

30. Transfer Roller Unit (A172/A199)

29

70

Add the index number of the Stepped Screws (Item #29) on page 70 of the Parts Catalog as shown above.

Correct/add the following part numbers:


REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1725339 A1725639 Operation Panel Harness - DC 1→1 25 10
A1726200 A1726201 Transfer Roller 1→1 71 7

A1725392 A1725692 Operation Panel Harness - IPU 1 (A172) 1→1 17 17


AA143741 Stepped Screw 0→2 71 29*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

&900)8-2#291&)6U####IENJfIFNJ#g#NNG NEfEJfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# %*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ

‰ COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT


GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.

‰ MECHANICAL
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

• 1-6 Updated Information


• 4-31 Updated Information

ELECTRICAL
• 4-59 Updated Information
• 4-70 Updated Information
• 5-12 Updated Information
• 5-22 Updated Information


• 9-1 Updated Information

PAPER PATH


‰ SM
PARTS
OTHER
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

&900)8-2#291&)6U####%*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ#g#NNH NHfEHfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# %*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ

‰ COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT


GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.

‰ MECHANICAL
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

• 3-49a Updated Information


• 4-15 Updated Information

‰ ELECTRICAL
PAPER PATH


‰ SM
PARTS
OTHER
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

&900)8-2#291&)6U####%*-'-3#IENJfIFNJ#g#NNI NIfNJfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# %*-'-3#IENJfIFNJ

„ COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: FIREFLIES
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:

‰ MECHANICAL
In solid areas, small circular void areas occur, sometimes accompanied by a small dot of toner and/or carrier
in the center.

CAUSE:
There are two causes, fireflies caused by weak carrier particles and fireflies caused by soft toner blocks
(see illustrations below).


‰ ELECTRICAL
May or may not have
a particle of carrier in

PAPER PATH
the center.

Carrier type Firefly Toner type Firefly

SOLUTION:
1. FIREFLIES CAUSED BY CARRIER - Some carrier particles may have weak charge characteristics,


making them more likely to be transferred to the drum.

SM
NOTE: Weak carrier particles can exist in new or used developer

The following procedure adjusts the Development Bias and Charge Grid to remove weak carrier particles
from the development unit:

1. Enter SP Mode, select <2> SP Test page 1 and enter 255 for the Test Pattern Level.
PARTS

2. Press The Next Key to turn to page 2 and select the Full Dot Test Pattern.

3. Enter "Copy in SP Mode".

4. Produce a Full Dot Test Pattern for each toner color (CMYK) on 11 X 17 inch paper to determine which
color(s) has the firefly problem.
‰ OTHER

5. Go back into SP mode.

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO 5106/5206 - 005
Page 2 of 5

6. Select <1> SP Adjustment, press next and turn to page 15.

7. Select Print for SP Adjustment Print Out.

NOTE: This will print an SP Adjustments sheet.

8. Refer to item 1. Potential Output on the SP Adjustments sheet (see example).

1. P o t e n t i a l O u t p u t
Example: Black is
VD VL VB r VK exhibiting carrier type
fireflies. Circle the
Bk target for VB.

t : 527 156 414 3. 65 +13

a: 526 159 414 3. 80 -7 .

Example: Sp Adjustments Print Out

9. Under the VB column, circle the Target value for the effected color(s).

NOTE: t : = target

10. Press the Previous Key until you are on SP Adjustment page 4. (P-con OFF Mode).

11. Add 200 volts to the VB data that was circled.

12. Enter this new value (VB on SP Adjustments sheet + -200) in the VB setting for the effected color(s).

NOTE: If VB is -400 on the Adjustment sheet adding the -200 in the step above will equal -600
13. Then add 155 volts to the VB data that was circled.

14. Enter this new value (VB on SP Adjustments sheet + 155) in the VG setting for the colors exhibiting
fireflies.

15. Go to SP Special Features page 1, Auto Process Control Self Check and select Reset.

16. Enter "Copy in SP Mode".

17. Make (10) 11 x 17 inch copies of the effected color(s) of the 255 Full Dot Test Pattern.

NOTE: 1: If the Print Key turns red during this step, do not turn the machine "OFF" ; it may be adding toner.
2: This step removes weak carrier from the Development Unit.

18. Go to Sp Adjustments page 1 and set Auto Process Control Self Check to PID.

19. Go to SP Test Mode page 2 to reset the test pattern condition. This turns "OFF" the Test Pattern.

20. Enter SP Data Output page 1 and view the VT data

21. Select the "Copy in SP Mode" and make (10) 11 x 17 copies of the C-4 Test Chart in Full Color Mode.

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO 5106/5206 - 005
Page 3 of 5

22. During the copy cycle go back into SP mode and check that the VT data is the same as Vref ± .2 volts for
colors exhibiting fireflies.

23. Continue to run copies until Vref is within ± .2 volts, then stop the copy process.

24. Enter SP Adjustment page 4. (P-con OFF Mode).

25. Subtract 100 volts from VB and VG (new value from step 12 & 14) for the colors exhibiting fireflies.

NOTE: If VB is -400, subtracting -100 will equal -300

26. Go to SP Special Features page 1, Auto Process Control Self Check and select Reset.

27. Enter SP Mode, select <2> SP Test page 1 and enter 255 for the Test Pattern Level.

28. Press The Next Key to turn to page 2 and select the Full Dot Test Pattern.

29. Enter "Copy in SP Mode".

30. Produce a Full Dot Test Pattern for each toner color (CMYK) on 11 X 17 inch paper of the color(s)
exhibiting fireflies.

31. Verify if fireflies have been reduced to an acceptable level.

32. If fireflies have been reduced to an acceptable level , Set VB to 495 and set VG to 650 then proceed
to step 33.

NOTE: If no good, go to step 37.

33. Go to Sp Adjustments page 1 and set Auto Process Control Self Check to PID.

34. Produce a Full Dot Test Pattern for each toner color (CMYK) on 11 X 17 paper of the color(s) exhibiting
Fireflies.

NOTE: If no t acceptable, go to step 37. If acceptable, proceed to step 35.

35. Go to SP Test Mode page 2 to reset the test pattern condition

36. END.

37. If not acceptable, Enter SP Adjustments, page 5 and add 200 volts to the current setting for Transfer
Belt Bias face side.

38. Go to Sp Adjustments page 1 and set Auto Process Control Self Check to PID.

39. Make a copy, if still unacceptable add 200 volts to the current setting for Transfer Belt Bias face side.

NOTE: Do not add more than 400 volts.

40. If still unacceptable, go to step 15 and repeat the process.

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO 5106/5206 - 005
Page 4 of 5

2. FIREFLIES CAUSED BY SOFT TONER BLOCKS - If the temperature inside the Development Unit
becomes too high, toner melts into small blocks which are then transferred to the paper. Soft toner
blocks can also occur during storage of the Developer.

Soft Toner Block Dispersion Procedure:

NOTE: This procedure is also effective for improving copy quality in a low humidity environment.

1. Confirm that the following SP modes are set to factory data:

• SP Special Features, page 1-Transfer Bias Humidity set to Normal


• SP Adjustments, page 5 - Transfer Belt Bias 1C:1410, 2C:1490, 3C:1575, 4C:1660
• SP Adjustments, page 7 - Transfer Roller Bias 1C:1200, 2C:1500, 3C:1800, 4C:1500

NOTE: These values may vary on each unit. See the factory data sheet.

2. Increase the Transfer Belt Bias (SP Adjustments, page 5) by 300 for 1C, 2C, 3C, and 4C.

Example: 1C: 1410 ➝ 1710 2C: 1490 ➝ 1790

3C: 1575 ➝ 1875 4C: 1660 ➝ 1960

3. Increase the Transfer Roller Bias (SP Adjustments, page 7) by 300 for 4C. Make a full color copy from
a C-4 test chart. Example: 4C: 1230 ➝ 1530.

4. Make a full color copy from the C-4 test chart. If you see poor transfer in the color patches on the C-4 test
chart, increase the Transfer Roller Bias (SP Adjustments, page 7) by 100 for 4C. Otherwise, go to step 6.

5. Make a full color copy from C-4 test chart. If you see the poor transfer in the color patches on the C-4 test
chart, increase the Transfer Roller Bias (SP Adjustments, page 7) by 100 for 4C again. At this point, you
have added a total of 500 on 4C. Go to step 6.

NOTE: We do not recommend increasing more than 500V. This may cause white void lines in half tone
images in the horizontal direction.

6. Increase the Transfer Roller Bias (SP Adjustments, page 7) by 300 for 1C.

7. Make a Black copy of the C-4 test chart. If you see poor transfer on the C-4 test chart, increase the
Transfer Roller Bias (SP Adjustments, page 7)) by 100 for 1C. Otherwise, go to step 9.

8. Make a Black copy of the C-4 test chart. If you see poor transfer on the C-4 test chart, increase the
Transfer Roller Bias (SP Adjustments, page 7) by 100 for 1C again. At this point, you have added a total of
500 on 1C. Go to step 9.

NOTE: We do not recommend increasing more than 500V. This may cause white void lines in half tone
images in the horizontal direction.

9. Referring to the face on the C-4 test chart, if, in Auto Mode, you see a strong edge between the hair and
forehead, go to step 10. If not, END.

10. Increase the gamma data of Black in Photo (SP Special Features, page 3). Adjust the gamma data by
checking the copy quality. You may need to increase L, M, H, and ID Max. Especially, you may need to
change the data in L.

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO 5106/5206 - 005
Page 5 of 5

11. Decrease the setting by one or two notches from the center of the UCR adjustment in the User Tools.

NOTE: UCR adjustment in User Tools is retained even if the main switch is turned "OFF".

12. Check the copy quality in normal mode and, if applicable, confirm proper operation of OHP and/or
Thick Paper mode(s).

13. END.

The following Service Tips assist in preventing Soft Toner Blocks

• Before adding new developer, thoroughly vacuum and clean the entire Development Unit with a soft dry
cloth, to remove any hardened or compressed toner.

NOTE: When vacuuming, ground the development unit case or remove the TD sensor (this prevents
damage to the TD sensor).

• Before adding new developer, be sure to shake the developer bag at least 20 times, to break up any soft
toner blocks that may have occurred during the storage of the Developer.

• Replace all filters at the appropriate PM interval.

• Ensure the proper operation of all fans. If a sorter is connected be sure to check that the sorter exhaust
fan is operating.

• If the Toner Hopper is not completely pushed to the appropriate position or the Tank Unit Stopper is
broken, the Toner Exit Tube of the Toner Hopper may not be properly engaged with the Development Unit. In
this case, toner is not supplied properly to the Development Unit. When the Toner Hopper transport coil
rotates, it compresses toner around the tube resulting in the formation of soft toner blocks. Therefore,
ensure that the Toner Hopper is set correctly.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 006 06/13/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

qCOPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT


GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.

q MECHANICAL
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

• 3-14

q
Additional Information (Transfer Belt Unit)

ELECTRICAL
• 3-49 Updated Information

q
n
q
q SMPAPER PATH
PARTS
OTHER
Note: In order to release the tension of the transfer belt during transportation, the Transfer Belt
Release Wedges are installed on the front and rear belt tension roller bearing holders. Please do
not forget to remove the wedges at installation of the machine.

To remove the wedge, push the wedge toward the bearing holder and slide it inside slightly.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 007 06/13/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

q COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES


GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

The following Parts Updates are being issued for all Aficio Color 5106/5206 Parts Catalogs. This information
should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

n MECHANICAL
• Update No. 1 -
HOT ROLLER STRIPPER - To prevent the
spring from coming unhooked, the hook
part of the Hot Roller Stripper has been
extended.

n ELECTRICAL
Old New

q
REFERENCE

PAPER PATH
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AE044016 AE044023 Hot Roller Stripper 6 1 79 9

UNITS AFFECTED:

q
All Aficio Color 5106/5206 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7137020001 & A7127010001 will
have the new Hot Roller Stripper installed during production.

SM
• Update No. 2 - TONER END SENSOR - The Toner End Sensor has been modified to improve
reliability.
n
REFERENCE
PARTS

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AW230009 AW230012 Toner End Sensor 4 1 55 25

UNITS AFFECTED:
q

All Aficio Color 5106/5206 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7136100001 & A7126100001 will
OTHER

have new the Toner End Sensor installed during production.


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

&900)8-2#291&)6U####%*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ#g#NNL NJfEGfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# %*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ#f#*-)6=#<.#EKN#7)6-)7

„ COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: UPDATED COLOR FILE TARGETS r2.1


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:

‰ MECHANICAL
Ricoh Corporation and EFI have developed an update to the XJ print server Target for the Aficio 5106 / 5206
color copiers. The updated color file targets, (refered to as r2.1), improve the print output color quality of the
copier when calibrating with either the EFI Print Calibrator (utilizing the Xrite DTP-32 Densitometer) or
Calibrating from the copier glass.

NOTE:


The updated color file targets are supplied on CD ROM with new release XJ+ version Print servers. The CD

ELECTRICAL
contains files for both Macintosh and PC environments:

‰ PAPER PATH
ORDERING PROCEDURE:

1. To access and download the update file from the Ricoh Web site type the following:

WWW.RICOH.COM


Select the Fiery Software area

SM
Down load the r2_1.Sit.HQX for Mac
Down load the 21readme.txt & r21crd.zip
r21goal.zip & r21off97.zip & r21w_41.zip for PC

NOTE: These files use PKZIP for PCs and STUFFIT Expander for Macintosh for decompression of the
files. Please read fully and follow in detail the README.TXT file. „ PARTS

2. To obtain the r2.1 Update CD ROM (A7245321) at no charge, please complete and fax the attached
form to (201) 882-3960 (attn. Image Processing Department). The order quantity will be checked
against actual XJ Sales Ship quantity. Please order only what you need.

NOTE: The CD ROM is available at no charge, however your dealership is responsible for shipping costs.
‰ OTHER

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO Color 5106/5206 - 008
Page 2 of 2

SUBJECT: UPDATED COLOR FILE TARGETS(r2.1)

Fax this entire page in "DETAIL" mode ATTN: Technical Services - Image Processing Department

Fax Number: 201-882-3960

Each serial number given will represent a request for one (1) r2.1 CD ROM Update (A7245321)

XJ Serial Number (s)


1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 10
All serial number information will be verified before shipment is made.

PLEASE TYPE OR PRINT CLEARLY.

DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
CITY: STATE: ZIP CODE:
ATTENTION: PHONE # :
DEALER ACCOUNT NUMBER:

NOTE: A shipping charge will be billed to your dealership.


TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 009 REISSUE H 06/19/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

q COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

• Update No. 1 -

n MECHANICAL
To standardize parts with other markets the following parts are being updated for all Aficio Color 5106/5206
Parts Catalogs.

qq ELECTRICAL
107

PAPER PATH
9
32

q
33

SM
34
107

n PARTS

H NOTE: The Hot Roller and Pressure Roller can be replaced individually.
q OTHER

Continued...
Technical Service Bulletin No. Aficio Color 5106/5206 - 009 REISSUE H
Page 2 of 2

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AB013818 Gear 61z 1-0 3/S 85 25
AB014067 Gear 62z 0-1 3/S 85 25
AB014063 Hot Roller Gear 60z 0-1 3/S 85 32 *
AB014064 Pressure Roller Gear - 60z 0-1 3/S 85 33
H AE010012 AE010018 Hot Roller 1-1 1 85 8

H AE020056 AE020076 Pressure Roller 1-1 1 85 9


03140060B Philips Pan Head Screw M4 x 6 n-n+2 3/S 85 100
09514005W Philips Screw with Flat 0-2 3/S 85 107
Washer M4 x5

*DENOTE: Must be replaced as a set when (AB014067) Gear 62z is replaced


UNITS AFFECTED:
All Aficio Color 5106/5206 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7137020001 & A7127020001 will
have the Gear 62z, Hot Roller Gear 60z, Pressure Roller Gear 60z, Hot Roller, Pressure Roller, Philips Pan
Head Screw M4x6, Philips Screw with Flat Washer M4x5 installed during production.

• Update No.2 -
To standardize parts with other markets the following parts are being updated for all Aficio Color 5106/5206
Parts Catalogs. To implement the Pressure Roller Drive Gear, the Front and Rear Side Plates, Fusing Right
Stay, and Fusing Right Lower Stay have been modified. The Thermofuse Stay-Lower is a newly added part.
The new and old parts are not individually interchangeable. replace only as a set.
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1094100 A1724100 Front Side Plate - Fusing 1-1 3/S 85 13
A1094130 A1724130 Rear Side Plate - Fusing 1-1 3/S 85 23
A1724171 A1724174 Right Stay - Fusing 1-1 3/S 85 26
A1094180 A1724181 Right Lower Stay - Fusing 1-1 3/S 85 10
A1724194 Stay Thermofuse Lower 1-1 3/S 85 34
03140060B Philips Pan Head Screw M4 x 6 n-n+2 3/S 85 100

UNITS AFFECTED:
All Aficio Color 5106/5206 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7136110001 & A71216110001 will
have the Fusing Front Side Plate, Rear Side Plate, Right Stay, Right Lower Stay, Thermofuse Lower Stay,
Philips Pan Head Screw M4x6 installed during production.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

&900)8-2#291&)6U####%*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ#g#NEN NKfFMfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# %*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ

„ COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following Parts Updates are being issued for all Aficio Color 5106/5206 Parts Catalogs. This information

‰ MECHANICAL
should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

• UPDATE NO. 1 - PARTS CATALOG ADDITIONS - Add the following parts to your Parts Catalog:


REFERENCE

ELECTRICAL
NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1721508 Spacer 1 17 38
A1727349 Pressure Plate 2 17 39
A1094642 Clutch Bracket - Lubricant Brush 1 87 30

‰ PAPER PATH
3. Operation Panel ( A172/A199 )

Pressure Plate
Spacer



‰ SM
PARTS
OTHER

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. Aficio Color 5106/5206 - 010
Page 2 of 3

4. Optics Section 1 (A172/A199 )

Shield - Base
Operation Sub Unit

38. Drive Section 1( A172/A199 )

Clutch Bracket
Lubricant Brush

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. Aficio Color 5106/5206 - 010
Page 3 of 3

• UPDATE NO. 2 - SEPARATION ROLLER STAY - Due to part standardization, the following parts
have been changed. Also, since the location of the position sensor bracket on
which the Separation Roller Stay is installed has been moved 5mm toward the
rear, the 3 parts listed below must be replaced at the same time. The old parts
are not available.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A0966303 A1766303 Separation Roller Stay 3-3 3 43 20
A0966338 A1766338 Separation Guide 3-3 3 43 3
A0966337 A1766337 Paper Feed Guide 3-3 3 41 14

NOTE: The interchange ability is "0" as a set.

UNITS AFFECTED:
All Aficio Color 5106/5206 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7137020001 and A7126120001
respectively will have the new style Separation Roller Stay, etc... installed during production.

• UPDATE NO. 3 - PRESSURE SPRING - The nip band width adjustment standard has been
changed from 9.5 ± 0.5mm to 9.25 ± 0.25mm to minimize the possibility of
Mimuzu. To facilitate this adjustment, the Pressure Spring has been changed.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AA063355 AA063562 Pressure Spring 2-2 1 85 21

UNITS AFFECTED:
All Aficio Color 5106/5206 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7136110001 and A7126110001
respectively will have the new style Pressure Spring installed during production.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

&900)8-2#291&)6U####%*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ#g#NEE NLfFMfMK
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# %*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ

„ COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: TRANSFER BELT SLIPPING


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
Mis-alignment of colors in the sub-scan direction.

„ MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The Pressure Spring (AA063491 have become week, allowing the Transfer Belt to slip.

SOLUTION: ‰
‰‰
‰ SMELECTRICAL
PAPER PATH
Replace Both springs (AA063491)
PARTS

Temporary CounterMeasure:
Carefully stretch the springs so they exert more pressure.
‰ OTHER
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO Color 5106/5206 - 012 10/17/97
APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO Color 5106/5206

nCOPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: MAGENTA BANDING
Note: This copy intended as master of original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
Magenta Banding.

q MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
Insufficient conductivity of development bias between the Development Sleeve and its shaft.

SOLUTION:
A bearing must be added to the rear of the development sleeve shaft. The flange of the bearing should face

q
in toward the development sleeve. A lock washer has been added to insure the ball bearing does not fall off

ELECTRICAL
during maintenance.

Note: The new Development Sleeve is used for the Magenta Development unit only.The Development
Sleeve number for the Yellow Development Unit remains the same.The recommended bearing
contains conductive grease to ensure proper electrical conductivity. Do not substitute any other
parts for those listed below.

q
BALL BEARING FLANGE
FACES DEVELOPMENT

PAPER PATH
SLEEVE (6 X 10 X 3) LOCK WASHER

q SM
REFERENCE
OLD PART NEW PART DESCRIPTION QTY. PAGE ITEM
q
NO. NO.
PARTS

A1723214 Development Sleeve-M/Y 2-1 63 1


A17233213 Development Sleeve-No.3 1 63 1
08053496 Ball Bearing 6X10X3 1 63 109
H0014219 Lock Washer 1 63 30
q

UNITS AFFECTED:
OTHER

All Aficio Color 5106/5206 Copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7137060001 and A7127070001
respectively will have the new parts installed.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 012 REISSUE H 11/17/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206:

nCOPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: MAGENTA BANDING


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
Magenta Banding.

q MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
Insufficient conductivity of development bias between the Development Sleeve and its shaft.

SOLUTION:

q
A bearing must be added to the rear of the development sleeve shaft. The flange of the bearing should face
in toward the development sleeve. A lock washer has been added to ensure the ball bearing does not fall off

ELECTRICAL
during maintenance.

Note: The new Development Sleeve is used for the Magenta Development unit only.The Development
Sleeve number for the Yellow Development Unit remains the same.The recommended bearing
contains conductive grease to ensure proper electrical conductivity. Do not substitute any other
parts for those listed below.

q
BALL BEARING FLANGE
FACES DEVELOPMENT

PAPER PATH
SLEEVE (6 X 10 X 3) LOCK WASHER

q SM
REFERENCE

OLD PART NEW PART


DESCRIPTION QTY. PAGE ITEM
NUMBER NUMBER
n PARTS

A17233214 Development Sleeve-M/Y 1-0 63 1

A1723213 Development Sleeve-No.3 Magenta 0 -1 63 1

08053496 Ball Bearing 6X10X3 1 63 109

H0014219 Lock Washer 1 63 30


q OTHER

UNITS AFFECTED:
All Aficio Color 5106/5206 Copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7137060001 and A7127070001
respectively will have new parts installed.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 013 10/31/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

qCOPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following Parts Catalog Correction is being issued for all Aficio Color 5106/5206 Parts Catalogs. This

q MECHANICAL
information should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

Correct your Parts Catalog as follows:

Part Number Description Index Page

q
Incorrect 08053449 Ball Bearing - M12 X 24 X 6 104 67

ELECTRICAL
Correct 08053496 Ball Bearing - 6 X 10 X 3 104 67

q
q
n
q FSMPAPER PATH
PARTS
OTHER
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 014 12/15/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

o COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: FUSER MAINTENANCE FOR SPECIAL THROUGHPUT MATERIALS
Note: This copy intended as master of original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SERVICE NOTES
Before new machines (out of box) are initially powered "ON" and/or whenever fuser service is required, the

q MECHANICAL
following procedure must be performed to ensure the highest possible performance.

1. While releasing the lever [A], pull out the fusing unit [B].

2. Open the exit unit [C] (by releasing the 2 "D4" levers).

q
[A]

ELECTRICAL
3. Loosen the 2 black screws [D] so that the fusing
pressure is applied. [B] [P]
[D]
NOTE: Do not turn the pressure adjustment screws [P]
which are located just beside the screws [D]

q
4. Remove the fusing handle cover [E] (2 screws) and the
fusing top cover [F] (1 screw).

PAPER PATH
[C]
5. Prime the oil supply pad with silicone fuser oil [G]
(generously).

6. Using a lint free cloth, coat the hot roller and pressure [F] [G]
roller with silicone oil. [E]

qFSM
7. Using the same cloth, wipe down the stripper fingers,
oil blade and hot roller cleaning roller with silicone oil.

8. Remove the oil cap [H] and fill the tank with silicone oil [K]
to its maximum level [I]. [I]
[H]
9. Manually operate the oil pump lever [J] and confirm the [J]
proper operation of the silicone oil supply system [K].
q PARTS

10. Reset the covers, the exit unit, oil cap and fusing unit.

Whenever Visual Communications Mirror Image SS-500 (Formally Magic TouchâSS-500) Transfer Material
or Teslin Polyester Substrate is fed through the Aficio 5106/5206, the silicon oil will become milky white, i.e
contaminated. Additional Preventive Maintenance is necessary to ensure the reliability of the fuser rollers
n

(see page 2).


OTHER

NOTE: For more information regarding throughput material, refer to Facts Line # 153(C).

Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 014
Page 2 of 2

In addition to the regular PM schedule, the following procedure must be performed every 20,000 scans or
5,000 copies. This procedure is mandatory regardless of the percentage of job mix (throughput material &
paper). If the additional maintenance is not performed, fuser damage will occur.

• Replace the oil supply pad P/N AE045015.


• Remove and discard of the silicon oil in accordance will local regulations.
• Replace the oil tank P/N AA031008 or thoroughly clean the oil tank with clean silicon fuser oil and a lint
free cloth.
• Replace the oil blade P/N AE041002
• Clean the hot roller, pressure roller, cleaning roller, oil supply tube, oil pump, stripper fingers and oil
sump with a lint free cloth and clean silicon fuser oil.
• Clean the exit rollers with alcohol or a suitable roller cleaner.
• Add new silicon fuser oil.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 015 12/22/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

nCOPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: BLANKING ON TRAILING EDGE


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
Blanking occurs on the trailing edge of a solid area image when there is a black frame. The problem does

q MECHANICAL
not happen with the grid pattern from the copier. The width of the blanking is about 0.1 to 0.2 mm.

CAUSE:
On machines in which the relative difference between the OPC drum and the transfer belt speed is quite
large, the electrostatic absorption at the time of belt transfer causes partial shifting of the image. The

q
difference in the position shift of the grid pattern and the controller image is probably a result of direct contact
area difference between the OPC drum and the belt of the toner image.

ELECTRICAL
SOLUTION:
1. Adjust the tension of the Transfer Belt timing and the drum drive timing belt.

2. SP Adjustment: P. 1: Transfer Belt Speed Adjustment (Default: 0). Increase the setting by +1~+2.

q PAPER PATH
3. Check the copy quality.

Black Frame

q
Leading Edge

q SM
PARTS

Solid Image
q

Blanking
OTHER

0.1 to 0.2 mm.


TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 016 12/22/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

nCOPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: JAGGED IMAGE IN PRINTER MODE
Note: This copy intended as master of original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
Printed Characters have Jagged Outline in Printer Mode.The problem does not occur when printing in Letter

q MECHANICAL
Mode.

CAUSE:
High image density. In photo mode, 2x1 dot dither processing is applied to all images including text If the
copier’s image density output is high (dark), it will be adjusted by the 2x1 dot dithering process, resulting in
jagged image. The problem is noticeable especially when calibrating targets with low IDmax .

q
SOLUTION:

ELECTRICAL
Lower the copier’s image density using the following procedure.

1. Open SP Mode 8-4 Printer g Correction Data , Fine Adjustment =Contone= .


Check IDmax of the color showing jagged image..

q
2. Open SP Mode 1-4 Toner Max M/A Target.
Input 0.800 if the IDmax checked above is 4.

PAPER PATH
Input 0.700 if the IDmax checked above is 3 or below.

3. Wait 5 minutes. Open SP Mode 2-4 and perform Process Control Self Check.

4. Open SP Mode 3-2 and confirm that the pointer table is not 00.

Note:If pointer table is 00, it means that the machine has selected the default pointer table because

q
the Toner Max M/A Target is too low. Try using a higher Toner Max M/A Target.

SM
5. Perform printer ACC.

6. Check print quality and if not satisfactory, go back to step 1.

Note : For SP Mode 1-4 Toner Max M/A Target, you may input lower value than those described q
above, but please make sure that the selected pointer table is not at 00.
q PARTS
OTHER
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 017 12/22/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

nCOPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: CYAN TONER SCATTERING IN PRINTER MODE
Note: This copy intended as master of original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
Cyan toner scattered around the text and the edge of solid images in print mode.

q MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
The PTL light (red light) is blocked by cyan toner. The electrical potential of the image area does not drop
while the potential on the bare drum surface drops. As a result, some toner is attracted to the bare drum
surface. See below figure(VD drops to bare drum potential level but VL does not drop to the same level
because the PTL light is blocked by cyan toner.)
The problem is evident when the amount of toner on the drum (M/A) is large. The problem is seen only in the

q
print mode since the maximum amount of toner on the drum is higher compared to that of the copy mode.

ELECTRICAL
Compared to the NC5006, the 5106 has a higher M/A for cyan. This causesthe level of cyan toner scattering
to become worse than the NC5006

SOLUTION:
1. The PTL has been changed to emit stronger light.
2. The ACC target for the printer mode has been modified to decrease the maximum amount of toner on the

q
drum. (IPU ROM revision G)

PAPER PATH
Before PTL Emission After PTL Emission

VD

q
toner toner

SM
VL
bare drum

n
REFERENCE
PARTS

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. PAGE ITEM
A0305243 A3995243 PTL Lamp 1

UNITS AFFECTED:
All AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A7137030001 and A7127030001
q

respectively will have the new PTL Lamp installed during production.
OTHER

NOTE: This problem can be eliminated by disconnecting the PTL, but in this case, magenta toner blasting
in 2C mode may occur. This is because the intention of the PTL is to cause a little cyan toner
scattering which will repel the scattered magenta toner.
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

BULLETIN NUMBER: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 - 018 12/22/97


APPLICABLE MODEL: AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206

nCOPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: LOW HUMIDITY EFFECT ON TONER DENSITY


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
SC 374/377 and/or over toning.

q MECHANICAL
Under low humidity condition’s usually during the winter, the toner density rises quickly after developer
replacement (within 1K copies) and causes dirty background. This is particularly noticeable with black and
cyan.

CAUSE:
The charge on the developer over time drops, and it is necessary to change the Vcnt if the developer
gamma surpasses a certain value. This is to prevent the image density from increasing. However, the

q
charge for this type of toner has a tendency to plummet in high-temperature/low-humidity environments, so

ELECTRICAL
this problem occurs more frequently indoors during the winter. Since the Vcnt cannot keep up with the speed
with which the charge drops, the image density rises over short periods of time.

SOLUTION:
1. Replace the developer (all colors).

q
2. Follow the developer replacement procedure according to the FSM.

PAPER PATH
3. Access SP Mode; SP Adjustment: P. 16: Other SP Adjustment and set NO1 from 00000 to 00001.

The above SP Mode enables the Vcnt Correction by number of scans for the toner density control. When
this correction is turned on, the Vcnt decreases by -1 every 100 scans and ends after 600 scans/-6.
However, for cyan the correction is only up to 500 scans/-5.

q
Note

SM
1. It does not matter when the Vcnt is turned on after the developer has been changed. The result will
be the same if it is done within 100 scans after toner density sensor initial setting.

2. At the time of toner density sensor initial setting, the correction counter is reset to 0.
q
3. If the Vcnt correction is turned on without developer replacement, there is the possibility that the
PARTS

image density will gradually become lighter.

4. In a high-humidity environment, there is a possibility of over-correction (low toner density leads to


low image density) so please turn Vcnt correction off.
q OTHER


 

        
   U
 IENJfIFNJgNE9 EfFNfML
   U 
 IENJfIFNJ

„
COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: SORTER ROLLER MARK


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:

‰
After installation of the Sorter, roller marks may appear on the backside of the copy during testing. This

MECHANICAL
problem cannot be solved by cleaning the rollers and will disappear after approximately 1K copies.

CAUSE:
Sometimes the speed of the copier and the sorter are not the same.

„
ELECTRICAL
SOLUTION:
1. Remove the rear cover of the sorter.
2. Turn ON switch 2 of DPS100 and adjust VR101 until LED102 is lit. Then slowly turn VR101 clock-wise
until LED102 is not lit. Now turn VR101 clockwise one notch.
3. Turn OFF switch 2 of DPS100 and perform a copy run test. Check for the roller marks. If the marks are
still present, turn VR101 one more notch clockwise.

‰
NOTE:

PAPER PATH
1. It is not necessary to adjust the high motor speed.
2. Since the reaction time of LED102 in response to the rotation of the VR is slow, wait 2~3 seconds
before checking to see if it is lit.
3. If the motor makes a strange noise as it rotates, this may lead to unstable control. If this happens, turn
VR101 counterclockwise to its original position.

‰
SM
‰
PARTS
‰
OTHER
     
        
   U
 IENJfIFNJhNEM   +NFfENfML
   U 
 IENJfIFNJ

„
COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SUBJECT: SORTER ROLLER MARK


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:

‰
After installation of the Sorter, roller marks may appear on the backside of the copy during testing. This

MECHANICAL
problem cannot be solved by cleaning the rollers and will disappear after approximately 1K copies.

CAUSE:
Sometimes the speed of the copier and the sorter are not the same.

„
ELECTRICAL
SOLUTION:
1. Remove the rear cover of the sorter.
2. Turn ON switch 2 of DPS100 and adjust VR101 until LED102 is lit. Then slowly turn VR101 clock-wise
until LED102 is not lit. Now turn VR101 clockwise one notch.
3. Turn OFF switch 2 of DPS100 and perform a copy run test. Check for the roller marks. If the marks are
still present, turn VR101 one more notch clockwise.

‰
NOTE:

PAPER PATH
1. It is not necessary to adjust the high motor speed.
2. Since the reaction time of LED102 in response to the rotation of the VR is slow, wait 2~3 seconds
before checking to see if it is lit.
3. If the motor makes a strange noise as it rotates, this may lead to unstable control. If this happens, turn
VR101 counterclockwise to its original position.

‰
SM
‰
PARTS
‰
OTHER
     
        
   U
 IENJfIFNJhNFNNEfFMfML
   U 
 IENJfIFNJ

‰
SUBJECT: SC321 USING FIERY

COPY QUALITY
for reproduction of additional bulletins.
Note: This copy intended as master of original

SYMPTOM:
Intermittent SC321 codes only when in Printer Mode (using Fiery).

‰
CAUSE:

MECHANICAL
Electrical noise interfering with the Transfer Belt Start Signal.

SOLUTION:
Improved software timing tolerance to avoid electrical interference.

„
ELECTRICAL
FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:
Install “F” version software on the Main Board of the Aficio Color 5106/5206.

PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
The “F” version software is installed during production.

‰
Serial number cut in not available at time of publication.

PAPER PATH
ROM ORDERING PROCEDURE:
The “F” version software (ROM Kit - A172ROMF) is available in limited quantities, only for machines
exhibiting this symptom. Fax the attached form to Technical Services or download a Hex file for local
programming via the Ricoh Technical Services BBS. The filename is 5206321F.EXE. Refer to Service

‰
News and Information No.147 regarding questions on the Ricoh Technical Services BBS.

NOTE: ROM Kit - A172ROMF contains 3 ROMs, A1725114F (IC 1), A1725115F (IC 2), and A1725129F SM
(IC 522).
„
PARTS
‰
OTHER

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. Aficio Color 5106/5206 – 020
Page 2 of 2

Fax this entire page in "DETAIL" mode ATTN.: Technical Services - Copier

Fax Number: 973-882-3960

Each serial number given will represent a request for one (1) ROM Kit - A172ROMF.

NOTE: The ROMs will be available at no charge from Technical. Services for 90 days (until April 30,
1998).
These ROMs will be available through NSP after the above date.

Serial Number (s)


1 6

2 7

3 8

4 9

5 10
All serial number information will be verified before shipment is made.

NOTE: Ricoh will not issue additional ROMs to locations that do not return the old ROMs.

NOTE: Old ROMs must be returned within five (5) days to:

Ricoh Corporation
155 Passaic Avenue
Fairfield, NJ 07004
Attn.: Technical Services – Copier

PLEASE TYPE OR PRINT CLEARLY.


DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:

CITY: STATE: ZIP CODE:

ATTENTION: PHONE #:

DEALER ACCOUNT NUMBER:


     
        
    U 
   IENJfIFNJ g NFE NFfFNfML
   U 
   IENJfIFNJ

‰
COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: SEPARATION – TORQUE LIMITTER
Note: This copy intended as master of original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:
The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all Aficio Color 5106/5206 Parts Catalogs.

‰
MECHANICAL
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A0976000 A0602617 Separation Torque Limitter 1 45 26

‰
ELECTRICAL
‰
PAPER PATH
‰
SM
„
PARTS
‰
OTHER
-I-
i3
\-
-.
3
--

savin Modification Bulletin PAGE: l/l


No: SDC206ISDC206E - 002
/
Model: SDC206/SDC206E Date: October 28, 1997
SDC206 5A9706000 1
Modified Article: Magenta Development Sleeve Serial Number:
SDC206E 5A87060001
Reason for q Parts catalog correction 0 Vendor change 0 To meet standards
Modification: 0 To facilitate assembly [7 To improve reliability
0 Part standardization q Other \
/

To ensure the conductivity of the development bias to the development sleeve, a Ball Bearing 6x10~3
has been installed on the rear shaft of the Development Sleeve for Magenta. A Lock Washer has
been also installed to secure the ball bearing. The ball bearing and the lock washer are available as
separate service parts.

The new development sleeve is used for the magenta development unit only and the development
sleeve for the yellow development unit remains the same.

Old part
number
New part
number
Description Qty Int Destination Page Index

A1723214 Development Sleeve-M/Y 2-l x/ 63 1


Al72321 3 Development Sleeve-no.3 O-l /o 63 1
08053496 Ball Bearing 6x10~3 O-l 63 109
HO014219 Lock Washer O-l 63 30

L-16
savm.
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color
BULLETIN NO. SDC206 / SDC206E-001 DATE 9130196
/
Subject: MAJOR DIFFERENCES vs THE SC106
I 4

0Copy Quality Model - Product I Serial Numbers Affected Modification Schedule:


0Electrical q Mandatory
0Mechanical
S D C 2 0 6 / SDC206E q Scheduled Visit
c]
Modification q Next Call
q Safety Information 0 Next PM
n Technical Information 0 As Necessary
q General Information Install Time

The SDC206 & SDC206E are the latest additions to the Savin family of digital color copiers.
Appearance wise, these two models resemble the SC106, however numerous design and
technical changes have been implemented to enhance copy quality and improve reliabilty.

The attached pages provide an overview of the major technical differences found in the
SDC206 / SDC206E in comparison to the SC106. The details column indicates the page
to refer to in the technical manual.

The additional technical documentation that is currently available for the SDC206 / SDC206E is:

Technical Manual* (12 -707)


Parts Catalog (12-708)
Service Management Guide (maiiled to each service location)

Please note that the Technical Manual is intended as supplement to the existing
SC706 Technical Manual. The SDC206 / SDC206E Technical Manual provides only
information that is unique to the these two new copiers. All other information that is
common to both model lines can be found in the SC706 Technical Manuual.

SAVIN CORPORATION Page 1 of 5


Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 - (203) 967-5000
FEB# SDC206 / SDC206E-001
SUBJECT: MAJOR DIFFERENCES VS THE SC106

MAJOR DIFFERENCES
---__
No. 1 Item Contents Details
Process Control
_-
Toner End The toner end detection software A toner end sensor has been
1 Detection ---z; -- ~ [added t,,:ch:~ke62 i,
section 2 for details.
Latent Image The process control for latent See 2.1 in section 2 for details.
2
Control imaqe control has been modified.
3 Toner Density /VCNT Correction has been iSee 2.2 in section 2 for details.
Control modified. I
l- e I!

Around The Drum


IOPC Drum The OPC drum layer material To reduce ozone and NOx
, 1
(Charge Transfer Layer: CTL) reaction with the drum (to
has changed. prolong the lifetime of the drum).
Drum Charge The system has been changed See 3.1 in section 2 for details.
2 Wire from a double-wire to a
single-wire scorotron. ~__
Drum Charge Drum charge wire/grid cleaning See 3.2 in section 2 for details.
Wire/Grid has been newly added.
Cleaning
Drum Cleaning Drum lubrication has been newly See 3.4 in section 2 for details.
added.
The cleaning brush has been To apply the lubricant evenly on
changed from a looped-bristle the drum. See 3.4 in section 2 for
type
.- to a straight-bristle type. details.

Optics
Exposure Lamp The number of exposure lamp’s To decrease white bands on
1 lighting points has increased copies caused by the exposure
from 7 to 9. lamp’s lighting points.
Infra-red Filter The thickness of the infra-red To achieve better copy quality for
filter has increased from 0.8 mm originals containing infra-red
to 1.0 mm. radiance.
(prevents black areas from
becoming reddish)
2nd/3rd Mirrors A heavier stabilizer has been To decrease scanner banding to
installed on the 2nd/3rd mirrors. achieve better results for auto
letter/photo
s e p a r a t i o n .
To decrease the possibility of the
exposure glass becoming dirty
with dust particles.
Reflectors To decrease the temperature
around the optics cavity due to
less power to the exposure lamp.
-____-
FEB# SDC206 / SDC206E-001
SUBJECT: MAJOR DIFFERENCES VS THE SC106

l;g~ces~~ng T

The RGB filter coefficient for To improve gradation and


each copy mode (letter/photo) reproduction quality.
- hasbeenchanged.
~Color Correction New matrixes and masking See 4.4 in section 2 for details.
2 1 coefficients have been added to
match the new copy modes.
Image The image separation IC has To reduce photo/letter image
3 Separation IC been changed. separation errors in auto detect
___-.- mode.
I
Laser Exposure
~Drum Mirror A heavier stabilizer has been To reduce the occurrence of
1 i installed on the Drum mirrors. I, banding on copies.

DeveloDment
I

Development The sleeve rollers have been To eliminate the 1.25 mm


Sleeve Roller changed to a sand-blast type. horizontal lines in halftone image
areas caused by the grooves on
the sleeve roller.

Toner
- Tank
____----
bner Tank A toner end sensor has been See 6.2 in section 2 for details.
‘added for each color. ---A
t
The green lever has been See 6.2 in section 2 for details.

See 6.2 in section 2 for details


1mechanism has been added.
‘When the tank is pulled out, it is
~disconnected electrically from the
c
main body.
2--- -
Transfer Belt
Transfer Belt The number of threshold levels /See 7.1 in section 2 for details.
Bias that decide transfer belt bias
1 1 depending on environmental
conditions has changed from 2 to
14.
Transfer Belt The belt lubricant mechanism prevent partial blanking of
Cleaning has changed to apply lubricant lines (due to incomplete toner
2 1~ directly to the transfer belt. transfer) from appearing on
I/
---I__--- _----- 2 for details.

3
FEB# SDC206 / SDC206E-001
SUBJECT: MAJOR DIFFERENCES VS THE SC1 06

~.-
-----------
r No. 1 Item I Contents Details -4
I

Transfer Roller -
Transfer The transfer roller heater has See 8.1 in section 2 for details.
Belt/Roller been newly added to keep the
Heater i temperature around the transfer
~roller unit at 20°C.
i 4
Transfer Roller \The material of the transfer roller To improve transfer efficiency.
1has been changed.
1 1

Transfer Roller The number of threshold levels See 8.2 in section 2 for details.
Bias that decide transfer roller bias
depending on environmental
conditions has been changed I
from 2 to 4. 1
~Transfer roller bias settings for See 8.2 in section 2 for details.
,duplex copying have been newly
added.
t
Paper The installed angle of the paper To prevent toner scatter from
Discharge Plate discharge plate has changed. appearing around solid areas in
duplex mode. See 8.4 in section
2 for details.
Paper The output of the paper See 8.4 in section 2 for details.
Discharge Plate discharge plate changes
output depending on the copypaper.
iransfer Roller The roller lubricant mechanism See 8.3 in section 2 for details.
6
Cleaning 7as been newly added.

The material of the hot roller has

Pa er Feed
--p_
2nd Paper ~The 2nd paper feed station has To meet customers’ requests
1 i Feed Station 1been changed to the universal
- - tray
- type.

Operation Panel
, LCD (Liquid The LCD has been changed to a For easier operation and editing.
Crystal Display) 640 x 480 dot type.

SDC206E (A172): Full Color Display


SDC206 (Al 99): __-.
B/w Display
FEB# SDC206 I SDC206E-001
SUBJECT: MAJOR DIFFERENCES VS THE SC106

Details --

-
#The main control board no longer
~controls the operation panel.
For easier servicing of the
~Panel Self ~diagnostics mode has been machine.
3 1
~Diagnostic newly added.
’ Mode
I

Others
Drum Drive The drum drive mechanism has Banding on copies are reduced.
been changed from a series of See 3.3 in section 2 for details.
1
gears to a timing belt system.
Copier Rear The thickness of the rear frame Banding on copies are reduced.
Frame has changed from 1.6 mm to 2.0
mm
Fusing exhaust This filter has been eliminated. Because the ozone amount has
ozone filter been decreased due to the new
charge corona unit

See the DJF section for details. - .~.


See the Sorter section for details.
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS BULLETIN NO. SDC206 / SDC206E-002 DATE 10/25/96

Subject: AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) PROCEDURE


I
0 Copy Quality Model - Product I Serial Numbers Affected Modification Schedule:
q Electrical 0 Mandatory
[7 Mechanical
SDC206 / SDC206E q Scheduled Visit
[7 Modification q Next Call
Ll Safety Information q Next PM
n Technical Information q As Necessary
q General Information Install Time

GENERAL:

This bulletin is being published to provide a greater understanding of the Auto Color Calibration
(ACC) procedure. The following points must be understood prior to performing an ACC procedure:

1. Adjustment of ACC changes gamma settings.

2. ACC is intended to provide a “rough” adjustment or a “starting point” for the color calibration
process.

3. ACC is designed to allow a customer to automatically set gamma settings to a “reasonably


acceptable” level, however, manual adjustment of gamma settings by a Service Representative
will provide optimal copy quality.

4. In some cases, when copy quality is determined to be acceptable by the customer, ACC is not
required and should not be performed. If ACC is performed after manual adjustment of gamma
settings, the Service Representative settings will be lost if the previous settings are not selected
through ACC. Therefore, always save the Service Representative gamma settings in Permanent
memory as a back-up. For more information on Permanent and Temporary Memory, refer to the
SDC2061206E Technical Manual, page 4-33 (under NOTE).

5. The gamma settings stored in Permanent Memory for Printer Mode cannot be changed.
However, the gamma settings stored in Permanent Memory for Glass-top Copy Mode can be
changed.

6. ACC may not be required after a PM call.

7. The use of dry copy paper (~25% humidity) may result in “blasting” around text. If “blasting”
around text occurs, install fresh paper of greater than 25% humidity.

SAWN CORPORATION PAGE 1 OF 5


__ ---
Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 - (203) 967-5000
BULLETIN NO. SDC206 / SDC206E-002 PAGE2OF5~
SUBJECT: AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) PROCEDURE 1 O/25/96 ~

AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) PROCEDURE:

NOTE: Because the reflectivity of the copy paper can affect the ACC results, it is recommended
that Hammermill, Color Copy Paper (long grain, Photo White) be utilized to print the A CC
test pattern.

As mentioned in the Technical Manual (Note: (a), page 3-6), be sure to plug the power cord in with
the Main Switch in the “OFF” position at machine installation. This will energize the Transfer Roller
Heater and allow the internal temperature of the machine to stabilize. It may be necessary to have
the Transfer Roller Heater energized for 2 to 3 hours (depending on how cold an environment the
machine has been in).

Glass-top Copy Mode Calibration

I. Place the C4 Test Chart (A0929503A) on the glass, select 11 X 17 inch paper, select Photo
Mode, and change Auto Image Density to Manual Image Density. Enter User Tool No. 2 and
set values to factory default and press “Copy”.

2. Check the copy quality.

3. If acceptable, do not perform an ACC procedure.

4. If unacceptable, set copy sample aside and perform the ACC procedure as follows.

5. Select User Tool No. 2 - Sensitivity Adjustment (Auto Color Calibration ACC: Copy Mode).

6. Print out the ACC Test Pattern from copier.

7. Place the ACC Test Pattern on the glass and press “Scan Start”. (Be sure to align the arrows
on the glass correctly.)

8. Copier gamma settings will be automatically adjusted.

9. Place the C4 Test Chart on the glass and press “Copy”.

IO, Compare the output to the original and also to the first copy sample (produced in step I).

11. Manually adjust the gamma settings to fine tune the copier if needed. Save settings in
Permanent Memory (Technical Manual, page 5-3).

NOTE: The values stored in Permanent Memory will not be affected by subsequent ACC
procedures.
BULLETIN NO. SDC206 / SDC206E-002 PAGE 3 OF4
SUBJECT: AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) PROCEDURE 1 O/25/96 ~
--.---

Fiery XJ System Printer Gamma Adjustment Procedure

1. Attach the Fiery to the copier.

2. Run Fiery setup and select R2 under the Printer Setup / Printer Model selection.

3. Write down the factory default gamma settings. These values are not on the factory data sheet
provided with the copier.

NOTE: If the Fiery has been previous/y installed, remove the calibration from the Fiery. Removing
any previously stored calibration prepares the system to accept a new calibration. If installin ‘g
for the first time, no calibration will be in the Fiery.

4. Print out the Fiery XJ Test Page by pressing the Menu Button on the XJ, then press the Print
Pages Button, then press the Test Page Button.

5. If acceptable, do not perform an ACC procedure.

6. If unacceptable, set the printer sample aside and perform the ACC procedure as follows.

7. Select User Tool No. 2 - Sensitivity Adjustment (Auto Color Calibration ACC: Printer Mode).

8. Print out the ACC Test Pattern from the copier.

9. Place the ACC Test Pattern on glass and press “Scan Start” (be sure to align the arrows on the
glass correctly).

10. Printer gamma settings will be automatically adjusted.

11. Print out the Fiery XJ Test Page and compare the outputs.

12. If you have the X-RITE DTP 32 densitometer, continue with step 14. If not, refer to the Technical
Manual, page 5-32, to adjust the gamma settings manually. Refer to page 6-l of the Fiery User
Manual for calibration procedure.

13. Print the Fiery Test Page and compare.

14. Start the Macintosh or PC and launch the Fiery Print Calibrator, version 3.0.

15. Select Fiery XJ R2 from the list of servers and click “Connect”.

16. Click “Target”. A list of device targets will appear. From this list, select R2 and click “OK”.

17. From the “Server” menu at the top of the screen, select “Print Patch Page”. The copier will now
print a series of CMYK patches,

18. From the “Measurements” menu, select “Densitometer”.


BULLETIN NO. SDC206 / SDC206E-002 PAGE4OF5’
SUBJECT: AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) PROCEDURE 1 O/25/96

19. At this time, “None” will be selected. Click on “None” and select “Modem” or “Parallel Port”,
(depending on which port the densitometer is connected to).

20. Click “Start” and follow the directions in the “Status” box on the computer screen and the LCD
read-out on the densitometer.

21. After reading all CMYK strips, the status box reads “Measurements Read Successfully”.

22. Click “Accept”.

23. Click “Test”. Make sure “Calibrator Test Page” is selected, then click on “Print”.

24. The system will now generate a comparison page with calibrated & non-calibrated images,
side by side.

25. From the “Server” menu select “Remove Calibration”. This removes any previously stored
calibration and prepares the system to accept new calibration.

26. Click “Apply Calibration” if the comparison page calibrated image is acceptable. Otherwise,
manually adjust printer gamma settings or refer to Standard Fiery Print Calibration Targets
provided on page 4.

27. You may check calibration status by selecting “Calibration Status” from the Server menu.
Refer to the Fiery XJ user guide for more information regarding editing calibration curves.

28. When you are done, select “Quit” from the File menu.

Standard Fiery Print Calibration Targets:

A list of preliminary target numbers are listed on page 5. These targets may be updated and
re-issued as better results are obtained.
~BULLETIN NO. SDC206 / SDC206E-002 PAGE 5 OF 5
1SUBJECT: AUTO COLOR CALIBRATION (ACC) PROCEDURE 1 O/25/96 ~

Standard Fiery Print Calibration Targets

Modify the linear target that is supplied with version 3.0 software to the following numbers:

2.7
n 2.4
k
2.1
0
e 1 .8
n
8 1.5

1 1 .2
Rppty settlng to: I Block
0.9

0.6

0.2

0.0
a 10 20 30 da zu 8[1 xl 80 90 ia0
k-gut hk% Gain al 50X Ii 0 1 X
0 Eurcmean
;o x
Gain at 40% iS El
I npul:
And ot 8O%isEl
!o %

Saue rurqet-.
Field Engineering Bulletin
Copier Series
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
BULLETIN NO. SDC206-003 DATE 1 l/15/96

I Subject:
I
Installation Procedure
I
J
2Copy Quality Model - Product I Serial Numbers Affected Modlficatlon Schedule
‘2
Electrtcal q Mandatory
E Mechanical SDC206/SDC206E q Scheduled VW
EModiflcatlon q Next Call
III
Safety Information 0 Next PM
n Technical Information 0 As Necessary
KG eneral lnformatlon Install Time

SDC206SDC206E installation procedures, which are not provided with the copier, differ slightly
from that of the SC106. This coupled with the fact that numerous SP modes and adjustments also
differ, make it imperative that a Technical Manual be available when installing and servicing a
SDC206SDC206E.

SAVIN CORPORATION Page I of 1


TechnIcal Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 - (203) 967-5000
savm. Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
SC106 - 004
B U L L E T I N N O . SDC206 - 004 DATE: 8/15/97

I Subject:

0 Copy Quality
MAGENTA BANDING

Model - Product/Serial Numbers AffectedI Modification Schedule


I

cI Electrical SC106 0 Mandatory


q Mechanical q Scheduled Visit
El Modification SDC206 q Next Call
0 Safety Information c] Next PM
1 Technical Information 0 As Necessary
q General Information Install Time

Symptom:

intermittent / Random magenta banding across full color copy (front to rear). This banding is most
noticeable in blue or gray image areas.

Cause:

Bias voltage applied to the magenta development roller is not consistent due to poor conductivity
between the shaft and the roller bearing / bushing.

Solution:

Install a conductive Bearing 6 x 10 x 3 (P/N 08053496), flange side in, and Lock Washer
(P/N H0014219), tabs out, onto the rear of the magenta development roller shaft. This effectively creates
two points of bias contact / conductivity.

Note: This countermeasure was scheduled to be implemented beginning with July 1997 production.
Additional details will be reflected in a Parts Modification Bulletin.

SAWN CORPORATION
Technical Service Operations --333 Ludlow Street, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --(203) 967-5000
sawn.
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
BULLETIN NO: SDC206/E - 005 DATE: 10122197

I Subject: FIREFLY SPOTS- UNSTABLE CARRIER


I
n Copy Quality Model - Product/Serial Numbers Affected 1 Modification Schedule
q Electrical SDC206 q Mandatory
0 Mechanical SDC206/E I 0 Scheduled Visit
q Modification q Next Call
0 Safety Information
0 Technical Information
I q Next PM
q As Necessary
0 General Information Install Time

Problem
Firefly spots (light spots) in the solid or halftone image area.

Cause
Unstable carrier particles attracted to the drum surface block prevent proper toner transfer to the transfer belt.

Note
A Similar image symptom may occur when condensed toner is attracted to the drum surface. The condensed
toner appears in the center of the light spot. The cause of this symptom is different and is not corrected with
the following procedure.

Solution
Follow the steps below to remove the unstable carrier in the developer.

1. Open SP mode 2-2 Test Pattern Condition. Set the test pattern condition and select full dot
pattern.

2. Make an 11 xl 7” single color copy(s) using the color(s) which has light spots.

3. Open SP mode 3-3 Drum Potential Control Output and note VB actual data of the color which has
light spots.

4. Open SP mode l-4 Voltage Setting for P-con Reset Mode and input VB actual data + 200 to
the VB for color(s) which has light spots. Input VB actual data + 355 to the VG of the color(s)
which has light spots.

Example: If VB actual is -3OOV, input -500V to the VB and -655V to the VG.

5. Open SP mode 4-l Auto Process Control Selfcheck and select reset.

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 2

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Model: SDC2061E Date: 1 O/22/97 No: 005
I

6. Make 10 11 xl 7” single color copies with the color(s) which has light spots.

7. Open SP mode 4-l Auto Process Control Selfcheck and select PID. Open SP mode 2-2 Test Pattern
Condition, and reset the test pattern condition.

8. Open SP mode 3-l Toner Density. Make 10 11x17” full color copies while observing the Vt of the color(s)
which has light spots. When the Vt is within kO.2 of Vref, cancel the remaining copies.

9. Open SP mode 1-4 Setting for P-con Off Mode and lower VB and VG settings by 100 for the color(s)
which has light spots.

10. Open SP mode 4-l Auto Process Control Selfcheck and select reset.

11. Open SP mode 2-2 Test Pattern Condition, set the test pattern condition and select full dot pattern.

12. Make an 11x17” single color copy(s) using the color(s) which has light spots. If copy quality is improved
to acceptable level, open SP mode l-4 Setting for P-con Off Mode and return VB and VG to default
settings.

13. Open SP mode 4-l Auto Process Control Selfcheck and select PID. Make one 11x17” single color copy
with the color(s) which has light spots. Open SP mode 2-2 Test Pattern Condition, and reset the test
pattern condition.

14. If some light spots are still remaining on the copy made at step 12, open SP mode l-5 Transfer Belt Bias
and increase transfer belt bias by 200. ( Transfer Belt bias can be increased further, but not by more than
400.)

15. If the copy quality is not acceptable with the sample made at step 12, repeat the procedure from
step 4.

Savin Corporation Page 2 of 2

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
BULLETIN NO: SDC206/206E - 006 DATE: 1 O/22/97
Subject: HIGH TONER DENSITY IN LOW HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT
/
W Copy Quality Model - Product/Serial Numbers Affected Modification Schedule
,
q Electrical SDC206 0 Mandatory
0 Mechanical SDC206/E q Scheduled Visit
0 Modification 0 Next Call
0 Safety Information 0 Next PM
0 Technical Information 0 As Necessary
q General Information Install Time

Symptom:

Under low humidity condition such as during the winter, the toner density increases quickly within 1 K copies
after developer replacement. This results in high image density and possible dirty background. This is
particularly noticeable with black and cyan.

Cause:

Due to the drop in the charge of the developer over time, it is necessary to change the Vent if the developer
gamma surpasses a certain value to prevent the image density from increasing. However, the charge for this
type of toner has a tendency to decrease in high-temperature/low-humidity environments, therefore the
symptom occurs more frequently during the winter. Since the Vent cannot keep up with the speed with which
the charge drops, the image density rises over short periods of time.
Solution:

1. Replace the developer (all colors).


2. Adjust the toner density sensor initial setting until the image density is correct.
3. Access SP Mode; SP Adjustment: P. 16: Other SP Adjustment and set NO. 1 from 00000 to 00001.

Reason for Alteration

The above SP Mode turns on the Vent (Correction by number of scans) for the toner density control. When this
correction is turned on, the Vent decreases by -1 every 100 scans and ends after 600 scans/-6. However, for
cyan the correction is only up to 500 scans/-5. All colors are controlled separately.

Note
1. It does not matter when the Vent is turned on after the developer has been changed. The result will be the
same if it is done within 100 scans after toner density sensor initial setting.
2. At the time of toner density sensor initial setting, the correction counter is reset to 0.
3. If the Vent correction is turned on without developer replacement, there is the possibility that the image
density will gradually become lighter.
4. In a high-humidity environment, there is a possibility of over-correction (low toner density leads to low
image density), therefore turn this Vent correction off.

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 1

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
5awn.
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
SDC206/E - 007
BULLETIN NO: SDC206 - 007 DATE: 10/28/97

Subject: BLANKING AT THE TRAILING EDGE OF SOLID IMAGE

0 Copy Quality Model - Product/Serial Numbers Affected Modification Schedule


q Electrical SDC206 0 Mandatory
0 Mechanical 0 Scheduled Visit
0 Modification SDC206/E 0 Next Call
17 Safety Information 0 Next PM
0 Technical Information q As Necessary
n General Information Install Time

Symptom

Blanking occurs on the trailing edge of a solid-area image when there is a black frame. The problem does not
happen with the grid pattern from the copier. The width of the blanking is about 0.1 to 0.2 mm.

Black frame Blanking

Leading Edge

Solid imige
Cause

On machines in which the relative difference between the OPC drum and the transfer belt speed is quite large,
the electrostatic absorption at the time of belt transfer causes partial shifting of the image. The difference in
the position shift of the grid pattern and the controller image is probably a result of the direct contact area
difference between the OPC drum and the transfer belt of the toner image.

Solution

1. Adjust the tension of the transfer belt timing belt and the drum drive timing belt.
2. SP Adjustment: P. 1: Transfer Belt Speed Adjustment (Default: 0)
Increase the setting by +I-+2.
3. Check the copy quality.

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 1

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 -- (203) 967-5000
savin
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
BULLETIN NO: SDC206E - 008 DATE: IO/28197

I Subject: JAGGED IMAGE IN PRINTER MODE


I
Cl Copy Quality Model - Product/Serial Numbers Affected Modification Schedule
Cl Electrical SDC206 c] M a n d a t o r y
El Mechanical 0 Scheduled Visit
cl Modification SDC206IE 0 Next Call
cl Safety Information 0 Next PM
cl
El
Technical Information
General Information 1
I 10 As Necessary
1 Install Time

Symptom:
The outline of characters is not well defined (jagged) in printer mode. This symptom does not occur
with the prints made in letter mode.

Cause:
In photo mode, 2x1 dot dither processing is applied to all images including text. If the copier’s
condition is tending to output high (dark) image density, it will be adjusted by 2x1 dot dither
processing, resulting in jagged image. The symptom is most noticeable especially when calibration
targets with low IDmax is used.

Solution:
Lower the copier’s image density by the following procedure
I. Open SP Mode 8-4 Printer y Correction Data Fine Adjustment =Contone=. Check IDmax of the
color showing jagged image.
2. Open SP Mode l-4 Toner Max M/A Target. Input 0.800 if the IDmax checked above is 4. Input
0.700 if the IDmax checked above is 3 or below.
3. Wait 5 minutes. Open SP Mode 2-4 and perform Process Control Self Check.
4. Open SP Mode 3-2 and confirm that the pointer table is not 00.

Note: If pointer table is 00, it means that the machine selected default pointer table since Toner
Max M/A Target is lowered too much. Try with higher Toner Max M/A Target.
5. Perform printer ACC.
6. Check print quality and if not satisfactory, go back to step 1.

Note: For SP Mode I-4 Toner Max M/A Target, you may input lower value than those described
above, however ensure that the selected pointer table is not 00.

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 2

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
I Model: SDC206 , SDC206/E Date: October 28, 1997 No: SDC206 - 008
SDC206/E - 008 I

Modification of Software for Easier Adjustment

With the current main board ROM, the SP Mode l-4 Toner Max M/A Target adjusts the M/A target for
all colors at the same time. The ROM will be modified to make this adjustment independent for each
color. With the new software, the toner maximum M/A target for each color is allocated in the SP
Mode as follows.

Black SP Mode l-4 Toner Max M/A Target (same as now)


Cyan SP Mode 1-16 Other SP Mode No.1 5
Magenta SP Mode 1-16 Other SP Mode No.16
Yellow SP Mode 1-16 Other SP Mode No.17

Savin Corporation Page 2 of 2

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
5awn.
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
BULLETIN NO: SDC206/E - 009 DATE: 10/28/97
Subject: SORTER ROLLER MARK

n Copy Quality
. Model - Product/Serial Numbers Affected I Modification Schedule
•l Electrical SDC206 0 Mandatory
0 Mechanical 0 Scheduled Visit
0 Modification SDC206/E q Next Call
0 Safety Information 0 Next PM
q Technical Information 0 As Necessary
0 General Information Install Time

Symptom:

After installation of the sorter, roller marks may appear on the back of the copy during the copy run
test. This problem cannot be solved by cleaning the rollers but will disappear after approximately 1 K
copies.

Cause:

The line velocity of the copier and the sorter sometimes do not match.

Solution:

1. Remove the rear cover of the sorter.


2. Turn on #2 of the DPSIOO and adjust the VRI 01 until LED102 illuminates. Then slowly turn the
VRIOI clockwise until LED102 turns off. Now turn the VRIOI clockwise one notch.
3. Turn off #2 of the DPSIOO and perform another copy run test. Check for the roller marks. If the
marks remain, turn the VRIOI an additional notch clockwise.

Note
1. It is not necessary to adjust the high motor speed.
2, Since the reaction time of the LED102 in response to the rotation of the VR is slow, wait for 2-3
seconds before checking to see if it is illuminated.
3. If the motor make an unusual noise as it rotates, this many lead to unstable control. If this
happens, turn the VRIOI counterclockwise to the original position.

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 1

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS SDC206 - 010
SC106 - 004
BULLETIN NOaDATE: 8/l 5/97

I Subject:

0 Copy Quality
MAGENTA BANDING

Model - Product/Serial Numbers Affected1 Modification Schedule


•l Electrical SC1 06 0 Mandatory
0 Mechanical 0 Scheduled Visit
0 Modification SDC206 0 Next Call
q Safety Information 0 Next PM
m Technical Information 0 As Necessary
q General Information Install Time

Symptom:

Intermittent / Random magenta banding across full color copy (front to rear). This banding is most
noticeable in blue or gray image areas.

Cause:

Bias voltage applied to the magenta development roller is not consistent due to poor conductivity
between the shaft and the roller bearing / bushing.

Solution:

Install a conductive Bearing 6 x IO x 3 (P/N 08053496), flange side in, and Lock Washer
(P/N H0014219), tabs out, onto the rear of the magenta development roller shaft. This effectively creates
two points of bias contact / conductivity.

This
Note:countermeasure was scheduled to be implemented beginning with July 1997 production.
Additional details will be reflected in a Parts Modification Bulletin.

SAWN CORPORATION PAGE 1 OF 1


Technical Service Operations- 333 Ludlow Street, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 -- (203) 967-5000
savin
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
SDC206 - 011
BULLETIN NO: SDC206/E - 011 DATE: IO/28197

I Subject: Cyan Toner Blasting in Printer Mode I


q Copy Quality Model - Product/Serial Numbers Affected Modification Schedule
0 Electrical SDC206 5A97030001 0 Mandatory
/-J Mechanical 0 Scheduled Visit
,
0 Modification SDC206/E 5A87030001 0 Next Call
0 Safety Information 0 Next PM
0 Technical Information [7 As Necessary
a General Information Install Time

Symptom
Cyan toner scattered (“blasting”) around the text and edge of solid image in printer mode.

Cause
The PTL light (red light) is blocked by the cyan toner. The electrical potential of the image area does
not drop while potential on the bare drum surface drops. As a result, some toner is attracted to the
bare drum surface. See below figure.

Before PTL Emission After PTL Emission

toner

bare drum-

VD drops to the bare drum potential level, however VL does not drop to the same level since the PTL
light is blocked by cyan toner.
The symptom is most evident when amount of toner on the drum (M/A) is large. The symptom is
seen only in the printer mode since the maximum amount of toner on the drum is higher compared to
that of the copy mode.

Compared to the SC106, the SDC206/E has a higher M/A for cyan. This results in a higher level of
Cyan Toner scattering.

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 2

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 - (203) 96745000
BULLETIN NO: SDC20603 - 007
I SUBJECT: CYAN TONER BLASTING IN PRINTER MODE I

Countermeasure

1. The PTL has been changed to emit stronger light.

Part Number A0305243 + A3995243

2. The ACC target for the printer mode has been modified to decrease the maximum amount of toner
on the drum. (IPU ROM revision G)

Symptom:

This symptom can be eliminated by disconnecting the PTL, however the side effect may be magenta
toner blasting in 2C mode. This is because the purpose of the PTL is to cause minor cyan toner
Scattering which will repel the scattered magenta toner.

Savin Corporation Page 2 of 2

Technical Service Operations - P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
BULLETIN NO: SDC206/E - 012 DATE: 1/20/98
Subject: NIP BAND WIDTH

Copy Quality Model - Product/Serial Numbers Modification Schedule


Affected
Electrical Mandatory
Mechanical Scheduled Visit
Modification Next Call
Safety Information Next PM
Technical Information As Necessary
General Information Install Time __________

The nip band width of the fusing unit has been changed to minimize the possibility of wavy image
and/or wrinkled copy.

Location New Standard Old Standard


Both Edges 9.25±0.25mm 9.5±0.5mm
(20mm from the edges)
Center 9.0±2.5mm 9.0±0.5mm
(confirmation reference)

To facilitate this adjustment during production, the pressure spring has been changed to a weaker
type. To distinguish the new and the old spring, the color has been changed from black to silver.

Old part New part Description Qty Int Destination Page Index
number number
AA063355 AA063562 Pressure Spring 2-2 X/O 85 21

It is not necessary to readjust the nip band width of the machines in the field. In cases where nip
band width is suspect, please check according to the new standard and adjust as necessary.
However, it may not be possible to achieve the new adjustment standard with the old pressure spring.
In this case, replacement with the new type spring and adjustment confirmation is required.

The weaker new type spring was implemented in production beginning with the following S/N’s:

SDC206 - 5A96110001
SDC206 / E - 5A86110001

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 1

Technical Service Operations – P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
BULLETIN NO: SDC206/E – 013 DATE: 2/20/98
Subject: SC321 WHEN USING FIERY

Copy Quality Model - Product/Serial Numbers Modification Schedule


Affected
Electrical SDC206 Mandatory
Mechanical Scheduled Visit
Modification SDC206/E Next Call
Safety Information Next PM
Technical Information As Necessary
General Information Install Time __________

SYMPTOM:

Intermittent SC321 codes only during Printer Mode (using Fiery).

CAUSE:

The Transfer Belt Start Signal is interrupted / influenced by electrical noise.

SOLUTION:

The tolerance of the software timing has been improved against electrical noise / interference. This is
accomplished through the following Main Board ROMs:

IC1 = A1725114F
IC2 = A1725115F
IC522 = A1725129F

This “F” version software, which is packaged as a kit (P/N A172ROMF), is available in limited quantities, only
for machines exhibiting the indicated symptom. Complete and fax the form on page 2 of this bulletin to
Technical Services.

Note: The “F” version software has been implemented into production units, however S/N cut-in
information is unavailable at this time.

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 2

Technical Service Operations – P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Model: SDC206/E Date: February 20, 1998 No: SDC206/E - 013

Fax this entire page in “DETAIL” mode ATTN.: Technical Services – Copier

Fax Number: 973-882-3960

Each serial number given will represent a request for one (1) ROM Kit – A172ROMF.

NOTE: The ROMs will be available at no charge from Technical Services until April 30, 1998.

SERIAL NUMBER(S)
1 6
2 7
3 8
4 9
5 1 0

All serial number information will be verified before shipment is made.

NOTE: Savin will not provide additional ROMs to locations that do not return old ROMs.

NOTE: Replaced ROMs must be returned within five (5) days to:

Ricoh Corporation
155 Passaic Avenue
Fairfield, NJ 07004
Attn.: Technical Services – Copier

PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE CLEARLY.


BRANCH / DEALER NAME:
ADDRESS:
C IT Y : STATE: Z IP C O D E :
A T T E N T IO N : PHONE #
DEALER ACCOUNT NUMBER:

Savin Corporation Page 1 of


Page 22
2 of

Technical Service Operations – P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Model: SDC206/E Date: February 20, 1998 No: SDC206/E - 013

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 2

Technical Service Operations – P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Field Engineering Bulletin
Digital Color Series
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
BULLETIN NO: SDC206 – 014 DATE: 4/14/98
Subject: HOT ROLLER DAMAGE

Copy Quality Model - Product/Serial Numbers Modification Schedule


Affected
Electrical SDC206 Mandatory
Mechanical Scheduled Visit
Modification SDC206E Next Call
Safety Information Next PM
Technical Information As Necessary
General Information Install Time __________

The following modification has been made to the fusing unit to reduce hot roller damage by the stripper pawls
when paper jam occurs in the fusing unit. These improvements were made from October ‘97production
machines. For cut-in serial number, please refer to the Parts Modification Bulletin.

Slider Hot Roller Stripper


The slider hot roller stripper has been modified to prevent the stripper from being pushed too hard into the hot
roller by jammed paper. The part number has been changed from A1094204 to A1724205.
When replacing the slider with a new part, loosen the two screws and remove the hot roller stripper springs as
shown in the below figure. Apply some grease on the slider to the area where it contacts with the front and rear
frame of the paper exit unit.

Savin Corporation Page 1 of 2

Technical Service Operations – P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
Model: SDC206/SDC206E Date: April 14, 1998 No: SDC206/E - 014

Stripper Holder

Stripper holders are newly added to prevent hot roller stripper from coming off of its bracket by jammed paper.

Part Number A1724203


Model: SDC206/SDC206E Date: April 14, 1998 No: SDC206/E - 014

Savin Corporation Page 2 of 2

Technical Service Operations – P.O. Box 10270, Stamford, Connecticut 06904 --- (203) 967-5000
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#h#NNE NHfFGfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U The chart listed below shows the Last Bulletin
####+)78)82)6#FJNJfFJNJ) Number issued for the A172/A199 series.
####6-'3,#%(+%+1#'1.14#IENJfIFNJ Bulletin Cross Reference
####7%:-2#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ Ricoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.
Gestetner 001
Ricoh 021
Savin 015
Note: This copy intended as master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SUBJECT: OPERATION PANEL / OPTICS SECTION


PARTS
GENERAL:

The following parts corrections are being issued for all A172/A199 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1721480 A1727357 Operation Panel Lower Cover 1 17 3
A1721471 A1721474 Sheet OP-2 1 17 27
A1721496 A1721499 Sheet 1 17 29

REFERENCE
NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1721471 Cap 4 17 40
A1091874 Rear Scanner Bracket (115V) 1 17 31

REFERENCE
NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1721503 LCD Harness (A172) 1 17 11
A1721533 LCD Harness (A199) 1 17 11
A1727380 SCU Harness 1 17 19

NOTE: The LCD Harnesses for the A172/A199 are without a Ferrite Core.
The SCU Harness is separated from Item 37

Continued...

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 - 001
Page 2 of 2

Operation Panel (A172/A199)

37

37

103

103
Optics Section 1 (A172/A199)

31
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NNF NHfFGfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#FJNJfFJNJ)
####6-'3,#%(+%+1#'1.14#IENJfIFNJ
####7%:-2#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ
Note: This copy intended as master original

SUBJECT: IPU MODIFICATION


for reproduction of additional bulletins.


GENERAL:

PARTS
To improve noise suppression the following components have been changed. The part number of the IPU
Board has also been changed. The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all A172/A199 Parts
Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NEW PART DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
NO. NO.
A1725242 A1725252 IPU Board 1-1 27 7
16303472 Resistor 4.7kohm 1/10w 51 - 50 1 121 176
16303821 Resistor 820ohm 1/10w (R325) 0-1 121 197
Resistor 6.8kohm 1/16w 1-0 121 187
16343301 Resistor 3.3kohm 1/16w (R326) 0-1 121 198
16061072 Capacitor 100pF 10V 1-0 121 199

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have the new style Parts installed during
production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 2606 AB4711XXXX
Gestetner 2606e AB6711XXXX
Savin SDC206 5A9711XXXX
Savin SDC206E 5A8711XXXX
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A7137110001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A7127110001

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf#%EMM#g#NNG NHfFGfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#FJNJfFJNJ)
####6-'3,#%(+%+1#'1.14#IENJfIFNJ
####7%:-2#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ
Note: This copy intended as master original

SUBJECT: HOT ROLLER DAMAGE


for reproduction of additional bulletins.


GENERAL:

PARTS
To prevent jammed paper from damaging the Hot Roller, the Slider Hot Roller Strippers have been modified
and Stripper Holders have been added. The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all A172/A199
Parts Catalogs.

STRIPPER HOLDER

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1094204 A1724205 Slider Hot Roller Stripper 1-1 1 79 5
A1724203 Stripper Holder 0-6 63 1
NOTE: We recommend you replace both pieces as a set (i.e.: The Slider Hot Roller Stripper and the
Stripper Holder)

UNITS AFFECTED:

All copiers manufactured after the Serial Number listed below, will have the new style parts installed during
production.
MODEL SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 2606 AB4711XXXX
Gestetner 2606E AB6711XXXX
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A7137100001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A7127110001
Savin SDC206E 5A8711XXXX
Savin SDC206 5A9711XXXX

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NNH NIfEHfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%(+%+1#'1.14#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7'(FNJ


PARTS
SUBJECT: CYAN TONER SCATTERING IN PRINTER MODE
Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SYMPTOM:
Cyan toner scattered around the text and the edge of solid images in print mode.

CAUSE:
The Pre Transfer Lamp (PTL), which emits red light, is blocked by cyan toner. The electrical potential of the
image area does not drop while the potential on the bare drum surface drops. Therefore, some toner is
attracted to the bare drum surface. VD drops to the bare drum potential level, however VL does not drop to
the same level because the PTL light is blocked by cyan toner (See figure below). The symptom is exhibited
when the amount of toner on the drum, Mass Area (M/A), is too large. The symptom is seen only in the print
mode since the maximum amount of toner on the drum is higher compared to that of the copy mode.

Note: The A109 has a higher M/A for cyan, therefore the level of cyan toner scattering in the A109 is
less than what may be encountered with the A172/A199.

SOLUTION:
1. The PTL has been changed to emit a stronger red light.

2. The ACC target for the printer mode has been modified to decrease the maximum amount of toner on the
drum. The IPU ROM revision G (file name 5206IP1G.exe), can be downloaded through the BBS system.

NOTE: For more information about the Ricoh Technical Services BBS, order the Guide To Operation
(P/N BBS00001) through normal NSPC Channels.

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES #'328630#23T#FLH


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 004
Page 2 of 2

The following part correction are be issued for all Controller Interface Type C (A583) Parts Catalog Sections.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A0305243 A3995243 PTL Lamp 1 3 5

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style PTL Lamp installed
during production.
MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER
Gestetner 2606E AB67030001
Gestetner 2606 AB4703XXXX
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A7137030001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A7127030001
Savin SDC206E 5A87030001
Savin SDC206 5A97030001

NOTE: Disconnecting the PTL can eliminate the cyan toner scattering symptom, however magenta toner
blasting in 2C mode may occur. This is because the intention of the PTL is to cause minor cyan
toner scattering, which will repel the scattered magenta toner.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NNI NIfFLfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: PAPER EXIT SENSOR


Note: This copy is intended as a master original

GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.


PARTS
The Photointerrupter used for the Paper Exit Sensor has been modified to prevent breakage. The new
Sensor has the connector affixed to the Sensor PCB by cement. The following part update is being issued
for all A172 and A199 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AW020056 A1725420 Photointerrupter 1→1 1 79 25

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Photointerrupter
installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER


Gestetner 2606E AB68020001
Gestetner 2606 AB48020001
Ricoh 5206 A7128020001
Ricoh 5106 A7138010001
Savin SDC206E 5A88010001
Savin SDC206 5A98010001

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES '328630#23T#FLM


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NNJ NJfFGfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: COLOR MIS-REGISTRATION


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

MECHANICAL
SYMPTOM:
The copy produced has vertical mis-alignment of colors in the sub-scan direction.

CAUSE:
1. The Drive Belt tension is mis-adjusted.
2. The Set Screw for the Transfer Belt Gear is loose.
3. The Pressure Springs (AA063491) have become weak, allowing the Transfer Belt to slip.

SOLUTION:


Perform the following steps:

COPY QUALITY
1.

Loosen then tighten this screw


to correct the Transfer Drive
Belt tension. Replace the Belt if
it shows signs of wear.

Set Screw is located behind this frame.


2.

Tighten this set-screw.

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES '328630#23T#FMN


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 006
Page 2 of 2

3. Replace the Front and Rear Pressure Springs (AA063491)

REFERENCE
PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AA063491 Pressure Spring 2 69 21

TEMPORARY COUNTERMEASURE:
Carefully stretch the Pressure Springs so they apply more pressure.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NNK NJfFIfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: LUBRICANT BAR & RELEASE SOLENOID


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
The following Parts updates are being issued for all A172 and A199 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1726305 A2426305 Lubricant Bar 1→1 0 75 35
A1723602 A2423602 Lubricant Bar 1→1 0 51 29
A0966315 A1766315 Release Solenoid 1→1 0 43 11

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES '328630#23T#FME


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NNL NKfNKfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: IMPROVED TONER


Note: This copy is intended as a master original

GENERAL:


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

COPY QUALITY
This bulletin explains about the new Type “J” toner for A172 and A199 copiers. Also provided are the
necessary actions to be taken when the old type toner is switched to the new type toner.

NOTE: More detailed information regarding the availability of this product


will be announced in the near future.

1. Purpose of the new toner

The chargeability has been stabilized to minimize toner scattering inside the machine and to maintain image
density (reduce density fluctuation).

2. Necessary action when replacing the developer

For units which have the Vcnt Correction by number of scans switched “On” to compensate for decrease in
chargeability (See AFICIO COLOR 5106/5206 – 018 issued 12/22/97 or Savin FEB SDC206/206E-006
issued 10/22/97), the image density may become lower with the new toner since chargeability will be
stabilized.
Depending on the type of toner in the toner tank, and the setting of the Vcnt Correction by number of scans,
one of the following actions will be required when replacing the developer. The Vcnt Correction by number of
scans can be switched “Off” by SP Adjustment P.16 Other Adjustment No.1. The default setting is “Off”
(data in SP Mode : 00000).

a) When installing a new machine using new toner, do not switch “On” the Vcnt Correction by number of
scans.
b) When all the toner in the toner tank unit is new type, check the Vcnt Correction by number of scans and
switch “Off” if it is “On”.
c) When all the toner in the toner tank unit is old type, do not change the setting of Vcnt Correction by
number of scans.
d) When the toner in the toner tank unit is some new type mixed with some old type, do not change the
setting of Vcnt Correction by number of scans.
e) When type of toner in the toner tank unit is unknown, do not change the setting of Vcnt Correction by
number of scans.

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 293


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 008
Page 2 of 3

3. Troubleshooting procedure for insufficient ID max (or excessive ID max)

As the new Type “J” toner replaces the old Type “F” toner in the developer, the history of the Vcnt Correction
for the old toner remains, therefore the toner density correction may be slightly excessive and result in toner
density slightly less than that originally with the old toner. (The opposite may occur if the toner is switched
from new type to old type.)

In most cases, a change in image density can be corrected by performing ACC or Printer Calibration,
however it may cause a service call depending on the customer.

If insufficient ID max (or excessive ID max) is encountered and the cause is identified as the switching of
toner from old type to new type (or from new type to old type) perform the procedure outlined below:

Insufficient ID max
1. Check the following items.
1.1. The image density remains light, even if the ACC or Calibration is performed.
1.2. Process Control Self-check is set (SP Special Feature page1 Auto Process Control Self-check set
to PID), and has been successful. If the Self-check has not been successful, find and correct the
cause.
1.3. Vt (TD Sensor Output) does not vary greatly from the Vref (judgement standard |Vt -Vref| ≤ 0.2V) If
Vt varies greatly from Vref, make copies of the C4 test chart until Vt falls within an acceptable
standard.
1.4. TC Correction Threshold (SP Special Feature page1) is reset.
th
1.5. The density of the ACC Pattern 10 level is equally as low. (There is no need to run the ACC.)
1.6. Even if the IDmax and the Shadow setting in the printer gamma Correction are adjusted, the image
density remains light.
2. If the Vcnt Correction is on (SP Adjustment page 16 No. 1: 00001), switch it “Off” (00000).
3. Change the Vref for the colors with low density from the current Vref - 0.35V. (See Note *1)
(On SP Adjustment page 12, input Vref - 0.35 for the Toner Sensor Control Target.)
4. After inputting the value, confirm that the setting has been changed by looking at the SP Data Output for
page 1 on the display. (See Note *2)
5. After the adjustment, watch the Vt on the SP Data Output page1 display and make copies of the C-4 test
chart (A3/FC mode, approx. 10 copies) until the Vt stabilizes at |Vref - Vt| ≤ 0.2V. (See Note *3)
6. If the ID max is still insufficient, set SP Adjustments page 4, Toner Max M/A target(s) to 1.3.
7. If necessary, perform the ACC and the Printer Gamma Adjustment.

Excessive ID max
1. Check the following items.
1.1. Even if the ACC or Calibration is done, the image density remains dark.
1.2. Process Control Self-check is set, and has been successful. If the Self-check has not been
successful, find and correct the cause.
1.3. The TD Sensor Output Vt does not vary greatly from the Vref. (Standard |Vt -Vref| ≤ 0.2V) If Vt
varies greatly from Vref, make copies of C4 test chart until Vt falls within an acceptable standard.
th
1.4. The density of the ACC Pattern 10 level is equally as dark. (There is no need to run the ACC.)
1.5. Even if the IDmax and the Shadow setting in the printer gamma Correction are adjusted, the image
density remains dark.
2. Change the Vref for the colors with high density from the current Vref + 0.35V. (On SP Adjustment P. 12,
input Vref + 0.35V for the Toner Sensor Control Target.) (See Note *1)
3. After inputting the value, confirm that the setting has changed by looking at the SP Data Output Page 1
on the display. (See Note *2)
4. For the affected colors, make five A3 sky shot copies (ten copies for A4). (See Note *3)
5. After the adjustment, watch the Vt on the SP Data Output P.1 display and make copies of the C-4 chart
(A3/FC mode, approx. 10 copies) until the Vt stabilizes at |Vref - Vt|≤0.2V.
6. Wait 5 minutes, then perform the process control Self-check.
7. If necessary, perform the ACC and the Printer Gamma Adjustment.
Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 008
Page 3 of 3

NOTES:
(*1) If the input value is the same as the Toner Sensor Control Target, raise or lower the input value by
0.01V. (If the value input is the same as that indicated, then the adjustment is not recognized.)

(*2) The value displayed may be 0.01~0.02 V less than that input. If the Vref value is lower than 2.15V or
higher than 2.85V, it will automatically be adjusted to 2.15V (lower level) or 2.85V (higher level) after
copies have been made.

(*3) The machine may enter the forced toner supply mode when copies are being made but please wait until
it finishes.

Remarks
(1) In cases when the machine condition is poor (such as process control does not succeed or the
developer gamma is more than 5), replace the developer and follow the “Necessary action when
replacing the developer” procedure reflected in this bulletin.
(2) For machines connected to a controller, perform Calibration as necessary.
(3) If the toner max M/A target (SP Adjustment page 4) is changed, reset it to the default setting (1.0
2
mg/cm ) before performing any of the provided procedures.

4. Identification of new toner

Company Toner Name


Ricoh Ricoh Color Toner Type J Black
Ricoh Color Toner Type J Yellow
Ricoh Color Toner Type J Magenta
Ricoh Color Toner Type J Cyan
Savin / Gestetner SVN SC106/SDC206 BLK Type J
SVN SC106/SDC206 YLW Type J
SVN SC106/SDC206 MAG Type J
SVN SC106/SDC206 CYN Type J

The new Type toner “J” was implemented for Savin beginning with the April, 98 production, however the
cartridge graphics and product codes were not changed until the June production. The April and May
productions which is the Type “J” toner, is identified / differentiated with a red lot number printed on the
cartridge carton. See the following chart for details on toner identification:

Gestetner/Savin TONER PRODUCT CODE Ricoh TONER PRODUCT CODES


Toner Type “F” Type “J” Type “J” Type “F” Type “J” Type “J”
Color Current (April/May) June and Current (April/May) June and
Red Lot # onward Red Lot # onward
Black 5221 5221 5242 889755 889755 887813
Yellow 5222 5222 5243 889756 889756 887814
Magenta 5223 5223 5244 889757 889757 887815
Cyan 5224 5224 5245 889758 889758 887816
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NNM NKfFFfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: OPERATION PANEL HARNESS – IPU 2 / IPU HARNESS


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
GENERAL:
The Operation Panel Harness – IPU 2 was incorrectly indexed as number 16 and should be 33. The IPU
Harness was indexed 33 and should have been number 16. Please note that the IPU Harness (revised
index 16) has been discontinued. The IPU Harness had been used in production to facilitate adjustment.

The following parts corrections are being issued for all A172 and A199 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
PART DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE WRONG CORRECT
NUMBER ITEM ITEM
A1725393 Operation Panel Harness – IPU 2 1 27 16 33
A1725326 IPU Harness 1→0 27 33 16 *

* The IPU Harness (Item 16) has been discontinued.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 296


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NEN NKfFFfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: IPU BOARD ROM


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
GENERAL:
The IPU Board ROM has been modified. The following is a description of the changes to the ROM.

The Dither Processing method for Printer Mode has been modified to improve jagged image (the outline of
characters is not straight) and reproduction of fine straight lines in the sub scan direction.

Current Dither Processing in Printer Mode


In Printer Mode, 2 x 1 dot Dither Processing is always used. This Dither Processing was originally designed
to attach more importance to gradation than resolution. It evaluates the video signal level of the two pixels
next to each other and converts the data as follows:

Original Data Printed Data


Video data in the left pixel Any Doubled data is printed
Video data in the right pixel Data ≤ 128 No data is printed
Data > 128 (Data – 128) x 2 is printed
NOTE: Maximum printed data is 255.

With the current Dither Processing method, it is possible that the data in the right pixels are lost, resulting in
a jagged image or fine lines in the sub scan direction are not reproduced.

New Dither Processing in Printer Mode


With the new IPU ROM, Dither Processing in Printer Mode has been changed as follows:

Original Data Printed Data


Video data in the left pixel Data ≤ 32 Doubled data is printed
Data > 32 Original data + 32
Video data in the right pixel Data ≤ 32 No data is printed
Data > 32 Original data –32 is printed
NOTE: Maximum printed data is 255.

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 296


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 010
Page 2 of 2

Example

Video data before Dither Processing

120 115 110 118 125 130


125 118 113 120 130 135
128 120 117 123 132 139

Video data after current Dither Processing

240 0 220 0 250 4


250 0 226 0 255 14
255 0 234 0 255 22

Video data after new Dither Processing

152 83 142 86 157 98


157 86 145 88 162 103
160 88 149 91 164 107

The following part update is being issued for all A172 and A199 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
A1725207G A1725207H IC – UVEPROM 4M X16 120NS - 121 12

The IPU Board ROM revision H (file name 5206IP1H.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical
Services BBS.

NOTE: For more information about the Ricoh Technical Services BBS, order the Guide to Operation (P/N
BBS00001) through normal NSPC channels.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style IPU Board ROM
installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER


Gestetner 2606E AB6805xxxx
Gestetner 2606 AB4805xxxx
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A712804xxxx
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A713805xxxx
Savin SDC206E 5A88040001
Savin SDC206 5A9805xxxx
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#h#NEE NKfFKfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: SC321 USING FIERY & MISFEEDS FROM BYPASS


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

FIRMWARE
SYMPTOM:
1. Intermittent SC321 codes only when in Printer Mode (using Fiery).
2. Paper is misfed from bypass table with A3 paper, ACS mode, and second side of duplex copy.

CAUSE:
1. Electrical noise interfering with the Transfer Belt start signal.
2. The paper buckle at the Registration Rollers becomes smaller due to the stiffness of paper. During this
period, the copy paper fed from the bypass table waits to start. This means that if stiff paper waits longer
at the Registration Rollers, the buckle will become smaller.

The problem occurs only with the ACS mode, bypass feed, A3 paper and second side of duplex copy, for
the following reasons:

1. ACS mode and bypass feed


In the ACS mode, copy paper starts to be fed toward the Registration Rollers when the development
process starts. This is because the paper from the bypass table must meet the earlier registration
start timing of black and white copy. The waiting time for paper at registration for a full color copy is
longer than that for a black and white copy.

2. Paper
The development time with A3 paper is longer than with A4 paper side ways.
This means that the waiting time for A3 paper is longer than that of A4 paper.

3. Second Side of Duplex Copy


When the second side is copied, the paper has already passed the fusing section. The paper with
silicone oil from the fusing section makes the friction between the feed and reverse roller less. This
means that the paper slips between the two rollers easier than the paper without silicone oil.

SOLUTION:
1. Improved software timing tolerance to avoid electrical interference.
2. The software has been changed as shown in the diagrams below. These changes ensure that paper is
fed through the Registration Rollers even if the paper buckle is small.

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 297


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 011
Page 2 of 2

Original

Bypass Feed Clutch

Registration Clutch

Modified

Bypass Feed Clutch

Registration Clutch
20 ± 5 ms

30 ± 10 ms

GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A172 and A199 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
PART NO. DESCRIPTION OLD SUFFIX NEW SUFFIX QTY PAGE ITEM
A1725114 IC Main Control 10 E F 1 99 27
A1725115 IC Main Control 20 E F 1 99 28
A1725129 IC Main Control 30 E F 1 99 4

The IC Main Control ROM’s revision F (file name 5206321F.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh
Technical Services BBS. These ROM’s can also be ordered through normal NSPC channels.

NOTE: For more information about the Ricoh Technical Services BBS, order the Guide to Operation (P/N
BBS00001) through normal NSPC channels.

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style IC Main Control
ROM’s installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER


Gestetner 2602E AB68030001
Gestetner 2606 AB48030001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A7128030001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A7138020001
Savin SDC206E 5A88020001
Savin SDC206 5A98030001
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NEF NLfEGfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ


SUBJECT: BANDING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Note: This copy is intended as a master original

COPY QUALITY
Scope:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

This Technical Service Bulletin was designed to assist in quick identification and resolution of operator to
non-operator direction banding. This Technical Service Bulletin is divided into 3 sections. See below:

1. Random Banding: Bands can appear in random areas of the copy/print and can be
random widths.
2. Fixed Banding: Band will appear only in one specific area measured from the lead edge of the
copy/print.
3. Pitch Banding: Bands appear on the entire length of the copy/print and are the same width and
the same distance apart.

RANDOM BANDING:

Possible Causes Possible Solutions


1. Discharge Rollers in Transfer Belt Unit is not 1. Replace Bushings (AA084044) or Ball Bearings
grounded. (08053482). Check resistance from Discharge Roller to
frame.
2. Poor Drum Ground. 2. Reform internal Drum Ground Contacts/Replace Drum
Shaft Holder (A1094653).
3. Transfer Belt receptacle (AD021103) 3. *Insufficient or too much conductive grease/receptacle
random HV leak. failure.
4. Transfer Roller receptacle (AD021095) 4. *Insufficient or too much conductive grease/receptacle
Random HV leak. failure.
5. Transfer belt drive coupling is loose. 5. Tighten the set screw on the Transfer Belt Unit drive
coupling.
6. Transfer belt drive coupling. 6. Spring-loaded area is bound and not engaging properly.
7. The inside of the Transfer Belt is dirty. 7. Clean the inside of the Transfer Belt.
8. Dirty Transfer Unit Drive Rollers. 8. Clean Transfer Belt Unit Drive Rollers.
9. Improper timing pulley tension (AB030445). 9. Loosen then tighten the pulley set screw.
(allows the spring to set the tension)
10. The timing pulley is binding. 10. Lube timing pulley (AB030445) or replace.
11. The Tightener Bracket is bent. 11. Replace the Tightener Bracket (A1094676).
12. Transfer Roller Bias is improperly set. 12. Set Transfer Roller voltage as per factory data sheet.
13. The Transfer Roller is worn. 13. Replace the Transfer Roller (A1096200).

* NOTE: Do not put conductive grease in the receptacles.


Only put a small amount of conductive grease on the end of the Transfer Rollers/Sleeve Rollers.

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 299


Technical Service Bulletin A172/A199 – 012
Page 2 of 2

Fixed Banding:

Possible Causes Possible Solutions


1. 270 mm from the lead edge. 1. Replace the gear 80z Drum Drive Gear (AB013912).
2. 320 mm from the lead edge. 2. Replace the Transfer Belt Drive Motor.

Pitch Banding:

Possible Causes Possible Solutions


1. 0.8 mm 1. Laser Path Mirror (A1092131) vibration.
2. 0.9 ~1.25 2. OPC Cleaning Unit vibration, possible solutions below:
Replace A1093647 - gear 16/17z worn
Replace A1093616 – gear 16z worn
Replace A1093646 – gear 16z worn
Replace A1093615 – Cleaning Brush Bushing worn
3. 1.4 mm 3. Correct the Transfer drive timing belt tension.
4. 1.9 mm 4. Replace the Bias Roller Idle gear (A1093616).
5. 15 mm 5. Gear 80z Drum Drive Gear (AB013912).
6. 20 mm 6. Cleaning Brush Rotation problem.
7. 30 mm 7. Replace the Gear 80z Drum Drive Gear (AB013912).
8. 375 mm 8. Replace the OPC drum.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#h#NEF#6)-779)#+ NEfNJfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: BANDING TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE


Note: This copy is intended as a master original

Scope:


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

This Technical Service Bulletin was designed to assist in quick identification and resolution of operator to

COPY QUALITY
non-operator direction banding. This Technical Service Bulletin is divided into 3 sections. See below:

1. Random Banding: Bands can appear in random areas of the copy/print and can be
random widths.
2. Fixed Banding: Band will appear only in one specific area measured from the lead edge of the
copy/print.
3. Pitch Banding: Bands appear on the entire length of the copy/print and are the same width and
the same distance apart.

RANDOM BANDING:

Possible Causes Possible Solutions


1. Discharge Rollers in Transfer Belt Unit is 1. Replace Bushings (AA084044) or Ball Bearings
not grounded. (08053482). Check resistance from Discharge
Roller to frame.
2. Poor Drum Ground. 2. Reform internal Drum Ground Contacts/Replace
Drum Shaft Holder (A1094653).
3. Transfer Belt receptacle (AD021103) 3. *Insufficient or too much conductive
random HV leak. grease/receptacle failure.
4. Transfer Roller receptacle (AD021095) 4. *Insufficient or too much conductive
Random HV leak. grease/receptacle failure.
5. Transfer belt drive coupling is loose. 5. Tighten the set screw on the Transfer Belt Unit drive
coupling.
6. Transfer belt drive coupling. 6. Spring-loaded area is bound and not engaging
properly.
7. The inside of the Transfer Belt is dirty. 7. Clean the inside of the Transfer Belt.
8. Dirty Transfer Unit Drive Rollers. 8. Clean Transfer Belt Unit Drive Rollers.
9. Improper timing pulley tension (AB030445). 9. Loosen then tighten the pulley set screw.
(allows the spring to set the tension)
10. The timing pulley is binding. 10. Lube timing pulley (AB030445) or replace.
11. The Tightener Bracket is bent. 11. Replace the Tightener Bracket (A1094676).
12. Transfer Roller Bias is improperly set. 12. Set Transfer Roller voltage as per factory data
sheet.
13. The Transfer Roller is worn. 13. Replace the Transfer Roller (A1096200).

* NOTE: Do not put conductive grease in the receptacles.


Only put a small amount of conductive grease on the end of the Transfer Rollers/Sleeve Rollers.
Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 319


Technical Service Bulletin A172/A199 – 012 Reissue +
Page 2 of 2

Fixed Banding:

Possible Causes Possible Solutions


1. 270 mm from the lead edge. + 1. Replace the gear 112Z Drum Drive Gear
(AB030527).
2. 320 mm from the lead edge. 2. Replace the Transfer Belt Drive Motor.

Pitch Banding:

Possible Causes Possible Solutions


1. 0.8 mm 1. Laser Path Mirror (A1092131) vibration.
2. 0.9 ~1.25 2. OPC Cleaning Unit vibration, possible solutions
below:
Replace A1093647 – gear 16/17Z worn
Replace A1093616 – gear 16Z worn
Replace A1093646 – gear 16Z worn
Replace A1093615 – Cleaning Brush Bushing worn
3. 1.4 mm 3. Correct the Transfer drive timing belt tension.
4. 1.9 mm 4. Replace the Bias Roller Idle gear (A1093616).
5. 15 mm + 5. Gear 112z Drum Drive Gear (AB030527).
6. 20 mm 6. Cleaning Brush Rotation problem.
7. 30 mm + 7. Replace the Gear 112Z Drum Drive Gear
(AB030527).
8. 375 mm 8. Replace the OPC drum.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NEG NLfFKfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: COPY QUALITY LEAD TO TRAIL EDGE LINES


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:
Lines lead to trail edge on the copy.

CAUSE:
Normal wear of mechanical parts.

SOLUTION:
COMMON CAUSES IDENTIFIED VIA THE HOTLINE:

Inspect the following parts for wear and replace or adjust if necessary:
1. Drum Lubricant Bar.
2. Transfer Belt Lubricant Bar.
3. Transfer roller Lubricant Bar.
4. Transfer Roller Cleaning Blade.
5. Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade.
6. Transfer Roller.
7. Drum Cleaning Blade.
8. Drum.
9. Transfer Belt Lubricant Bar Solenoid tension excessive.
10. Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit Lower Mylar Linkage is binding.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 302


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NEH NLfFKfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: OPERATION PANEL DISPLAYS METRIC SIZES


Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.


SYMPTOM:

ELECTRICAL
Operation panel displays metric paper sizes.

CAUSE:
The Length Unit has been improperly set.

SOLUTION:
1. Enter Service Program Modes.
2. Select SP Special Features, Page (9) Nine.
3. Change the length Unit setting from millimeters to inches.
4. Turn the machine “Off” and then “On”.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 302


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NEI NLfFKfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: OPC DRUM LINES


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

COPY QUALITY
SYMPTOM:
Premature Drum and / or Drum Cleaning Blade wear.
Copy Quality Symptom: Lines lead to trial edge on the copy.

CAUSE:
Incorrect drum cleaning blade and / or OPC Drum installed.

Due to differences in OPC and Cleaning Blade materials used in the A109 and A172/A199 machines, the
following parts numbers should only be used with the corresponding model machines.

SOLUTION:
A109 machines only use: Drum P/N A1099510 with
Cleaning Blade P/N A1093598 & Cleaning Brush P/N A1093603.

A172/A199 machines only use: Drum P/N A1729510 with


Cleaning Blade A1723598 & Cleaning Brush P/N A1723601.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 302


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NEJ NMfFIfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: A172/A199 SERVICE TIPS


Note: This copy is intended as a master original

MECHANICAL
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

SCOPE:
In our continuing effort to assist field technicians in resolving service-related issues, TSC is providing the
attached A172/A199 Service Tips.

This information will assist you to quickly isolate possible causes of copy quality related service calls and as
a result decrease unnecessary parts replacement.


The data / measurements provided are not factory Specifications, but reflect the average voltage measured

ELECTRICAL
on several test units.

The Service Tips are divided into the following sections:

• Checking Drum Ground


• Confirming Charge Current
• Confirming Charge Grid Voltage
• Charge Grid PWM Check Procedure


Development Check Points
• Confirming Development Bias Voltage

COPY QUALITY
• Transfer Belt Area
• Confirming Transfer Belt Bias Voltage
• Confirming Transfer Roller Bias Voltage
• Paper Feed Check Points
• Fusing Unit Check Points

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 308


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 2 of 17

• Checking Drum Ground

Meter lead
Meter lead
2

Meter lead

Drum Shaft
Holder Drum Shaft
(A1094653) Terminal 3
Includes Drum (A1094655)
ground
Bearings

Drum grounding
tabs (inside drum)
CN BP on the High
4 Voltage Supply Board
-B

1. Confirm that the Drum Shaft is grounded: Set your meter to the 200VDC Scale and check if there is
voltage present on the Drum Shaft during a copy cycle. A normal reading is less than .5 VDC.

2. If you are reading more than .5 volts at the Drum Shaft, then take a voltage reading at CN BP (#4
above) on the High Voltage Supply Board – B. If this reading is more than .5 volts, then replace the
High Voltage Supply Board – B. If this reading is less than .5 volts then check and or replace the Drum
Shaft Holder and or the Drum Shaft Terminal.

3. Confirm that the drum is grounded to the Drum Shaft: Set your meter to the 20Ω Scale and check
resistance between the drum shaft and the edge of the drum (exposed metal). A normal reading is 5Ω
or less. If this reading is more than 5Ω then clean and or reform the Drum Grounding tabs (#3 above).

NOTE1: To avoid copy quality symptoms, check that the drum is properly grounded every other PM.

NOTE2: To avoid copy quality symptoms, make sure you replace the drum lubricant bar (A1723602)
at 40k scans.
Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 3 of 17

• Confirming Charge Current


CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE ! Use caution when working in this area
Do not touch the meter, meter leads, or allow the leads to touch frame ground

1. Set up a meter to read current and connect it in series as pictured below.

Insert Red meter lead


into open CN in
Charge Power Pack

1. Unplug white CN from


Charge Power Pack.
2. Insert Black meter Lead
into white CN.

2. Make one single color (Black) copy and observe that the meter indicates approximately 450µ amps.
(700µ amps. for A109 machine)

3. If adjustment is required, adjust VR C as pictured below:

VR C

If the adjustment cannot be achieved, replace the following:


1. DC Power Pack - C\G - AZ300042.
2. Charge Corona Unit - AD004087.
3. Charge Corona Receptacle - A1092300.

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 4 of 17

• Confirming Charge Grid Voltage

CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE ! Use caution when working in this area


Do not touch the meter, meter leads, or allow the leads to touch frame ground

1. Enter SP Mode Special Features, page 1


2. Turn Process control OFF, by selecting RESET, under Auto Process Control Self Check as illustrated
below:

####63#02'(6 #&RS\#LQ#63 ########,QGH[


?0HQX!
6HOHFW#IXQFWLRQ#RU#LWHP
?7!#63#6SHFLDO#)HDWXUH Select Reset
$XWR#3URFHVV#&RQWURO#VHOI#FKHFN #3$*(#4

#######3,' 5HVHW

3. Enter SP Mode Adjustment page 4 Setting for P-con OFF Mode. Note the original setting of BK under
the VG column, then set it to -400 volts as illustrated below:

NOTE: Setting VG to a level other than -400, can cause an incorrect adjustment.

#####63#02'(6 &RS\#LQ#63 #######,QGH[


?0HQX!
6HOHFW#IXQFWLRQ#RU#LWHP Adjust BK to
?4!#63#$GMXVWPHQW - 400 volts
3$*(#7
6HWWLQJ#IRU#30FRQ#2))#0RGH
VG VB

BK -400

Y
M

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 5 of 17

4. Connect a meter, black lead to frame ground, red lead to the grid connector on the C/G Power Pack.
Set the meter to read DC voltage greater than 400 volts as pictured:

0#733

Black meter Red meter lead to


lead to frame grid CN, behind the
ground black HV
transformer

5. Make a single color (black) copy and observe that the meter indicates -400 volts.
6. If adjustment is required, adjust VR G on the C/G Power Pack as pictured below.

NOTE: It is necessary to slightly / reposition the C/G Power Pack to adjust this VR.

VR-G

When adjustment is complete, reset all SP modes to previous settings (Auto Process Control to “PID” & VG
for Black to original setting).

NOTE: If the adjustment cannot be achieved, leave the SP setting as specified on the first page of this
procedure (confirming charge grid) and proceed to the next page for checking the Grid PWM signal.

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 6 of 17

• Charge Grid PWM Check Procedure


CN 701 - A1
Grid PWM
Signal from CN 504-A14
Main Board Grid PWM
Signal from
Main Board
Interface Board-1

CN 709 - B5
Charge Grid
PWM output
from Interface Main Board
Board 1 to the
DC Power Pack

Charge Grid PWM circuit

NOTE: Before proceeding with these checks, confirm that the SP Modes are set as
specified on page 4 of 17 and set your meter to greater than 5VDC.

1. Check CN 504 - A14, on the Main Board for approximately 5.02 volts while making a single color (black)
copy. If the voltage is not within this range, replace the Main Board. If this check is normal, proceed to
the next step.
2. Check CN 701 - A1, on Interface Board - 1 while making a single color (black) copy. Confirm that the
voltage level is approximately the same voltage as above (5.02VDC). If the voltage is not within this range,
replace or repair the harness between the Main Board and Interface Board - 1. If this check is normal,
proceed to the next step.
3. Check CN 709 - B5 on Interface Board - 1 while making a single color (black) copy confirm that the
voltage level is approximately the same voltage as above (5.02VDC). If the voltage is not within this
range, replace Interface Board - 1

PWM at CN 504 - A14


VG Set To CN 701 - B5
CN 709 - B5
NOTE: -400 to -800 is
provided to illustrate PWM -400 5.02
range -500 4.13
-600 3.29
-700 2.46
-800 1.62

NOTE: If one of the components above is found defective, replace the part then confirm Charge Grid
voltage by following the procedure on page 4of 17 and page 5 of 17 (Confirming Charge Grid).

When adjustment is complete, reset all SP modes to previous settings


(Auto Process Control to “PID” & VG for Black to original setting).

If the indicated voltage cannot be achieved, replace the following parts:


1. DC Power Pack - C\G - AZ300042.
2. Charge Corona Unit - AD004087.
3. Charge Corona Receptacle - A1092300.
Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 7 of 17

• Development Check Points

2
1

1. Magenta Banding – Install the Ball Bearing 6x10x3 (08053496) as shown, on the magenta sleeve roller
bias pin.

2. Poor copy quality - Apply conductive grease KS660 SHIN-ETSU (G0049668) to the sleeve Roller bias
pins. Do not apply the conductive grease into the HV receptacles.

3. When vacuuming the Development Units – Hold the development unit casing to avoid damaging the
TD sensors. Do this or remove the sensors.

4. To avoid damaging the TD sensors - Ensure that all filters are replaced at the recommended PM
interval. Clogged filters cause the temperature to increase around the TD sensors and can result in
erratic TD sensor operation.

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 8 of 17

• Confirming Development Bias Voltage

CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE ! Use caution when working in this area

1. Enter SP Mode Special Features, page 1.


2. Turn Process control OFF, by selecting RESET, for Process Control Self Check as illustrated below:

####63#02'(6 #&RS\#LQ#63 ########,QGH[


?0HQX!
6HOHFW#IXQFWLRQ#RU#LWHP

?7!#63#6SHFLDO#)HDWXUH Select ##3$*(


$XWR#3URFHVV#&RQWURO#6HOI#FKHFN reset

#######3,' ######5HVHW

3. Enter SP Mode Adjustment page 4 Setting for P-con OFF Mode.

NOTE: The original setting of BK under the VB column, then set it to -400 volts as illustrated below:

#####63#02'(6 &RS\#LQ#63 #######,QGH[

?0HQX!
6HOHFW#IXQFWLRQ#RU#LWHP

?4!#63#$GMXVWPHQW Adjust to 3$*(#7


6HWWLQJ#IRU#30FRQ#2))#0RGH - 400 volts

VG VB LD

BK xxx -400 xxx

Y xxx xxx xxx

M xxx xxx xxx

C xxx xxx xxx

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 9 of 17

1. Connect a meter as pictured and set it to read greater than 400 volts DC voltage.
2. Make a single color (black) copy and observe that your meter indicates -400 volts.
3. If adjustment is required, adjust VR60.

Black meter Red meter lead to


lead to frame Development Bias
ground. CN (B4).

DO NOT
ADJUST

VR60

NOTE: When Adjustment Is Complete, Reset All SP Modes To Previous Settings.

If adjustment cannot be achieved, the following are possible causes:

• High Voltage Supply - B


• Development Bias Terminal - C
• Development Bias Terminal - M
• Development Bias Terminal - Y
• Development Bias Terminal - K
• Interface Board - 2
• Main Control board

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 10 of 17

• Transfer Belt Area


4

3
2
1
Transfer Belt 5
Roller bias pin.

1. Improper Color Alignments – Loosen then tighten the circled screw to ensure that the Transfer Unit
Drive Belt is properly tensioned.
2. Improper Color Alignments – Ensure that the Phillips head set screw is tight.
3. Improper Color Alignments – Replace the springs (AA063491) to ensure that the Transfer belt does
not slip. See TSB - 011 for more information.
4. Ensure that the discharge rollers are grounded to the Transfer Belt Unit frame. If not, replace the
bushings (AA084044) and / or the bearings (08053482).
5. Apply conductive grease KS660 SHIN-ETSU (G0049668) to the Transfer Belt Roller bias pin (T1).

NOTE: Also apply this grease to the Transfer Roller bias pin (T2).

6. “Field Fix” For Premature Transfer Belt Failure – Adjust the OFF position of the Lubricant Bar by
using the circled screws. Confirm that the top edge of the Lubricant Bar is aligned with the top edge of
the front frame of the Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit (black plastic).
7. Random Indentations On The Transfer Belt – Check these rails for burrs. Metal filings may fall from
this area. Apply Teflon tape if the surface is rough.

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 11 of 17

• Confirming Transfer Belt Bias Voltage - (T1)


CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE! Use caution when working in this area
Do not touch the meter, meter leads, or allow the leads to touch frame ground

Enter SP Adjustments page 5, note the original setting for 1C First Color, then set 1C First Color to 1430V
(default value) as illustrated below:

######63 &RS\#LQ#63
###,QGH[

?0HQX!
6HOHFW#IXQFWLRQ#RU#LWHP

?4!#63#$GMXVWPHQW
7UDQVIHU#%HOW#%LDV#+)DFH#6LGH=#1RUPDO#+XPLGLW\, PAGE 5

1st color 1430V Adjust


to 1430V

Connect a meter as pictured below:

Insert the Red Meter


Lead into this white
CN. The black lead
goes to Frame
Ground

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 12 of 17

Enter SP Adjustments, page 16 (other SP adjustments). Go to adjustment 13 and change the data to 1.
This disables the Humidity Sensor. For more information, refer to the Service Manual page 4-17.

Enter SP Test Mode page 4, select Output Mode and enter output number 9, then select Start as illustrated
below:

,QSXW#&KHFN Input NO.00

#2XWSXW#&KHFN Output NO.9 ##6WDUW ##6WRS

Lower part of SP Screen Ç Enter Output


Number 9

Monitor the meter reading. Under normal conditions, the meter should indicate 1348 VDC. If the voltage is
not within this range, then adjust VR T1 on the High Voltage Supply Board T1/Pcc/BR. If adjusting VR T1
does not correct the output voltage, then replace the High Voltage Supply Board T1/Pcc/BR. This is a
normal reading because this voltage is set at the factory using a High Voltage Probe. When a High Voltage
Probe is used and SP Adjustments page 5, 1C First Color is set to 1430 (default), then the actual output
voltage is 1430VDC.

VR T1

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 13 of 17

NOTE: Confirm that the voltage at the front of the Transfer Belt Roller is the same (1348VDC). See below

Check Voltage Here

If the voltage is different or erratic as compared to the first check, replace the Transfer Belt Receptacle -
AD021103 and apply conductive grease KS660 SHIN-ETSU (G0049668) to theT2 bias voltage pin.

Return all SP modes to their original settings.

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 14 of 17

• Confirming Transfer Roller Bias - (T2)


CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE ! Use caution when working in this area
Do not touch the meter, meter leads, or allow the leads to touch frame ground

Enter SP Adjustments page 7, note the original setting for 1C Normal Paper then, and set 1C Normal Paper
to 1220V as illustrated below:

#####63#02'(6 &RS\#LQ#63 ########,QGH[

?0HQX!
6HOHFW#IXQFWLRQ#RU#LWHP

?4!#63#$GMXVWPHQW
3$*(#:
7UDQVIHU#5ROOHU#%LDV#+QRUPDO
KXPLGLW\,
1RUPDO#3DSHU Set to 1220

#####4& 1220 xxx xxx xxx xxx

xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx

xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx

xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx

Connect a meter as pictured below:

Black Lead to
frame ground

Red Lead to
T2 output CN

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 15 of 17

Enter SP Adjustments, page 16 (other SP adjustments). Go to adjustment 13 and change the data to 1.
This disables the Humidity Sensor. For more information, refer to the SM page 4-17.

Enter SP Test Mode page 4, select Output Mode and enter output number 31. Then select start as
illustrated below:

?5!#63#7HVW 3$*(#7
xxx xxx

xxx xxx

xxx xxx

xxx xxx

xxx xxx

,QSXW#&KHFN Input NO.00

2XWSXW#12164 6WDUW #######6WRS


#########2XWSXW#FKHFN

Enter Output
Lower part of SP Screen Ç Number 31

Monitor the meter reading. If adjustment is necessary, adjust VR 1 on the T2 High Voltage Supply Board
until the meter reads 1220VDC.

NOTE: Confirm that the voltage at the front of the Transfer Roller is the same (1220VDC).
If different or erratic, replace the Transfer Roller Receptacle (AD021095) and apply conductive
grease KS660 SHIN-ETSU (G0049668) to theT2 bias voltage pin.

Check Voltage Here

Return all SP modes to their original settings.

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 16 of 17

• Paper Feed Checkpoints

3
4
1

1. Bypass Jams - Replace the Bushing 6x18x5mm (AA083003). This contains a one way bearing.

2. Paper Feed Jamming - Pick up and Separation Solenoids and linkage - ensure smooth movement.

3. Paper Feed Jamming - Replace the Feed Roller Lever (A0966353) with one way bearing. Use
Scotchbrite Pad™ to remove the glazed surface of the feed shaft.

4. Paper Feed Jamming - Replace the Gear-32Z (AB013777). This contains a one way bearing.

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 016
Page 17 of 17

• Fusing Unit

6
5

4
2

1
3

1. New Type Exit Sensor (A1725420): Addresses solder joint failure and False “C” jams.

2. New Style Stripper Holder (A1724203): Prevents the strippers from becoming dislodged.
Replace as a set

3. New Style Hot Roller Stripper Slider (A1724205): This modified part prevents the strippers from
damaging the Hot Roller.

4. New Style Hot Roller Stripper (AE044023): Also prevents the strippers from becoming dislodged.

5. “Field Fix” For Exit Jams: If the exit guide warps from heat, replace this shoulder screw with a normal
screw to secure it in a straight position, until you can replace the guide.
6. To Prevent The Possibility Of Poor Fusing (Mimizu): Install new style Pressure Springs (AA063562)
and adjust the nip band width to 9.25 ± 0.25mm.

• Recommended throughput material (special paper stocks) – See RICOH FACTSLINE # 153.

• Additional fuser maintenance when using special stocks – Refer to RICOH TSB 5106/5206-14.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#h#NEK NMfGNfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: MIXING PADDLE ROLLER


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


GENERAL:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
The Mixing Paddle Roller – B/C has been standardized with the Mixing Paddle Roller – M/Y. This was done
to prevent a SC374 or SC377 from occurring due to insufficient mixing of the developer around the Toner
Density Sensor. The Mixing Paddle Roller M/Y uses a longer Mixing Paddle Roller Mylar than the Mixing
Paddle Roller –B/C, therefore optimum mixing is achieved. The Mylar for the Mixing Paddle Roller is now
available as a service part in case a problem is found in the field. The following parts updates are being
issued for all A172 and A199 Parts Catalogs.

NOTE: The Paddle Roller Mylar (A1093174) can be installed on Mixing Paddle Roller – B/C (A1093066) by
adhering the Paddle Roller Mylar over the existing Mylar.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1093066 Mixing Paddle Roller – B/C 2→0 - 59 61 9 17
A1093067 Mixing Paddle Roller – M/Y 2→4 3 59 61 9 17
1 - 59 39
1 - 60 30
A1093174 Paddle Roller Mylar
1 - 63 31
1 - 65 35

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 310


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 017
Page 2 of 2

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will only have the Mixing Paddle Roller –M/Y
type installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER


Gestetner 2606E AB67070001
Gestetner 2606 AB4807xxxx
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A7127070001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A7137070001
Savin SDC206E 5A87070001
Savin SDC206 5A97070001

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
        
   U EMMfEKFgNEL ENfEGfML
   U
   hFJNJ
  h
 IJNF
 hFNJ

SUBJECT: OPERATION PANEL BOARD-COLOR (A172)


Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

n
GENERAL:

PARTS
To facilitate assembly, the printed circuit board has been modified to eliminate jumper wires. The following
Parts Corrections are being issued for all A172 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1721554 A1727406 Operation Panel Board – Color 1–1 0 17 12
(A172)

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 312


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NEM NEfNJfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)fFJNJ
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJfIENJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)f7('FNJ

SUBJECT: FLASHING “PLEASE WAIT” CONDITION


Note: This copy is intended as a master original


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

ELECTRICAL
SYMPTOM:
Operation Panel flashes “Please Wait”.

CAUSE:
The Fiber Optics Cables on the Main Board are connected in the incorrect order.

SOLUTION:
Connect the Cables in the correct order as pictured below.

White White Green Blue. Red.

Thin Thin Thin Thick Thin


Black Black Black Black Black
cable cable cable cable cable
No White Green No Red
stripe stripe stripe stripe stripe

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 319


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#h#NFN NEfEMfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJfFJNJ)
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#IENJfIFNJ
####7%:-2#h#7('#FNJf7('FNJ)

SUBJECT: LIGHT COPIES


Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.


SYMPTOM:

COPY QUALITY
Light copies especially in high image density or poor solid fill areas after Developer replacement (can occur
from around 1K to a few thousand scans). One or more of the following conditions may be observed in this
period.
1. Development gamma (SP Data Output page 3) may be high (around four or more).
2. Vcnt compensation value (difference between Vcnt0 and Vcnt on SP Data Output page1) is large.
3. Vt is not too different from Vref and does not look abnormal.
4. Vk is high (around 15V or more).

CAUSE:

During the “Process Control Self Check”, depending on the ID sensor characteristics, the OPC Drum, and
other related parts, determines how Vmin is detected. The Development Gamma is calculated high. The
high Development Gamma increases the Vcnt compensation value, so after each “Process Control Self
Check”, the image density decreases.

SOLUTION:
Turn off the Vcnt correction system and manually input fixed Vcnt compensation value. The optimum fixed
Vcnt compensation value is 6.

PROCEDURE:

1. If you had previously adjusted Vref (SP Data Output page 1), return it to Vref0.
2. If Toner Max M/A Target (SP Adjustment page four and page 16) was adjusted previously, return it to
default (1.000), wait 5 minutes and perform the “Process Control Self Check”.
Note: After all the procedures in this TSB are finished, check the copy quality and adjust Toner
Max M/A Target if necessary.
3. If the Vcnt correction by number of scans is on, turn it off.
(Open SP Adjustment page 16 and if data in No.1 is 00001, input 00000.)
4. Turn off the Vcnt correction by development gamma.
(Open SP Special Feature page 1 and turn off the TC Correction.)
5. Manually input Vcnt compensation value. The data to input is Vcnt data at Developer Initial Setting
minus six.
Open SP Data Output page 1 and record Vcnt0 for each color. Open SP Adjustment page12 and input
Vcnt0 – six for each color into the Toner Sensor Gain data.

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 324


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 020
Page 2 of 2

PROCEDURE CONTINUED:
6. While checking the Vt on the SP Data Output page 1, make copies of the C4 test chart (FC mode) until
the Vt stabilizes at | Vref – Vt | ≤ 0.2V.
7. Wait 5 minutes, then perform the “Process Control Self Check”.
8. If necessary, perform the ACC and the printer gamma adjustment.

NOTE: When replacing the Developer for a machine with the above troubleshooting settings entered, do not
change the setting for the Vcnt correction (keep the Vcnt corrections off). However, do not set the
Vcnt compensation value manually. The Vcnt compensation value returns to 0 (no correction) when
the Developer initial setting is performed. If Vcnt compensation value is lowered after Developer
initial setting, image density will be too light.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#h#NFN#6)-779)#+ NIfEEfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJfFJNJ)
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#IENJfIFNJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJf7('FNJ)

SUBJECT: LIGHT COPIES


Note: This copy is intended as a master original

SYMPTOM:
for reproduction of additional bulletins.


COPY QUALITY
+ Light copy quality in high image density areas or poor solid fill at around 1K to a few thousand scans after
developer replacement. One or more of the following may be observed.
1. Development gamma (SP Data Output page 3) is high (around 4 or more).
2. Vcnt compensation value (difference between Vcnt0 and Vcnt on SP Data Output page1) is large.
3. Vt is not so different from Vref and does not look abnormal.
4. Vk is high (around 15V or more).

CAUSE:
Depending on the characteristics of the ID sensor, the OPC drum, and other related components, the
Process Control Self Check may detect that development gamma (as detected by the ID sensor) is too high.
This in turn may cause an increase of the Vcnt compensation values. An increase in Vcnt compensation
values can result in light copies.

SOLUTION:
So that the Vcnt correction system can not over compensate, turn off the Vcnt correction system and
manually input a fixed Vcnt compensation value.

PROCEDURE:
1. If you have previously adjusted Vref (SP Data Output page 1) return it to the Vref0 values for BK,Y,M,C.

Record these Vref0 values of BK, Y, M, and C. Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 351


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 20 REISSUE +
Page 2 of 3

PROCEDURE continued
Enter the Vref0 values that you recorded for BK, Y, M, and C into SP Adjustments Pg. 12 as illustrated
below:

Toner Sensor Control Target = Vref


BK Y M C

2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50

2. If Toner Max M/A Target (SP Adjustment page 4) was previously adjusted, return it to the default value
(1.000). Wait 5 minutes and perform the process control self check.

NOTE: After all the procedures in this bulletin are finished, check the copy quality and adjust Toner Max
M/A Target if necessary. Increasing the value raises the toner density.

3. Turn off Vcnt by number of scans: If the Vcnt correction by number of scans is on, turn it off. (Open SP
Adjustment page 16 and if the data in No.1 is 00001, set it to 00000.)

4. Turn off the Vcnt correction by development gamma. (Open SP Special Feature page 1 and set TC
Correction to OFF.)

5. Manually input the Vcnt compensation value according to the following steps.

• Open SP Data Output page 1 and record Vcnt0 for each color.
• Open SP Adjustment page 12 and input Vcnt minus six for each color into the Toner Sensor Gain Data.

Enter the Vcnt0 values that you recorded (minus six) for BK,Y,M,C into SP Adjustment page 12 as illustrated
on the next page.

Continued…
Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 20 REISSUE +
Page 3 of 3

PROCEDURE continued
Toner Sensor Gain = Vcnt

BK Y M C

174 164 166 164

6. While checking the Vt in SP Data Output page 1, make copies of the C4 test chart (11x17/FC mode) until
the Vt stabilizes at |Vref – Vt| ≤ 0.2V.
7. Wait 5 minutes, then perform the process control self check.
8. If necessary, perform the ACC and the printer gamma adjustment.

NOTE: When you replace developer on a machine that you have performed this procedure on, do not
change the setting for the Vcnt correction (keep the Vcnt correction off), and do not set the Vcnt
compensation value manually. The Vcnt compensation value returns to 0 (no correction) when developer
initial setting is performed. If Vcnt compensation value is lowered after developer initial setting, image
density will be too light. When replacing developers it is important to remember to set Vref to 2.50 for
all colors for initialization.

PRODUCTION MACHINES:

This procedure has not been performed on production machines. The troubleshooting procedure described
in this bulletin is to be performed only when the symptom for light copies is found in the field.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NFE NEfEMfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJfFJNJ)
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJf7('FNJ)
Note: This copy is intended as a master original

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION


for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
GENERAL:

Due to part standardization, the following Parts Update is being issued for all A172/A199 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AB013318 AB014126 Gear – 17Z 1 –1 0 85 24

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Gear – 17Z installed
during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER


Gestetner 2606E AB6808xxxx
Gestetner 2606 AB4808xxxx
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A712808xxxx
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A7138080001
Savin SDC206E 5A8808xxxx
Savin SDC206 5A98080001

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 324


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NFF NGfEMfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJ)
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)

SUBJECT: OPERATION PANEL DISPLAY - COLOR


Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.


GENERAL:

PARTS
Due to a vender change, the Operation Panel Color Display for the A172 machines will have new part
numbers. The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all A172 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1727301 A1727311 Operation Panel Ass’y-LT 1-1 0 17 *
AX300004 A1721577 LCD Display - Color 1-1 3 17 24
A1721503 A1721578 LCD Harness 1-1 3 17 11
A1721500 A1721531 Operation Key Board - Color 1-1 3 17 37
A1721471 A1721469 Cap 1-1 3 17 40
A1727406 A1727407 Operation Panel Board - Color 1-1 1 17 12
A1727357 A1727371 Operation Panel Lower Cover 1-1 1 17 3

NOTES:
1. The new and the old Operation Panel Assembly are interchangeable (0).

2. The new LCD Display – Color is not interchangeable with the old part (interchangeability 3). When
replacing the old LCD display with a new part, it is necessary to replace the following parts at the same
time (interchangeability 0 as a set).
LCD Harness
Operation Key Board – Color
Cap
Operation Panel Board – Color.

3. The old parts of the following items will remain available as service parts.
LCD Harness
Cap

4. The old parts of the following items will be available only until stock runs out.
Operation Key Board – Color
LCD Display – Color

Continued…

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 335


Tech Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 – 022
Page 2 of 2

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Operation Panel
installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER


Gestetner 2606E AB6810XXXX
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A712810XXXX
Savin SDC206E 5A8810XXXX

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
NEW machines. OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NFG NHfEHfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
+)78)82)6#g#FJNJ)
6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IFNJ
7%:-2#h#7('FNJ)

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT


Note: This copy iis ntended as a master of original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL:


MANUAL
SERVICE
The Service Manual page listed below must be replaced with the page supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised area has been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.

• 1-7 Updated Information

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 345


Rev. 04/99
2.3 NEWLY-ADDED OPERATING FEATURES
•: Available æ: Not Available

Overall Machine
No. Features (A172/A199) (A109)

Information
1 Auto Image Density Full Color & Black Copy Single Color & Black Copy
2 Auto Color Calibration • æ
3 Duplex Copying • æ
4 Twin Color • æ
5 Single Color 80 (+1) colors 8 colors
6 User Color 48 colors 3 colors
7 Color Back ground 84 (+1) colors 13 colors
8 Paint 84 (+1) colors 13 colors
9 Color Line • (Edit type only) æ
10 Frame Line • (Edit type only) æ
11 Image Overlay • (Edit type only) æ
12 Area Editing See the next page

1. Auto Image Density mode can be selected when in Full Color mode.
2. Auto Color Calibration can be performed by the user.
3. Using the by-pass feed tray, rear side copying is available.
4. Twin Color mode copies black parts in black and other parts in the
selected color.
5. Single Color
(8 colors x 4 density levels) + (12 user colors x 4 density levels) + 1 scan
color = 81 colors
* scan color = Edit type only
6. User Color
12 colors x 4 density levels = 48 possible colors
The total percentages of the mixed colors must be 255% or less.
7. Color Background
(9 colors x 4 density levels) + (12 user colors x 4 density levels) + 1 scan
color = 85 colors
* scan color = Edit type only
8. Paint (Edit type only)
(9 colors x 4 density levels) + (12 user colors x 4 density levels) + 1 scan
color = 85 colors
* Scan color = Edit type only
9. Color Line (Edit type only)
In the Area Editing mode, designated lines can be colored.
Available colors: 85 colors = 81 Single colors + (Bk x 4 density levels)

SM 1-7 A172/A199
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U %EKFf%EMM#g#NFH NIfNGfMM
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#FJNJfFJNJ)
####6-'3,#h#%*-'-3#'3036#IENJfIFNJ
####7%:-2#h#7('FNJf#7('FNJ)

SUBJECT: BELT DRIVE ROLLER


Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

„PARTS
GENERAL:

To prevent the mis-registration of colors, the material of the belt drive roller has been changed. The new
roller has higher friction to prevent slipping of the belt after the Transfer Belt Switchback operation. The
following Parts Update is being issued for all A172/A199 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1096063 A1096062 Belt Drive Roller 1 1 67 14

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style Belt Drive Roller
installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER


Gestetner 2606e AB69010001
Gestetner 2606 AB49010001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A7128120001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A7138120001
Savin SDC206 5A98120001
Savin SDC206E 5A88120001

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 348


TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A172/A199 - 025 09/08/99
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – 2606E/2606
RICOH – Aficio Color 5206/5106
SAVIN – SDC206E/SDC206

SUBJECT: MAIN BOARD ROM REVISION J


Note: This copy is intended as a master original

! SOFTWARE
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

GENERAL: The Main Board ROM’s have been modified as follows.


A1725114G ! A1725114J
A1725115G ! A1725115J
A1725129G ! A1725129J

NOTE: Revisions “H” and “I” do not exist.

The software modification has been made to solve the following four problems.

PROBLEM 1: An operation counter error occurs when upgrading the Main Board ROM’s from revision
D or older to revisions E, F, or G.

CAUSE: The address to store operation counter data was incorrect.

SOLUTION: An additional program has been installed to shift the operation counter data to the new
address when replacing the Main Board ROM’s.

NOTE: When installing the ROM revisions “J” on a machine, which has the ROM revisions
“D” or older, the following procedure is necessary to shift the operation counter data to the
new address. The following procedure is not necessary when replacing ROM revisions
“E” or newer.
1. Turn off the Main Switch and replace the old ROMs (revision D or older) with the ROM
revision J.
2. Turn on the Dip-Switch no. 2 on the Main Board.
3. Turn on the Main Switch.
4. Turn off the Main Switch after the “Please Wait” screen has disappeared and the
normal screen is displayed on the Operation Panel.
5. Turn off the Dip-Switch no. 2 on the Main Control Board.

Continued...

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 375


Technical Service Bulletin No. A172/A199 - 025
Page 2 of 2

PROBLEM 2: A dirty background is produced on copies with the Main Board ROM revisions E, F, and G.

CAUSE: A programming error is causing a 300-msec time delay on the Cleaning Blade for the
Transfer Belt.

SOLUTION: The Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade timing program has been corrected.

NOTE: This problem does not exist with the Main Board ROM revisions D or older.

PROBLEM 3: A blurred image is produced while making a black and white copy in ACS mode with
Main Board ROM revisions E, F, and G.

CAUSE: A programming error is causing a 300-msec time delay on the Transfer Roller.

SOLUTION: A software modification has been made to correct the timing of the Transfer Roller.

NOTE: This problem does not exist with the Main Board ROM revisions D or older.

PROBLEM 4: A blank margin in the main scan direction when making a copy in single color black mode
using a special program in User Tool. This problem occurs after a print job is sent to the
copier.

CAUSE: The timing program to send data to the IPU was incorrect.

SOLUTION: The timing program has been corrected.

NOTE: This problem does not exist with the Main Board ROM revisions D or older.

The Main Board ROMs revision J (A172MA3J.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical
Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com.

UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new Main Board ROM
modifications during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER


Gestetner Model 2606 AB4901XXXX
Gestetner Model 2606e AB69030001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5106 A7139010001
Ricoh Aficio Color 5206 A7129010001
Savin Model SDC206 5A99010001
Savin Model SDC206E 5A89010001
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A172/A199 - 026 10/05/99
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – 2606E/2606
RICOH – AFICIO 5206/5106
SAVIN – SDC206E/206

SUBJECT: PRESSURE ROLLER


Note: This copy is intended as a master original

GENERAL:

!
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

PARTS
The material of the Pressure Roller has been standardized with other Pressure Rollers. The following part
update is being issued for all A172 and A199 Parts Catalogs. Please update your Parts Catalogs with the
following information.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
AE020076 AE020088 Pressure Roller 1 0 85 9

UNITS AFFECTED:
A172 and A199 Serial Number cut-ins not available at time of publication.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:

OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 385


TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
BULLETIN NUMBER: A172/A199 - 027 02/02/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER – 2606E/2606
RICOH – AFICIO COLOR 5206/5106
SAVIN – SDC206E/206

SUBJECT: PAPER JAMS IN FUSING UNIT


Note: This copy is intended as a master original
for reproduction of additional bulletins.

!
SYMPTOM:

MECHANICAL
Paper jams in the Fusing Unit when making continuous single color copies.

CAUSE:
A sufficient amount of Silicone Oil is not being maintained on the Hot Roller when making continuous single
color copies.

SOLUTION:
The Oil Supply Bracket and the Spring Plate – Oil Supply Pad have been modified to apply Silicone Oil to the

!
edge of the Oil Supply Pad. This modification will maintain a sufficient amount of Silicone Oil on the Hot

PARTS
Roller when oil consumption is high, such as the making of continuous single color copies.

GENERAL:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A172 and A199 Parts Catalogs. Please update your
Parts Catalogs with the following information.

REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A1094161 A1724161 Spring Plate – Oil Supply Pad 1 1 81 13
A1094162 A1724162 Oil Supply Bracket 1 3 81 15

UNITS AFFECTED:
Available as service parts only.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:

OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 010CLR

You might also like